Computer Basics PDF

Computer Basics
Student Edition
Complete
University of Salford
© 2003 by CustomGuide, Inc. 1502 Nicollet Avenue South, Suite 1; Minneapolis, MN 55403
This material is copyrighted and all rights are reserved by CustomGuide, Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
CustomGuide, Inc.
We make a sincere effort to ensure the accuracy of the material described herein; however, CustomGuide makes no warranty,
expressed or implied, with respect to the quality, correctness, reliability, accuracy, or freedom from error of this document or the
products it describes. Data used in examples and sample data files are intended to be fictional. Any resemblance to real
persons or companies is entirely coincidental.
The names of software products referred to in this manual are claimed as trademarks of their respective companies.
CustomGuide is a registered trademark of CustomGuide, Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7
Chapter One: The Essentials ............................................................................................ 11

Lesson 1-1: Hardware, Software, and Information Technology (IT) ................................... 12
Lesson 1-2: Computer Overview ......................................................................................... 14
Lesson 1-3: The Front of a Computer and Peripheral Devices ............................................ 16
Lesson 1-4: The Inside of a Computer ................................................................................. 18
Lesson 1-5: The Back of a Computer (Ports) ...................................................................... 20
Lesson 1-6: System Bus and Expansion Cards .................................................................... 22
Lesson 1-7: Memory Cache ................................................................................................. 24
Lesson 1-8: Computer Performance .................................................................................... 26
Lesson 1-9: Buying a Desktop Computer ............................................................................ 28
Lesson 1-10: Buying a Notebook Computer ....................................................................... 30
Lesson 1-11: Upgrading a Computer ................................................................................... 32
Chapter One Review ............................................................................................................ 34
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware ........................................................................ 37
Lesson 2-1: Central Processing Unit (CPU) ........................................................................ 38
Lesson 2-2: Memory ............................................................................................................ 40
Lesson 2-3: RAM and ROM ................................................................................................ 42
Lesson 2-4: Mouse............................................................................................................... 44
Lesson 2-5: Keyboard .......................................................................................................... 46
Lesson 2-6: Digital Cameras and Web Cams ....................................................................... 48
Lesson 2-7: Other Input Devices ......................................................................................... 50
Lesson 2-8: Monitor ............................................................................................................ 52
Lesson 2-9: Graphics Card .................................................................................................. 54
Lesson 2-10: Printer Basics ................................................................................................. 56
Lesson 2-11: Types of Printers ............................................................................................. 58
Lesson 2-12: Sound and Speakers ....................................................................................... 60
Lesson 2-13: Modem ........................................................................................................... 62
Lesson 2-14: Input/Output Devices ..................................................................................... 63
Lesson 2-15: Hard Drive ..................................................................................................... 64
Lesson 2-16: Hard Drive Maintenance ................................................................................ 66
Lesson 2-17: CD-ROM Drive ............................................................................................. 68
Lesson 2-18: DVD Drive ..................................................................................................... 70
Lesson 2-19: Floppy Drive .................................................................................................. 72
Lesson 2-20: Zip and Jaz Drives.......................................................................................... 73
Lesson 2-21: Other Storage Devices .................................................................................... 74
Lesson 2-22: Formatting a Disk .......................................................................................... 75
Chapter Two Review ........................................................................................................... 76
Chapter Three: Understanding Software ...................................................................... 81
4 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-1: Understanding Graphical User Interfaces ......................................................... 82

Lesson 3-2: Types of Software ............................................................................................. 83
Lesson 3-3: Operating Systems............................................................................................ 84
Lesson 3-4: Word Processing ............................................................................................... 86
Lesson 3-5: Spreadsheets ..................................................................................................... 87
Lesson 3-6: Databases.......................................................................................................... 88
Lesson 3-7: Presentation Software ....................................................................................... 90
Lesson 3-8: Accounting ....................................................................................................... 91
Lesson 3-9: Web Browsing .................................................................................................. 92
Lesson 3-10: Web Authoring ............................................................................................... 93
Lesson 3-11: Programming Languages ................................................................................ 94
Lesson 3-12: Systems Development .................................................................................... 96
Chapter Three Review ......................................................................................................... 98
Chapter Four: Information Networks .......................................................................... 103
Lesson 4-1: Introduction to Networks................................................................................ 104
Lesson 4-2: The Internet .................................................................................................... 106
Lesson 4-3: Intranets and Extranets ................................................................................... 108
Lesson 4-4: Telephones and Networks ............................................................................... 110
Chapter Four Review ......................................................................................................... 112
Chapter Five: Introduction to Windows XP .................................................................117
Lesson 5-1: Starting and Logging On to Windows XP Home............................................ 118
Lesson 5-2: Starting and Logging On to Windows XP Professional .................................. 119
Lesson 5-3: Understanding the Windows XP Screen ......................................................... 120
Lesson 5-4: A Look at the New Windows XP Start Menu ................................................. 122
Lesson 5-5: Using the Mouse: Pointing, Clicking and Double-clicking ............................ 124
Lesson 5-6: Using the Mouse: Clicking and Dragging ...................................................... 126
Lesson 5-7: Using the Mouse: Right-clicking.................................................................... 128
Lesson 5-8: Using the Keyboard ........................................................................................ 130
Lesson 5-9: Exiting Windows and Turning Off Your Computer ........................................ 132
Chapter Five Review.......................................................................................................... 134
Chapter Six: Working with a Window .......................................................................... 137
Lesson 6-1: Starting a Program .......................................................................................... 138
Lesson 6-2: Understanding the Parts of a Window ............................................................ 140
Lesson 6-3: Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring a Window ...................................... 142
Lesson 6-4: Closing a Window .......................................................................................... 144
Lesson 6-5: Moving a Window .......................................................................................... 145
Lesson 6-6: Sizing a Window ............................................................................................ 146
Lesson 6-7: Switching Between Windows ......................................................................... 148
Chapter Six Review ........................................................................................................... 150
Chapter Seven: Working with Programs ...................................................................... 153
Lesson 7-1: Using Menus .................................................................................................. 154
Lesson 7-2: Using Toolbars ............................................................................................... 156
Lesson 7-3: Filling Out a Dialog Box ................................................................................ 158
Lesson 7-4: Entering Text in the WordPad Program .......................................................... 160
Lesson 7-5: Editing Text .................................................................................................... 162
Lesson 7-6: Saving and Opening a File ............................................................................. 164
Lesson 7-7: Selecting, Replacing, and Deleting Text ......................................................... 166
Lesson 7-8: Using Undo .................................................................................................... 168
Lesson 7-9: Printing a File ................................................................................................. 169
Lesson 7-10: Cutting, Copying and Pasting Text ............................................................... 170
Lesson 7-11: Changing the Font Type and Size ................................................................. 172
Lesson 7-12: Using Bold, Italics and Underline ................................................................ 174
Lesson 7-13: Changing Paragraph Alignment ................................................................... 175
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.

Introduction 5
Lesson 7-14: Getting Help by Contents ............................................................................. 176
Lesson 7-15: Getting Help with the Help Index and Search .............................................. 178
Lesson 7-16: Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations ........................................ 180
Chapter Seven Review ....................................................................................................... 182
Chapter Eight: Working with Files and Folders ......................................................... 191
Lesson 8-1: Understanding Storage Devices, Folders and Files ........................................ 192
Lesson 8-2: U ing M C m e See Wha in Y C m e .................................. 194
Lesson 8-3: Opening a Folder ............................................................................................ 196
Lesson 8-4: Creating and Renaming a Folder .................................................................... 198
Lesson 8-5: Copying, Moving and Deleting a Folder ........................................................ 200
Lesson 8-6: Opening, Renaming and Deleting a File ........................................................ 202
Lesson 8-7: Copying and Moving a File ........................................................................... 204
Lesson 8-8: Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin ............................... 206
Lesson 8-9: A Closer Look at Files and Folders ................................................................ 208
Lesson 8-10: Changing How Information is Displayed ..................................................... 210
Lesson 8-11: Selecting Multiple Files and Folders ............................................................ 212
Lesson 8-12: Finding a File Using the Search Companion................................................ 214
Lesson 8-13: Managing the Search Companion ................................................................ 216
Lesson 8-14: Using Windows Explorer ............................................................................. 218
Lesson 8-15: File Management Using Windows Explorer ................................................ 220
Lesson 8-16: Using MS-DOS ............................................................................................ 222
Lesson 8-17: Creating and Using a Compressed Folder .................................................... 224
Chapter Eight Review ........................................................................................................ 226
Chapter Nine: Exploring the Internet .........................................................................235
Lesson 9-1: Introduction to the Internet............................................................................. 236
Lesson 9-2: Connecting to the Internet .............................................................................. 238
Lesson 9-3: Displaying a Specific Web Page .................................................................... 240
Lesson 9-4: Browsing the Web .......................................................................................... 242
Lesson 9-5: Searching the Web.......................................................................................... 244
Lesson 9-6: Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing Your Home Page ................. 246
Lesson 9-7: Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages.................................................... 248
Lesson 9-8: Clearing the History of Visited Web Pages .................................................... 249
Lesson 9-9: Downloading Pictures and Files ..................................................................... 250
Lesson 9-10: Understanding the Information Bar.............................................................. 252
Lesson 9-11: Using the Pop-up Blocker ............................................................................ 253
Lesson 9-12: Understanding Information Security ............................................................ 254
Lesson 9-13: Understanding Windows Firewall ................................................................ 255
Lesson 9-14: Introduction to E-mail .................................................................................. 256
Lesson 9-15: Composing and Sending E-mail................................................................... 258
Lesson 9-16: Adding a Name to the Address Book ........................................................... 260
Lesson 9-17: Receiving E-mail.......................................................................................... 262
Lesson 9-18: Replying to a Message ................................................................................. 264
Lesson 9-19: Forwarding and Deleting a Message ............................................................ 265
Chapter Nine Review ......................................................................................................... 266
Index ...................................................................................................................................274
Introduction
Welcome to CustomGuide: Computer Basics. CustomGuide courseware allows instructors to
c ea e and in man al ha c n ain he ecific le n ha be mee hei den need .
In other words, this book was designed and printed just for you.
Unlike most other computer-training courseware, each CustomGuide manual is uniquely
designed to be three books in one:
Step-by-step instructions make this manual great for use in an instructor-led class or as a
self-paced tutorial.
Detailed descriptions, illustrated diagrams, informative tables, and an index make this
manual suitable as a reference guide when you want to learn more about a topic or
process.
The handy Quick Reference box, found on the last page of each lesson, is great for when
you need to know how to do something quickly.
CustomGuide manuals are designed both for users who want to learn the basics of the
software and those who want to learn more advanced features.
He e h aC mG ide man al i gani ed:
Chapters
Each man al i di ided in e e al cha e . A en e if e ead f a cha e ? L k
at the prerequisites that appear at the beginning of each chapter. They will tell you what you
should know before you start the chapter.
Lessons
Each chapter contains several lessons on related topics. Each lesson explains a new skill or
topic and contains a step-by-step exercise to give you hands-on-experience.
Chapter Reviews
A review is included at the end of each chapter to help you absorb and retain all that you have
lea ned. Thi e ie c n ain a b ief eca f e e hing c e ed in he cha e le n , a
i a e h m ch e lea ned (and hich le n migh an l k e
again), and a homework assignment where you can put your new kill in ac ice. If e
having problems with a homework exercise, you can always refer back to the lessons in the
chapter to get help.
8 Computer Basics
How to Use the Lessons

Every topic is presented on two facing pages, so that you can concentrate on the lesson
without having to worry about turning the page. Since this is a hands-on course, each lesson
contains an exercise with step-by-step instructions for you to follow.
To make learning easier, every exercise follows certain conventions:
An hing e posed to click, drag, or press appears like this.
An hing e ed ea ea like this.
Thi b k ne e a me kn he e ( ha ) me hing i . The fi ime e
ld click me hing, a ic e f ha e ed click appears either in the
margin next to the step or in the illustrations at the beginning of the lesson.
Illustrations show what your

screen should look like as you 24 Microsoft Excel 2000
follow the lesson. They also 24 Microsoft Excel 2000
describe controls, dialog boxes,
and processes.
Lesson
Lesson4-2:
4-2:Formatting
FormattingValues
Values
Figure 4-3
TheFigure
Numbers tab4-3
of the
Format
The Cells dialog
Numbers tabbox.
of the Preview of the
Format Cells dialog box. selected number
Preview of the
Figure 4-4 Select a number
format
selected number
category
TheFigure 4-4
Expense Report Select a number
format
worksheet values Report
before category
The Expense
being formatted.
worksheet values before
Select a number
being formatted.
Figure 4-5 format
Select a number
TheFigure 4-5 format
Expense Report
worksheet values Report
The Expense after being
formatted.
worksheet values after being
formatted.
An easy-to-understand
Figure 4-3
introduction explains the task or Figure 4-3
topic covered in the lesson and
hat ou ll be doing in the
exercise.
Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5

In this lesson, you will learn how to apply number formats. Applying number formatting changes
You can also format howIn values are displayed
this lesson, i d how
you will learn e n tochange he ac al
apply number inf maApplying
formats. i n in annumber
a . Eformatting
cel i ften changes
Tips and traps appear in the values
You by
canusing
Formatting
the
also format
values by toolbar
using the
smart
howenough
sign
values to
to indicate
smart
areapply
enoughcurrency
some number
displayed
to apply (such
i d e formatting
some as
n change automatically.
$548.67),
number
he ac al inf For
Excel will
formatting
ma iexample,
automatically
automatically.
n in an if you
Forapply
a . Eusecela dollar
the currency
example,
i ften
if you usenumber
a dollar
margin. or Formatting
by selectingtoolbar
Format Cells
or by selecting
format
sign for you. currency (such as $548.67), Excel will automatically apply the currency number
to indicate
format for you.
The Formatting toolbar has five buttons (Currency, Percent, Comma, Increase Decimal, and
from the menu
Format and
Cells The Formatting
Decrease Decimal)toolbar
you canhasusefive buttons apply
to quickly (Currency,
common Percent, Comma,
number Increase
formats. If none Decimal,
of theseandbuttons
clicking
from the menu and
Number tab.
clicking the ha Decrease
ha Decimal)
e l king youf can
, useneedto quickly
e apply
he F common
ma Cell number
dialog formats. If none of
box by selecting these buttons
Format
Icons and pictures appear in the Number tab. ha from
Cells
dialCells
ha the menu
g b from
e l and
i nthea menu
king f , theneed
clicking
fa aand clicking
Number etab.
ing he thelba Number
heFormatting
F ma Cellnumbers
, b i tab.
gi eFormatting
dialog with
morenumbers
box bytheselecting
precisionwith
and the
Format
Format Cells
Format Cells
formatting options.
margin, showing you what to Wedial
ll gebb hi me n ha dfa ina hi ing le he n. lba , b i gi e more precision and formatting options.
We ll e b h me h d in hi le n.
click or look for. 1. Select the cell range D5:D17 and click the Comma Style button on
Comma Style 1.theSelect the celltoolbar.
Formatting range D5:D17 and click the Comma Style button on
Comma
buttonStyle theadds
Excel Formatting toolbar.(the comma) and two decimal places to the selected cell
a hundreds separator
button Excel adds a hundreds separator (the comma) and two decimal places to the selected cell
range.
Clear step-by-step instructions range.
guide you through the exercise.

Anything you need to click
appears like this.

Introduction 9
When ee a ke b a d in c i n like e <Ctrl> + , h ld e and

hold the first key (<Ctrl> in this example) while you press the second key ( in this
e am le). Then, af e e e ed b h ke , can elea e hem.
There is usually more than one way to do something in Word. The exercise explains the
most common method of doing something, while the alternate methods appear in the
margin. Use whatever approach feels most comfortable for you.
Important terms appear in italics he fi ime he e e en ed.
Whene e me hing i e eciall diffic l can ea il g ng, ll ee a:
NOTE:
immediately after the e , a ning f i fall ha c ld enc n e if en
careful.
Our exclusive Quick Reference box appears at the end of every lesson. You can use it to
e ie he kill e lea ned in he le n and a a hand efe ence when you need
kn h d me hing fa and d n need e h gh he am le e e ci e .
Formatting a Worksheet 25
Formatting a Worksheet 25
2. Click cell A4 and type Annual Sales.

2. Click cell A4inand
The numbers type Annual
this column Sales. as currency.
should be formatted Anything you need to type
The numbers in this column should be formatted as currency.
3. Press <Enter> to confirm your entry and overwrite the existing appears like this.
3. Press <Enter> to confirm your entry and overwrite the existing
information.
information.
4. Select the cell range G5:G17 and click the Currency Style button on
4. Select the cell range
the Formatting G5:G17 and click the Currency Style button on
toolbar. Currency Style
theA Formatting Currency Style
button
dollar sign and toolbar.
two decimal places are added to the values in the selected cell range.
A dollar sign and two decimal places are added to the values in the selected cell range. Otherbutton
Ways to Apply Whenever there is more than
5. Select the cell range F5:F17 and click the Percent Style button on Other Ways to
Currency Apply
Formatting:
5. Select the cell range
the Formatting F5:F17 and click the Percent Style button on
toolbar. Currency Formatting:
Type the dollar sign ($) one way to do something, the
theExcel
Formatting toolbar.
applies percentage style number formatting to the information in the Tax column.
Typebefore you enter
the dollar a number.
sign ($)
before you enter a number. most common method is
Excel
N applies
ice he percentage style number
e i n a decimal lace Eformatting
cel ndto an
the information
decimal lacein the Tax column.
he nea e h le
N nice
mbe he . eTha
i n i andecimal
i ablelace
he e E cel annd incl
an decimal lace lacehe nea
de a decimal acc e a elh leh presented in the exercise and
n mbe . Thatax
the exact i nrate. i able he e an incl de a decimal lace acc a el h
the exact tax rate. the alternate methods are
6. With the Tax cell range still selected, click the Increase Decimal
6. With the Tax
button cellFormatting
on the range still toolbar.
selected, click the Increase Decimal presented in the margin.
button on the
Excel adds Formatting
one decimal place totoolbar.
the information in the tax rate column.
Excel
Ne adds
, onean decimal place he
change to da
theeinformation
f ma in he in da
theetax
c lrate
mn.column.
The e i n a F ma Da e
Nebutton
, onan change hetoolbar,
the Formatting da e f somayouinwill
he da
havee ctol format
mn. Thetheedate
i n column
a F ma usingDathe
e
button on the
Format Formatting
Cells toolbar, so you will have to format the date column using the
dialog box.
Format Cells dialogtoolbar
The Formatting box. is great for quickly applying the most common formatting options to
Thecell
Formatting
, b i d toolbar
e n ffeis great
e e fora quickly
ailable applying
f ma ing the most
i n.common
T ee and/formatting
e e options
e toible
cellcharacter
, b i dformatting
e n ffe option
e e youa ailable
have tof use
ma the
ingFormati n.Cells
T ee and/box. You
dialog e e ecan openible
the
character
Formatformatting option youeither
haveselecting
to use theFormat
Format CellsCellsdialog box.menu
You or
canright-clicking
open the
Format
Cells dialog
and selecting Format
Cells dialog
box by
box Cells fromselecting
by either the shortcut
from the
menu.Cells from the menu or right-clicking
Format Tables provide summaries of the
and selecting Format Cells from the shortcut menu.
7. With the Date cell range still selected, select Format Cells from terms, toolbar buttons, or
7. With
thethe Dateselect
menu, cell range still from
4-Mar-97 selected, select
the Type Format
list Cells OK.
box and click from Quick Reference
the menu, select 4-Mar-97 from the Type list box and click OK.
Quick Reference
To Apply Number shortcuts covered in the lesson.
Tha all he e i f ma ing al e n a diffic l a h gh i ld be, a i ? The To Formatting:
Apply Number
Thafollowing
all hetable
e i lists
f the
ma five
ing buttons
al e non the Formatting
a diffic l a toolbar
h you
gh ican use
ldto
be,apply
a number
i ? The Formatting:
Select the cell or cell range
formatting
following tabletolists
the values
the fiveinbuttons
your worksheets.
on the Formatting toolbar you can use to apply number
youthe
Select want
celltoorformat and click
cell range
formatting to the values in your worksheets.
you the appropriate
want to format andnumberclick
Table 4-2: Number Formatting Buttons on the Formatting Toolbar the formatting
appropriatebutton(s)
number on the
Table 4-2:
Button Number Formatting
Name Example Buttons
Formattingon the Formatting Toolbar Formatting
formatting toolbar.
button(s) on the
Button Name Example Formatting toolbar.
$1,000.00 Formatting
Or...
Adds a dollar sign, comma, and two decimal places.
Currency
Currency $1,000.00 Adds a dollar sign, comma, and two decimal places.
Or... Select the cell or cell range you CustomGuide s e clusive Quick
want
Select thetocell
format, select
or cell rangeFormat
you
Percent
Percent
100%
100%
Displays the value as a percentage with no decimal places.
Displays the value as a percentage with no decimal places.
want toCells
format,
the Number
from the menu,
select Formatclick Reference is great for when you
Cells from thetab,menu,and click
specify
Comma 1,000
1,000
Separates thousands with a comma.
Separates thousands with a comma.
the Number tab, and specify want
the
the to
number formatting
apply.formatting you want
number
you need to know how to do
Comma
Increase Decimal 1000.00
1000.00
Increases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
Increases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
toOr...
apply.
Or... Select the cell or cell range you
something fast. It also lets you
Increase Decimal
Decrease Decimal 1000.0 Decreases the number of digits after the decimal point by one Select thetocell
want
wantcell
to or
format,
cell range
format,
right-click
or cell range you
and select
right-click the
the
review what ou ve learned in
Decrease Decimal 1000.0 Decreases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
cell Format
Format
Cellsand
or cell range
menu, clickfrom
Cells
fromselect
the the
the shortcut
Number tab,
shortcut the lesson.
menu,andclick
specify the number
the Number tab,
andformatting
specify theyou want to apply.
number
formatting you want to apply.
Chapter One: The
Essentials
Chapter Objectives: Prerequisites
A desire to learn about
Learn the difference between hardware and software
computers.
Discover the various types of computers and their roles
See ha on he f on , back, and in ide of a com e
Learn about the various ports on a computer
Unde and ha de e mine a com e e fo mance
See what you should look for when buying a computer
Computers are useful: they help us write letters, find information on the Internet, and even
create our own music CDs. Some people love computers they speak a different language
that includes nonsensical words like IP address and gigabytes. But most of us are somewhat
clueless when it comes to computers. We know how to turn our computer on, how to surf the
In e ne (ma be), and h i e a ick le e n a d ce . B ha ab i we
have to ask our kids or friends for help when something goes wrong, which is all the time.
Thi g ide ake me f he m e fc m e . In hi cha e e ll ake a g d ha d
l k a a c m e f m he f n , back, and e , e en in ide. Y ll nde and what all those
c nf ing n he back f he c m e a e f and h i im an f c m e
to have a fast CPU. Be f all, e ll e lain all f hi in im le e m , n need an
engineering degree to understand everything.
Ready to tackle your computer? Great n he age and le ge a ed
12 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-1: Hardware, Software,

and Information Technology (IT)
Figure 1-1
A typical computer setup
Figure 1-2
Microsoft Word is an
example of a software
application.
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Your desk probably contains a jumble of equipment commonly known as a computer. But
what is all that stuff? What does a computer do? Unlike many other tools or appliances that
have limited purposes, a computer can do any number of things:
Write letters
Browse the Internet
Send e-mail messages to people around the world
Play games
Help you balance your budget
and ha j he beginning f ha can d ihac m e!
2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Chapter One: The Essentials 13
Two basic components make up a computer: hardware and software. Y im l can ha e

one without the other. All computer parts that you can physically see or touch are called
hardware. Ha d a e incl de he c m e m ni , ca e, ke b a d, m e, and in e .
Computer programs that tell hardware how to operate are called software. You may have
used software such as Microsoft Excel or Corel WordPerfect in the past. So breathe a giant
sigh of relief d n ha e kn h g am a c m e e ne. A c m e
programmer has already done the work for you by writing the program (software). All you
ha e d i ell he f a e ha e ing d , and he f a e hen di ec he
work of the hardware.
Your computer setup
Figure 1-1 shows an example of a typical compu e e and i c m nen , b d n may differ from the
worry if your setup is different. More than likely, you have all the parts that you need, and one shown in Figure
those parts are properly connected. In any case, Table 1-1: Parts of a Computer, provides 1-1. For example, you
more details about each individual component. might have a computer
case that is tall and
IT, short for Information Technology, is the broad subject related to computers and skinny (tower case) or
managing and processing information, especially within large organizations. Many large a flat screen monitor.
companies have departments full of computer experts called IT departments.
Table 1-1: Parts of a Computer

Component Description
Case or System The main computer box, technically known as the system unit, is the most
Unit important part of a computer. It contains the guts and brains of the computer
something e ll talk about later. The s stem unit contains a lot of holes or ports
where you plug in the rest of the computer system.
Monitor The monitor resembles a television set, and is where the computer displays
information.
Quick Reference
Keyboard The keyboard is the thing you type on to tell your computer what to do.
A typical computer
Mouse Like the keyboard, the mouse is another input device that you use to includes the following:
communicate with your computer.
System unit
Speakers Most computers can make sounds, just like a stereo system. In fact, you can Monitor
even listen to audio CD s on most computers or atch DVDs.
Keyboard
Printer A printer is where a computer writes down information or output, onto paper, or Mouse
a hardcopy.
Speakers
Printer
Hardware:
A computer item you can
physically see or touch.
Software:
A computer program that
tells computer hardware
how to operate.
IT:
Information Technology is
the broad subject related
to computers and
managing and processing
information.
14 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-2: Computer Overview

Figure 1-3
How a computer works.
Figure 1-4
Comparing a TV to a PC.
Input Process/Storage Output

You communicate with the The computer processes data, The computer communicates
computer via an input device makes calculations, directs its results to you via an output
such as a mouse, a keyboard, the work of the hardware, and device such as a monitor, a
or a joystick. stores your files. printer, or speakers.
Figure 1-3
Input
The remote control talks to the TV;
the mouse and the keyboard talk to
the computer.
Process/Storage
The cable box deciphers which
channel you want to watch; the
CPU translates your instructions
(via software) to the hardware.
Output
The television displays the
channel; the monitor displays the
Figure 1-4 results.
Computers are not really as complicated as they initially seem. You just have to learn the
basic functions of the various parts, and then you can separate them into three categories:
Input
Any device that lets you talk to the computer (such as a mouse or keyboard).
Process/Storage
Main functions of a computer, which happen inside the computer case. Not surprisingly,
the Central Processing Unit (CPU) does all the processing; the storage function is
handled by any number of drives (hard, floppy, Zip, tape-backup, CD/DVD-ROM) or
disks (compact discs or floppy diskettes).
Output
Any device that lets the computer talk to you (such as a monitor or speakers).
If you're having trouble understanding this input/output stuff, think of your home television
(TV) set. Televisions and computers are similar in several ways:
The remote control is comparable to the mouse (or any other input device such as a
mouse or joystick).
A remote control The cable box (while not nearly as powerful as a computer) is similar to a computer in
communicates with a
television much like a that it can process information (such as deciphering which channel you want to watch)
mouse communicates and, if programmable, store information (such as when to show the film using a built-in
with a computer. timer).
The TV displays the channel much like a monitor displays information.

There are several different types of computer systems out there. Here's a very brief description
f he m c mm n ne
Table 1-2: Types of Computers

Computer Description
A mainframe is a big, powerful, expensive computer that can support many users at
the same time. Large businesses and organizations use mainframes.
Capacity: Enormous - the capacity of several hundred or even thousands of PCs
Speed: Very fast - much, much faster than a PC
Mainframe Cost: Very, very expensive - can usually only be afforded by large organizations
Users: Only used by large businesses and organizations
A PC is a personal computer, originally designed by IBM way back in 1981. Many
different companies make PCs, but all of them are IBM-compatible. What this
means, according to Bill Gates, is that they will all run Microsoft Windows.
Capacity: Average hard disk size is 20 GB to 80 GB
Speed: Fast. Average speed is from 1 GHz to 3 GHz
PC Cost: Fairly inexpensive - under $1,000 - and getting cheaper every day!
Users: Just about ever one uses a PC! Homes, offices, schools
Developed by Apple, a Macintosh is a computer, but it is NOT a PC. Macs have a
different operating system and use their own software and hardware.
Speed: Fast. Average speed is from 500 MHz to 2 GHz
Cost: Fairly inexpensive, but usually more than an equivalent PC
Mac
Users: Just about everyone, especially in the education and design fields
A network is a group of computers that are connected so that they can share
equipment and information. Most people on a network use workstations, which are
simply PCs that are connected to the network. A server is a central computer where
users on the network can save their files and information.
Capacity: (Workstation) Same as a PC, only needs an inexpensive network card
(Server) Greater than a PC, often more than 100 GE
Speed: (Workstation) Same as a PC
Networked (Server) Generally faster than a PC, may use multiple CPUs
Computer Cost: (Workstation) Same as a PC Quick Reference
(Server) More expensive than a PC but not as costly as a mainframe The Basic Computer
Users: (Workstation) People in a networked office or organization Processes Are:
(Server) Generally a network administrator or engineer
1. Input
A laptop, or notebook, is a lighter and more portable version of a PC or Mac that 2. Processing
can run on batteries.
3. Output
Different Types of
Speed: Fast, but slightly less than a PC. Average speed is from 700 MHz to 2 GHz
Computers Include:
Laptop Cost: Fairly inexpensive, but more than an equivalent PC
Users: People on the move, especially business people and students Mainframes
A PDA (Personal Data Assistant) is a handheld computer that is generally used to PCs
keep track of appointments and addresses. Macs
Capacity: Much smaller than a PC - 8 MB to 64 MB of storage space Servers
Speed: Much slower than a PC - 8 MHz to 266 MHz Laptops
Palmtop/PDA Cost: Expensive when compared to the capacities of a PC
Users: Business people and others who need to be organized Palmtops or PDAs
16 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-3: The Front of a

Computer and Peripheral Devices
Figure 1-5
The front of a computer
case.
Scanner
Monitor
Printer
Speakers
CD-ROM or System unit

DVD player Floppy drive
Keyboard
Mouse
Figure 1-5
The system unit or computer case is that plastic box that sits under your monitor or desk and
is covered with slots, buttons, and lights. Computer cases come in several shapes and sizes.
Older computers often have the horizontal desktop case, which has gradually been replaced
by the vertical tower case. Manufacturers are now phasing out the tallest towers because the
compact size of the smallest tower, known as a mini-tower, is attractive to consumers.
Everything outside of and connected to the system unit is called peripherals. You can add
dozens of peripherals and accessories to make it more useful and fun. Common peripherals
include printers, scanners, external hard drives, CD-ROM drives, and digital cameras. Many
peripherals are considered to be input devices, because they allow you to talk to your
computer by inputting information. Other peripherals are output devices, because they let your
computer talk back to you. One more thing: all peripherals are considered to be part of a
c m e ha d a e.
Table 1-3: Wha on he F on o O ide of a Com e Ca e?

Item Description
System Unit or A plastic or metal case with slots, buttons, and lights in the front and holes
Computer Case in the back. This is the most important part of a computer because it
contains the Central Processing Unit (CPU). The system unit directs the
computer, performs calculations, and stores information.
Floppy Drive Reads and writes to 3½-inch floppy disks. A floppy disk can store about
1.5 MB of information about as much as a novel.

Item Description
Hard Drive The computer s main, long-term storing device. Unlike floppy disks and
(Not shown) CD-ROMs, you typically cannot remove a hard disk.
CD-ROM or DVD Drive CD-ROMs and DVDs for your computer can store lots of information and
look exactly like CDs for your stereo and DVDs for your home DVD
player. In fact, you can listen to audio CDs on a CD-ROM drive and even
watch DVD movies on a DVD drive.
The only real difference between a CD-ROM and a DVD is how much
information they can store. A CD-ROM can store at least 700 MB
(megabytes) of information, while a DVD can store much more up to
4.7 GB (gigabytes) or 9.4 GB on a dual-layer DVD.
Most CD-ROMs and DVD are read-only, meaning ou can t rite
information to them. You can buy special CD-ROM and DVD drives that
can write or burn information to special CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, and DVD-
RW discs.
Zip Drive A special type of disk drive that can read and write to Zip disks. A Zip disk
(Not shown) is a lot like a floppy disk, although they are faster and can store more
information from 100 to 250MB (megabytes).
Tape Backup A device that you can use to store backups, or copies, of the information
(Not shown) on a computer s hard drive.
Keyboard The keyboard is the thing you type on to tell your computer what to do.
Input Devices
Mouse Like the keyboard, the mouse is another input device that you use to
communicate with your computer.
Scanner Scanners work like photocopiers, except the image is translated into a
digital image in your computer rather than copied onto paper.
Monitor The monitor resembles a television set, and is where the computer
displays information.
Output Devices
Speakers If visible, your computer speakers are similar to those on a stereo system
(or at least a cheap stereo system). They allow your computer to play
sounds.
Printer A printer is where a computer writes down information or output, onto Quick Reference
paper, or a hardcopy.
Components Visible from
the Outside of the System
Unit May Include:
Floppy drive
CD-ROM or DVD drive
Zip drive or tape backup
Keyboard
Mouse
Scanner
Monitor
Speakers
Printer
18 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-4: The Inside of a

Computer
Power supply Central Processing Unit (CPU) ROM-BIOS
Figure 1-6
The side view of the guts
of a tower case CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive
Floppy disk
Ports drive
Hard disk drive

(HDD)
Expansion
cards
Expansion
slots
Motherboard
Figure 1-6
Random-access memory (RAM)
N ha kn ha n he ide, le c ank en ha m e i c m e ca e and

look inside. But no tools required e e d ne all he kf . J c m a e Figure 1-6
with Table 1-4: Wha I ide a C e Ca e? ee ha im an .
Everything plugs into a Table 1-4: Wha In ide a Com e Ca e?

comp ter s Item Description
motherboard.
Motherboard The main piece of circuitry in a computer. Everything connects to or is wired
to the motherboard.
Central Processing The computer s brain or heart, the CPU is a computer s main chip. The CPU
Unit (CPU) is really nothing more than an incredibly fast and powerful calculator.
Random Access A computer s temporar storage place, here it gets its ork done. For
Memory (RAM) example, when you use a word processor to type a letter, the letter is stored
in the computer s memor .
ROM-BIOS A computer s ROM-BIOS (stands for Read Only Memory Basic
Input/Output System) is a special chip with instructions for the computer to
communicate with other hardware parts.
Expansion Slot An expansion slot lets you add more features and capabilities to a computer
by plugging in expansion cards.

Item Description
Expansion Card A card that allo s ou to e pand our computer s capabilities, such as a
modem card, a network card, a video card, or a sound card.
PCMCIA Cards Notebook computers are too small to use expansion cards, so they use
special credit-card sized PCMCIA cards instead. You plug in a PCMCIA card,
or PC Card, into a notebook computer to give it more features and
capabilities. Nobod s getting tested on this, but PCMCIA stands for Personal
Computer Memory Card International Association.
Quick Reference
Components Inside the
System Unit May Include:
Motherboard
CPU (Central Processing
Unit)
RAM (Random Access
Memory)
ROM-BIOS
Expansion slots and
cards
PCMCIA cards (laptops
only)
20 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-5: The Back of a

Computer (Ports)
Figure 1-7
The back of a computer On/Off switch
case.
Power receptacle
Keyboard port Mouse port

USB ports Ethernet connector
Serial port (COM1)
Parallel port (printer)

Serial port (COM2)
Air vents
Line-out jack (speakers/headphone)
Line-in jack Joystick port
Microphone jack
Phone jack Wall jack
Video (monitor)
Expansion spaces
Figure 1-7
When you look at the back of a computer, you may feel a bit overwhelmed by all the slots and
holes. Fortunately, manufacturers have added some fairly standard icons and color coding to
help you identify what should be plugged into your computer and where. Bef e l ng, ll
ec gni e h e ic n and c l , and he c nfig a i n n eem m e i . I a he
like hooking up cable and a DVD player to the back of your television nle e ne f
those people who just wait for the cable guy to take care of that heinous task. In any case, this
le n ill e ie each i em iece b iece n ge c m le el l .
You may feel a bit Bef e e begin, le define a c le f e m . The fi hing ll n ice i ha he back f
overwhelmed the first your computer has lots of holes. Those holes are called (depending on who you ask) jacks,
time you look at the ports, or connectors. You may notice that some of the connectors have holes, but some have
back of a computer. what look like stickpins (which are aptly named pins). The ones that have holes are called
female connectors; the ones that have pins are called male c nnec . Le lea e i a ha .
N le begin. C m a e Figure 1-7 to Table 1-5: Wha he Bac f a C uter Case?
The back of your computer may be arranged differently but should include the same elements.

Table 1-5: Wha on he Back of a Com uter Case?

Port Icon Description
The keyboard and mouse jacks look identical on most
PCs, so look for colors and icons to help you with
plugging in these devices.
Keyboard & Mouse Some mice and keyboards use USB ports. Older mice
may use a serial port.
Serial (or COM) ports are a very versatile type of port.
Some of the things you can plug into a serial port include:
Serial or COM a mouse, modem, scanner, or digital camera. Most
computers have two serial ports: COM1 and COM2.
You plug your printer into the parallel, or printer, port.
Parallel or Printer Many newer printers may use a USB port.
Designed to replace older Serial and Parallel ports, the

USB (Universal Serial Bus) can connect computers with a
number of devices, such as printers, keyboards, mice,
scanners, digital cameras, PDAs, and more. Better yet,
the USB port supports plug-and-play, so you can simply
plug in a USB device and start using it.
USB
USB 1 ports can transfer information at a speed up to
12 Mbps (Megabytes per Second). Newer USB 2 ports
can transfer information at a speed up to 480 Mbps. Most
computers come with two USB ports.
You plug your monitor into the video port.
Video or Monitor
Plug in your speakers or headphone into the Line Out
Line Out / jack.
The Line In jack allows you to listen to your computer Quick Reference
Line In using a stereo system. Ports on the Back of a
Computer Include:
You can plug a microphone into this jack to record
sounds on your computer. Keyboard and Mouse
Microphone
Serial or COM
If you have a joystick, musical (MIDI) keyboard, or other Parallel or Printer
Joystick or Game gaming device, this is where you plug it in.
USB
The phone or modem jack is where you plug your Video or monitor
computer into a phone line.
Phone or Modem Line in, line out,
microphone
You can connect your computer to a network by plugging
Network or Ethernet
< > in an Ethernet cable in this port. Joystick or game
Phone or modem
An SCSI port is one of the fastest ways to connect a hard Ethernet or network
SCSI drive, CD-ROM drive, or other device to a computer.
SCSI
A FireWire (IEEE 1394 or i.LINK) port lets you connect Firewire
such devices as hard disks and digital camcorders to a
Firewire
computer. A FireWire port can transfer information at a
speed up to 400 Mbps (Megabytes per Second).
22 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-6: System Bus and

Expansion Cards
Figure 1-8
Expansion cards plug
directl into a computer s
motherboard.
Figure 1-9
Most computers have
around six expansion
slots.
Expansion
slots
Highway System Bus

The number of lanes determines The bus width determines how
how many cars can use the much information can flow
highway at once along the bus at a time
The speed limit determines how The bus speed determines
fast cars can drive on the how fast information can travel
highway
Y ef i ! Y j b gh an e en i e digi al camc de nl find ha i can

c nnec c m e beca e c m e a a en l d e n ha e a Fi e i e .
D n you can easily add a Firewire port to the computer by buying an expansion
card.
Expansion cards allow you to add more gizmos and capabilities to a computer. You can also
use expansion cards to replace a component of a computer that breaks, like a modem.
E an i n ca d l g in e an i n l n a c m e m he b a d.
A computer talks to its expansion cards and everything else on the motherboard through
Expansion cards plug its bus. A c m e b i an elec nic a h a ha ca ie inf ma i n be een de ice in
directly into the a computer. Two factors determine how information flows through the bus: the bus width and
motherboard. the bus speed.
Bus Width
The b id h de e mine h man lane he e a e n a c m e elec nic
high a . Ac all , he b id h i n mea ed in lane , b in bits. The wider the bus,
the more information can travel across it at the same time.
Bus Speed
The bus speed determines how fast information can travel through the bus. The higher the
bus speed, the faster information can travel through it. Bus speed is measured in MHz.

A if hi e en c nf ing en gh he e a e e e al b e he e. The incl de:

ISA
The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) is the original, slowest, and oldest type of bus.
The ISA bus has a width of 16 bits and a speed of 8 MHz. The ISA bus is going the way
of dinosaurs and is no longer found on new computers.
PCI
The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus is the main bus found in computers.
The PCI bus can have a width of 32 or 64 bits. The PCI bus supports Plug and Play,
which lets you add new devices to a computer without a complicated installation process.
PCI Express is the next generation of PCI. PCI Express uses PIC programming
concepts and communications standards, but is based on a much faster serial
communications system.
AGP
An Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) is a blazingly fast bus that is currently only used
for video cards. The AGP port has a width of 64 bits and supports Plug and Play.
So what kind of expansion cards are out there? Here are some of the more common expansion
ca d ha ma c me ac
Table 1-6: Common Types of Expansion Cards

Expansion Card Description
A modem allows computers to exchange information through ordinary
telephone lines. Almost all computers already come with built-in modems, so
Modem you would probably only want to add a modem expansion card if the original
modem in a computer breaks.
A network interface card (NIC) is an expansion card that connects a computer
to other computers on a network.
Network
A video card or adapter is what generates the images and text displayed on a
monitor. Computers come with a built-in video card, but some people like to Quick Reference
upgrade their original video card with faster, more powerful video cards.
An expansion card plugs
Video or Graphics
into a computer s
A sound card lets a computer play and record sounds, just like a home stereo motherboard to give it
system. additional capabilities.
A computer
Sound communicates with its
You can use expansion cards to add additional ports to a computer, such as expansion cards and
the newer Firewire or USB 2 ports. devices through the
system bus.
Additional Port(s) How much information
flows through the system
bus depends on the bus
width and bus speed.
There are several bus
types:
1. ISA
2. PCI
3. AGP
24 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-7: Memory Cache

Figure 1-10
Internal External RAM Hard Disk
An illustration of how a
Cache Cache
computer searches for
information in a memory
cache. 1. The computer looks 2. When the computer 3. If the computer 4. If the computer still
for data in the does not find what can t find hat it can t find hat it
internal cache first. it s looking for in needs in the needs, it looks at
Figure 1-11 This is the fastest the internal cache, internal or external the slow as
way the computer it next looks in the cache, it looks in molasses hard disk
An illustration of how a can get information. external cache. the slower main cache.
police officer looks for a memory (RAM).
gun in a eapons cache. Figure 1-10
1. Hopefully the officer 2. If the officer can t 3. If the officer can t 4. If the officer still
has his revolver in find his revolver in find his revolver in can t find his
his hand, ready for his hand, he next its holster, he next revolver, his last
action. reaches down to runs back to see if stop is a gun store.
his holster for the he left it in the
Figure 1-11 gun. squad car.
A memory cache inc ea e a c m e e f mance b oring the most recently used data.
There are two types of cache:
Internal Cache (also called primary or L1 cache)
When the computer needs data it first looks in the internal cache. The internal cache is
inside the CPU and is the fastest possible way for the computer to get information. The
internal cache can normally only contain a very small amount of information.
External Cache (also called secondary or L2 cache)
If he c m e d e n find he da a in he in e nal cache, it then looks in the external
cache. The external cache is slower than the internal cache, but much faster than the
normal RAM memory. The external cache normally holds much more information than
the internal cache, but still not as much as the main memory (RAM).

Quick Reference
Memory Cache:
A special type of memory
that greatly increases a
computer s performance.
26 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-8: Computer

Performance
Figure 1-12
There are lots of factors
that determine a
computer s speed. Most of
them are listed in Table
1-7: Factors that Affect
Computer Performance.
Figure 1-12
W nde ing h neighb c m e i m ch fa e han c m e ? The e a e a

number of reasons why a computer may run faster or slower. You learn about each of them by
reading Table 1-7: Factors that Affect Computer Performance.
A m ch im le ea n ha neighb c m e i fa e han c m e is
babl beca e i ne e .
Table 1-7: Factors that Affect Computer Performance

Factor Description
Arguabl the single most important factor that determines a computer s
performance is the speed of its CPU. The speed of the CPU is measured in
megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz). The faster the CPU, the faster the
CPU Speed computer. The first PC in 1981 ran at 4.77 MH , hile toda s computers can
run at speeds exceeding 3,000 MHz, or 3 GHz.
The amount of RAM, or memory, is another very important factor in a
computer s performance. Generally, the more RAM a computer has the better
its performance. Ho ever, ou usuall on t see much of an improvement
Amount of RAM after 1 GB of RAM.
Video cards have their own processor and memory, just like the computer
does. The faster the processor and the more memory a video card has, the
faster it can draw images on the monitor. Video card performance is especially
Type of Video Card important if ou re interested in pla ing ne er, 3D computer games.

Factor Description
A hard drive s average access time is ho fast it can find information. Average
access time is measured in milliseconds (ms), or 1/1000 of a second. The
lower the access speed, the faster the hard drive. Most newer computers have
an average access time of 8 to 15 ms.
Another factor that determines hard drive performance is how fast it spins, in
Hard Drive Speed revolutions per minute (rpms). Faster IDE hard drives may have speeds as
fast as 7,200 rpm, while high-end SCSI hard drives have speeds of 15,000
rpm.
Not only do you need a fast hard drive, you have to make sure that is has
plenty of free storage space. Microsoft Windows uses this hard disk space to
create a cache on the hard drive where it stores temporary information.
Free Hard Disk

Space
Normally a computer stores a file in the same location on a hard drive. Over
time, a hard drive can become fragmented, and instead of storing a file in the
same location it begins storing parts of it all over. When the computer needs to
read a fragmented file, it must read several different parts of the hard drive
Hard Disk instead of just one. Defragmenting a hard drive puts the fragmented files back
Fragmentation together in one place. You should defragment our computer s hard drive
about once a month.
Microsoft Windows can multitask, or run more than one program or task at a
time probably no different than your job. And, just like your job, the more
programs or tasks you throw at Windows, the longer it takes to complete each
Multitasking one, and hence a drop in computer performance.
Considerations
Quick Reference
Computer Performance is
Determined By:
CPU speed
Amount of memory or
RAM
The type and speed of the
video card
A hard disk s speed, free
space, and fragmentation
How many programs are
running, or multitasking,
at the same time
28 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-9: Buying a Desktop

Computer
Figure 1-13
What should you look for
hen ou re bu ing a ne
computer? That depends
on what you want it to do.
Table 1-8: Desktop
Computer B er s G ide
lists some of the more
important factors and
features to be aware of
when buying a new
computer. Just make sure
the information listed isn t
too out of date!
Figure 1-13
N hing e han g ing he computer store and listening to a know-it-all salesperson

tell you to buy the most expensive computer in the store because the Radon graphics
accele a i h 128 megab e f RAM i me hing he hink e defini el g ing
need.
Instead of listening to a nerdy computer salesperson, who may be on commission or a sales
quota, call one of your computer-geek f iend ela i e , ell hem h e g ing e
your computer, and ask what they would recommend. If a computer-geek f iend i n eadil
available, Table 1-8: Desktop Computer B e G ide will give you a good idea of what you
should look for when you buy a new computer. Just remember that computer technology
changes about as quickly as the latest fashions (every six months), so this information will
probably be out of date shortly after you read it.
Table 1-8: Desktop Computer B e G ide

Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End, Gaming
Duron or Celeron at Pentium 4 at 2GHz, Pentium 4 at 3GHz,
2GHz Athlon at 1.7 GHz Athlon at 2.1GHz
CPU
256MB 512MB 1GB
RAM
15-inch or 17-inch CRT 17-inch CRT or 19-inch CRT or
15-inch flat panel/LCD 17-inch flat panel/LCD
Monitor

Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End, Gaming

32MB 64MB to 128MB 128MB or more
Video Memory
40GB to 60GB 80GB 120GB or more
Hard Drive
CD-ROM Drive CD-RW Drive DVD+-R/RW &
CD-R/RW Drive
CD or DVD Drive
USB 1.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0, Firewire
Ports
Ethernet, 56K modem Ethernet, 56K modem
Included Devices
* This information was updated May 2003.
30 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-10: Buying a Notebook

Computer
Figure 1-14
What should you look for
hen ou re bu ing a ne
computer? That depends
on what you want it to do.
Table 1-9: Notebook
B er s G ide lists some
of the more important
factors and features to be
aware of when buying a
new computer. Just make
sure the information listed
isn t too out of date!
Figure 1-14
Deciding on which notebook to buy is even more confusing than buying a desktop computer.
Tha beca e he e i m ch m e a iance in fea e and ice be een a i n eb k .
N eb k c m e can be g aded a ea il a de k c m e , deci i n i
pretty much final.
Table 1-9: N eb B e G ide will give you a good idea of what you should look for
when you buy a new notebook computer. Just remember that notebook technology changes
inc edibl fa , d n e Table 1-9: N eb B e G ide after December 2003.
Some other important factors to consider when buying a notebook include:
Size
Generally speaking, while c n enien and c l l king, malle n eb k a en a
powerful or fast as larger notebook computers. If you travel frequently and need to lug
your notebook around with you, you might want to consider a smaller notebook. If your
n eb k d e n m e a nd m ch e babl be e ff i h a la ge n eb k.
Battery Life
A n eb k ba e life can ange an he e f m 2 7 h . S me n eb k can
even accept a second battery for extra long life. Battery life probabl i n m ch f an
i e if nl e n eb k hen i l gged in he all.
Warrantee
N eb k c m e a e n i f b eaking d n. Wha e, he e n e
ea en and he ha e hei n ni e n eb k a , he e much harder and
more expensive to repair than their desktop counterparts. Most of us hate the old three-
ea e ended a an ee ale i ch, b if e b ing a n eb k c m e he c f
the extra warranty is probably worth it.

Included Devices and Features

Notebook computers usually have several devices and gizmos built-in often more than
a desktop computer! A modem and Ethernet port are usually a standard part of most
notebooks today. Some notebooks also have memory card readers (especially useful if
you have a digital camera or PDA), Firewire ports, and even wireless networking, known
as WiFi. If e c m a ing a i n eb k m del , make e ha kn ha
de ice a e a en incl ded.
Table 1-9: No ebook B e G ide

Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End
Duron, Celeron, Duron, Celeron, Pentium 4 at 2GHz or
Pentium 3 , or Athlon at Pentium 3 or 4, or better
CPU 700MHz or better Athlon at 1GHz or better
256MB 256MB 512MB
RAM
16MB 32MB to 64MB 32MB to 64MB
Video Memory
20GB 30GB 60GB
Hard Drive
CD-ROM Drive CD-RW Drive DVD & CD-R/RW Drive
CD or DVD Drive
USB 1.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0, Firewire
Ports
56K modem Ethernet, possibly WiFi Ethernet, WiFi (wireless
(wireless networking) networking), 56K
56K modem modem, Bluetooth (a
next-generation wireless
port)
Included Devices
* This information was updated May 2003.
32 Computer Basics
Lesson 1-11: Upgrading a

Computer
Figure 1-15
Computer upgrades can
get e pensive! There s a
fine line bet een hen it s
more cost effective to
upgrade an older
computer, or to simply buy
a new computer
altogether.
Figure 1-16
Most computer upgrades
require that you, or better
yet someone who actually
knows about computers,
opens up the computer
case. Figure 1-15 Figure 1-16
When you upgrade a computer, you usually replace older components with newer
c m nen im e he c m e e f mance. Y can al g ade a c m e b
adding additional components, such as more memory or a second hard drive. Upgrading a
computer to improve its performance is often cheaper than buying a new computer. For most
upgrades you will need someone with a lot of computer experience to do the upgrade for you.
I f en diffic l de e mine hich i be e upgrading an old computer or simply buying
a ne c m e . If e an a e age c m e e , lan n b ing a ne c m e e e
four or five years (sorry someone has to break this news to you). By then, the cost of a new
computer will be less expensive than any effective upgrades you do.

So what can you do to upgrade a computer? The following table lists some of the more
common upgrades.
Table 1-10: Typical Things to Upgrade on a Computer

Upgrade Description
Increasing the amount of memory in a computer is probably the most effective
and inexpensive upgrades you can make. More memory can significantly
increase the performance of your computer. 512MB to 1GB of memory is all you
Memory (RAM) should ever need for the next year or so anyway.
The hard drives in newer computers have become so huge that you may never
need to buy another one. If you do somehow run out of room on your hard
drive, you can buy a second one, since most computer can handle two internal
hard drives.
Hard Disk
It s often better to bu a hole ne computer than to upgrade the CPU and
CPU and motherboard. That way you get all new components all once which is a lot
Motherboard cheaper than buying them all individually.
There are an endless variety of devices that you can add to a computer. You
can add CD-ROM, DVD, and Zip drives, graphics cards, tape backups, and
more.
Add Devices and
Peripherals
Quick Reference
Make sure any upgrades
you make to a computer are
worth the cost sometimes
it s simpl better to bu a
new computer.
Upgrades to Improve
Performance Include:
Adding more memory or
RAM
Adding a bigger hard
drive
Adding a new CPU and
motherboard (usually not
recommended)
Adding new devices, such
as a DVD drive
34 Computer Basics
Chapter One Review
Lesson Summary
Hardware, Software, and Information Technology (IT)
A typical computer includes the system unit, monitor, keyboard, mouse, speakers, and printer.
Hardware: A computer item you can physically see or touch.
Software: A computer program that tells computer hardware how to operate.
Information Technology (IT): The broad subject related to computers and managing and
processing information.
Computer Overview
The basic computer processes are input, processing, and output.
Different types of computers include mainframes, PCs, Macs, servers, laptops, and PDAs.
The Front of a Computer and Peripheral Devices

Components visible from the outside of the system unit may include the floppy drive, CD-ROM or
DVD drive, Zip drive or tape backup, keyboard, mouse, scanner, monitor, speakers, and printer.
The Inside of a Computer

Components inside the system unit may include the motherboard, CPU (Central Processing Unit),
RAM (Random Access Memory), ROM-BIOS, expansion slots and cards, and PCMCIA cards in
laptops.
The Back of a Computer (Ports)

Ports on the back of a computer include: keyboard, mouse, serial or COM, printer or parallel, USB,
video or monitor, line in, line out, microphone, joystick or game, phone or modem, Ethernet or
network, SCSI, and/or Firewire.
System Bus and Expansion Cards

An expansion card plugs into a computer s motherboard to give it additional capabilities.
A computer communicates with its expansion cards and devices through the system bus.
How much information flows through the system bus depends on the bus width and bus speed.
There are several bus types, including ISA, PCI, and AGP.
Memory Cache
Memory Cache: A special t pe of memor that greatl increases a computer s performance.

Computer Performance
Computer performance is determined by CPU speed, amount of memory or RAM, the type and
speed of the video card, the hard disk speed, free space, and fragmentation, and the number of
programs running at the same time.
Upgrading a Computer
Make sure any upgrades you make to a computer are worth the cost sometimes it s simpl better
to buy a new computer.
Upgrades to improve performance include adding more memory or RAM, adding a bigger hard
drive, adding a new CPU and motherboard (usually not recommended), and adding new devices,
such as a DVD drive.
Quiz
1. Ha a a a a a a a . (T
or False?)
2. Laptops are faster than desktop PCs, generally speaking. (True or False?)
3. Which of the following moves the pointer to another location on-screen?

A. Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.
B. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
C. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and clicking the left mouse
button.
D. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and clicking the right mouse
button.
4. Which of the following is NOT a type of computer port?

A. USB
B. Parallel or printer
C. Backup
D. Network or Ethernet
5. When you type a document on a computer, every letter you type is saved to
_______ or temporary storage area.
A. Hard drive
B. RAM
C. ROM
D. CPU
6. W a ba a a a ?
A. The RAM
B. The ROM-BIOS
C. The motherboard
D. The CPU
36 Computer Basics
7. ROM a R a -O M (T Fa ?)
8. Which of the f NOT a a a ?

A. The amount of memory or RAM.
B. The speed of the CPU.
C. The type and speed of the video or graphics card.
D. The number of keys on the keyboard.
Quiz Answers
1. False. Hardware is any physical part of the computer you can see and touch.
2. False. Laptops are generally slower than desktop PCs.
3. B. Move the pointer by moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
4. C. The e i n ch a hing a a back .
5. B. RAM or Random Access Memory.
6. D. The CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is the main chip in a computer.
7. True. ROM stands for Read-Only Memory.
8. D. The n mbe f ke n he ke b a d d e n affec a c m e e f mance.

Chapter Two:
Understanding
Hardware
Understand what a CPU does
computers.
Learn how memory is measured
Learn about input devices: mouse, keyboard, and digital cameras
Learn about output devices: monitor, graphics, and printers
Learn about storage devices: hard drives, CD-ROMs, and DVDs
Hardware i an h ical a f a c m e ha can ee ch. A c m e m ni ,

CD-ROM or DVD drive, mouse, keyboard, and printer are all different types of hardware.
This chapter takes a closer look at the physical parts that constitute a computer.
This chapter is broken up into several sections, since there are several different categories of
ha d a e de ice . Fi e ll e amine processing devices, ch a c m e CPU and
mem . Y ll finall nde and ha h e echnical nding d megahe and
gigab e mean. F m he e e ll m e n input devices, such as the keyboard and mouse
and output devices, such as the monitor and printer. The last part of this chapter discusses
storage devices, such as hard drives and CD-ROM drives.
Tha al f ma e ial c e, le ge a ed!
38 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-1: Central Processing

Unit (CPU)
Figure 2-1
The Intel Pentium 4 is the
fastest and most recent
CPU available.
Central
Figure 2-2 Processing
Unit (CPU)
The CPU can get hot!
Most CPUs have a built-in
fan to keep them from
burning out.
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Inside the computer case, hidden amongst all the wiring and gizmos, is a particularly
important part of the computer known as the central processing unit (or CPU, for short). The
CPU is also known as the computer chip (beca e ha ha i i ) he microprocessor (or
processor, for short).
Some say the CPU is the brain of the computer while others describe it as the heart. In any
ca e, i he hing ha make c m e a c m e . The CPU d e all he k: I
calculates, it processes, it keeps things running smoothly. You might think of it as a talented
stage manager. When it does its behind-the- cene j b ell, d n n ice i ; im l
A CPU s speed is
enjoy the performance.
measured in
megahertz (MHz) or Originally, CPUs were given wildly inventive names like Chip. Okay, maybe not. The names
gigahertz (GHz). were actually based on numbers like 8088. The next few names in the series the 286, the
386, and the 486 were actually just shortened names for 80286, 80386, and 80486. Then,
what would have been the 586 was dubbed the Pentium. After that, the names became rather
mysterious: Pentium Pro and Pentium MMX. Finally, the names returned to a semi-ordered
numbering system (albeit a mix of Roman and Arabic numerals): Pentium 2, Pentium 3, and
Pen i m 4. And ha he e e a e a he m men . B h he Pen i m 3 and he Pen i m 4 a e
still quite common.
Intel makes most CPUs. In fact, Intel is the company that came up with the name Pentium.
However, AMD and VIA Technologies are two other well-known CPU manufacturers. Their
CPUs are less expensive and use a different naming system (such as the AMD Athlon and the
AMD Duron). Intel actually makes a less expensive version of the Pentium as well, which it
calls the Celeron. The Celeron does what the Pentium does, but not as quickly.
Speaking of which, speed is what the CPU is all about, and each successive version of the
CPU ge g e i el fa e . A CPU eed i mea ed in megahe (MH ) , f ne e
models, in gigahertz (GHz). A megahertz equals millions of cycles per second; a gigahertz
equals billions of cycles per second. Higher numbers equate to higher speeds. You might see
an Intel Pentium 4 at 3.06 GHz, a Pentium III at 1.40 GHz, and a Celeron at 2.20 GHz.
Another common measure of a CPU is how many bits it can handle at a time. A bit is the
tiniest piece of information processed by a computer. Eight bits make up one byte, and one
b e e al ne cha ac e . C m e ed handle 8 16 bi ; n he e 32 and 64

Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 39
a a ime. D n if all f hi eem a bi c nf ing e ll c e bi and b e in

greater detail in a later lesson.
Table 2-1: Types of CPUs

CPU Speed Description
1 GHz to Intel Pentium 4 Processor
3 GHz The Pentium 4 is Intel s more recent and fastest generation of CPUs,
with processing speeds over 3 GHz.
450 MHz to Intel Pentium III Processor

1 GHz Launched in 1999, Pentium 3 CPUs are still found in some new
computers.
1.06 to Intel Celeron Processor

2 GHz Intel s Celeron CPU is an ine pensive processor designed for people on
budget. Celeron processors are very similar to Pentium processors, but
they have less built-in memory.
500 MHz to Intel Xeon Processor
3 GHz Don t e pect to see an Xeon-based computers at your local computer
store it s designed for high-end servers.
850 MHz to AMD Athon Processor

1.67 GHz The Athlon processor is equivalent to Pentium processors onl it s less
expensive.
1.5 GHz to AMD Sempron Processor
1.8 GHz The Sempron CPU is AMD s ans er to Intel s Celeron processor. It has
less built-in memory and is designed for people on a budget.
Older Here s a summar of the other most common and obsolete
Processors processors out there:
Quick Reference
Processor Release Date Average Speed
Pentium II 1997 266 MHz The CPU, or Central
Pentium 1993 133 MHz Processing Unit, is the
486 1989 66 MHz computer s main chip. It
386 1985 25 MHz calculates and processes
286 1982 12.5 MHz information.
8088 1979 8 MHz CPU Speed is Measured
In:
Megahertz (MHz).
Gigahertz (GHz).
Common CPUs Include:
Intel Pentium III
Intel Pentium 4
Intel Celeron
AMD Athlon
AMD Duron
40 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-2: Memory

Figure 2-3
A hard drive might have
60GB of memory.
Figure 2-4
A recordable CD (CD-R)
can have up to 700MB of
memory.
Figure 2-3
A memory chip might have
512MB of memory.
Figure 2-6
A zip disk can have
between 100MB and
250MB of memory.
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-5
Most people know that a computer has memory. But what does that really mean? You often
hea echie a nd n mbe like 60GB ha d d i e. Oka , ha nd im e i e, b
what does it tell you? This lesson breaks memory into measurable units.
The first thing you need to know is that, at its most basic level, a computer only understands
he c nce f n and ff. On is represented by the number one (1); off is represented by the
number zero (0). Everything that a computer does is based on this combination of ones and
zeros, which is known as the binary system. These ones and zeros are digits, known as bits,
which are the smallest memory unit. The term bit is short for binary digit.
The second thing you need to know is that a computer saves information in bytes, not bits. So
what is a byte? The term byte is short for binary digits eight. So one byte is made up of eight
bits. And a byte is the equivalent of a character, which can be a letter, a number, or a symbol.
Everything that a S le a ha e a elf-in l ed e h e la e c ea i n i im l i led I. Tha
computer does is one-word title would equal one byte.
based on a combination Of course, it would be fairly tedious if a computer stored everything in single bytes. The next
of ones and zeros, largest unit is the kilobyte. A kilobyte (abbreviated K or KB) equals 1,024 bytes or characters.
which is known as the N le a e a h -story writer. The one-page, double-spaced masterpiece you
binary system. submit to your editor would be the equivalent of a kilobyte.
After the kilobyte, the next largest unit is the megabyte. A megabyte (abbreviated M or MB)
equals 1,048,576 bytes or characters. If you were a novelist, your latest bestseller would equal
a megabyte.

The next unit after the megabyte is the gigabyte. A gigabyte (abbreviated G or GB) equals
1,073,741,824 b e cha ac e . Le e end a e a e ea che . A h le helf f b k
devoted to your favorite subject would be the equivalent of a gigabyte.
Finally, after the gigabyte comes the terabyte. A terabyte (abbreviated T or TB) equals
1,099,511,627,776 b e cha ac e . Le imagine ha e an eg maniac h n an MB is an abbreviation
entire bookstore filled only with books by authors you like. Such a single-minded store would for megabyte. GB is an
be the equivalent of a terabyte. abbreviation for
Oka , le e ie . The f ll ing able mma i e all he ni f mem . gigabyte.
Table 2-2: Bits and Bytes

Unit Abbreviation Size Symbol Equivalent
Bit An atom or speck, the
smallest unit of
memory.
Byte 8 bits A single letter, a

number, or a symbol. Quick Reference
Computers function based
on the binary system:
Kilobyte K or KB 1,024 bytes A one-page, double- On is represented by a
spaced letter. one (1).
Off is represented by a
zero (0).
Ones and zeros are
Megabyte M or MB 1,048,576 bytes A best-selling novel. digits, known as bits.
Bit:
Short for binary digit
Smallest memory unit
Gigabyte G or GB 1,073,741,824 bytes An encyclopedia set. Eight bits equal one byte
Byte:
Short for binary digits
eight.
Terabyte T or TB 1,099, 511,627,776 A bookstore. One byte equals one
bytes character (letter, number,
or symbol)
Kilobyte (K or KB):
1,024 bytes
Megabyte (M or MB):
1,048,576 bytes
Gigabyte (G or GB):
1,073,741,824 bytes
Terabyte:
1,099, 511,627,776 bytes
42 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-3: RAM and ROM

Figure 2-7
RAM, or Random Access
Memory, works like a
notepad; you can read
from it and write to it.
Figure 2-8
ROM, or Read Only
Memory, works like a
novel, you can read from it
but not write to it.
So now you know that computer memory is measured in various byte-sized units: kilobytes,
megabytes, gigabytes, petrabytes, and philobytes. Okay, those last two were just made up to
see if you were paying attention.
Next you need to know that computers have two major types of memory: random-access
memory (or RAM) and read-only memory (or ROM). Le di c he e e f mem
in greater detail.
RAM (random-access memory)
When someone at a computer superstore tells you how much memory a new computer
ha , he e eall alking ab RAM. RAM i he c m e main mem , hich i
e ce inf ma i n. Whene e k i h a file n c m e, e
using RAM. And the data in that file is temporarily stored in RAM. However, RAM is
When you work with a volatile, which means that the data is stored only as long as the computer has power.
file on your computer, Once you shut off your computer, the data is gone. However, you can and should save
o re sing RAM. your da a ( ead: file). Tha he e age c me in, b m e n ha la e . F
now, think of RAM like a notebook: You can read from it and write to it. Technically, it
c ld be called ead and i e mem . And, a i h a n eb k, can e i e it
many, many times provided you have an eraser!
ROM (read-only memory)
ROM i he c m e l -level memory, which it uses to perform its most basic
functions. This memory is permanent; the data remains even if you shut off the computer.
This only makes sense because ROM is required to restart your computer. You never hear
people discuss how much ROM you have because the manufacturer usually installs it,
and you never touch it. It does all the behind-the-scenes work and then disappears once
e nderway, much like a party planner. You can also think of ROM like a novel: You
can ead f m i , b can i e i (and h , i name).
Table 2-3: Comparing RAM and ROM

RAM ROM
Random-access memory Read-only memory

RAM ROM
Main memory. Low-level memory.
Necessary to process information (example: work Necessary to perform the most basic functions
with a file). (example: start the computer).
Volatile: If not saved, data disappears when you Nonvolatile: Data remains even when you shut off
shut off the computer s po er. It s temporar . the computer s po er. It s permanent.
Often discussed when buying a computer. Seldom mentioned when buying a computer.
You can read from and write to it. Comparable to a You can read from it, but ou can t rite to it.
notepad. Comparable to a novel.
Quick Reference
Computers have two types
of memory:
Random-access memory
(RAM).
Read-only memory
(ROM).
RAM:
Computer s main
memory, which is used to
process information
(example: work with a
file).
Volatile: Unless saved,
data disappears when
you shut off the computer.
You can read from it and
write to it. Comparable to
a notebook; you can read
and write to it.
ROM:
Computer s lo -level
memory, which is used to
perform its most basic
functions (example: start
the computer).
Nonvolatile: Data remains
even when you shut off
the computer. It s
permanent.
You can read from it, but
ou can t rite to it.
Comparable to a novel;
you can only read it.
44 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-4: Mouse

Figure 2-9 Click!
Click! Click! Click!
Double-clicking with the
mouse. Click Double-click Right-click
Press and Quickly press and Press and
Figure 2-10 release the release the left release the
left mouse mouse right mouse
Right-clicking with the button. button twice, in button.
mouse. rapid succession.
Figure 2-11 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10
Dragging and dropping

with the mouse.
Hold down the Use the
Figure 2-12 mouse button center wheel
while you drag to scroll
Using the scroll wheel. the mouse across through
your desk. screens of
information.
Drag and drop

Place the pointer over an object and press and
hold down the left mouse button. While still
holding down the button, move the mouse (and
thus the cursor) to where you want to place the
object and then release the mouse button.
Ac m e ld be ele if had n a c mm nica e i h i . Tha h need

an input device. Essentially, an input device lets you talk to your computer. Two examples of
in de ice a e he ke b a d and he m e. We ll di c ke b a d la e ; f n le
concentrate on the mouse.
That funny-looking object that, frankly, looks like a mouse (with its oval body and long tail-
like cord connecting it to the computer) is the mouse. Originally, computers only came with a
keyboard. But in 1968 Doug Engelbart invented the mouse. In 1984, Apple Computers
introduced the mouse with its Macintosh computers. Shortly thereafter, the mouse was
The underside of a standard equipment on all computers.
roller ball mouse.
The mouse acts as a handheld pointing device that allows you to control the actions of that
blinking item on your screen known as a cursor. Depending on the software you are using and
the task you are doing, the cursor may resemble such symbols as a slanted arrow ( ), an I
( ), or a vertical line ( ). A cursor is essentially a place-marker that appears on your computer
screen. You move the mouse to place the cursor over an object on your screen and click the
mouse buttons to select that object. Once an object has been selected, you can move it or
mani la e i . We ll c e m e b n in g ea e de ail in a la e le n.
The standard mouse has two buttons and a rollerball on the underside, which moves the
Some mouse pads have cursor on the screen when you move the mouse. A rollerball mouse works best when used on
a wrist rest to help a mouse pad, especially one that has a rough texture on its surface. Some mouse pads now
users keep their hands come with a wrist rest to help users keep their hands and wrists in better alignment.
and wrists in better
alignment.

Like other computer components, mice come in several shapes and sizes. Some mice have
three (or more) buttons, which are programmable, and some include a trackball on the top
(instead of a rollerball on the underside). Most new mice include a center scroll wheel
between the two buttons. Not surprisingly, this scroll wheel lets you scroll through screens of
information in a fluid motion. Many new mice are also ergonomically designed to fit the
e hand. And me ne mice ha e F a d and Back b n ff he ide f he m e,
which help you navigate the Internet.
One of the latest innovations is the optical mouse, which is becoming quite common. An
optical mouse operates by using an infrared sensor, which means it uses neither a rollerball
nor a mouse pad. You can identify an optical mouse by the telltale red glow emanating from A wireless mouse
its underside. works just like a
One other hot innovation is the wireless mouse (and keyboard). A wireless mouse and remote control.
keyboard run on batteries and communicate with the computer the same way a remote control
communicates with a television.
Quick Reference
Input devices on a
standard computer:
Keyboard.
Mouse.
What a mouse does:
It acts as a handheld
pointing device and
controls the actions of
that blinking item on your
computer screen known
as a cursor.
46 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-5: Keyboard

Esc key Function ke s or F ke s Status lights
Figure 2-13
The 101-key enhanced
keyboard Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print
Screen
Scroll
Lock
Pause
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Scroll
Lock
~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) + Insert Home Page Num

/
Backspace Lock *
` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 = Up
Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | Delete End Page 7 8 9

[ ] \ Down Home PgUp
+
Caps A S D F G H J K L : " 4 5 6
Enter
Lock ; '
Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? Shift 1 2 3

, . / End PgDn
Enter
0 .
Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl
Ins Del
Alt key Arrow keys Numeric keypad

Shift key
Ctrl key
Figure 2-13
Like the mouse, the keyboard is an input device that allows you to talk to the computer. The
keyboard is easily recognizable because it resembles a typewriter keypad. If the typewriter
eda e , hen l k f he c m nen ha c vered with buttons that have letters,
numbers, and symbols on them.
An ergonomic If e e e ed a e ie, babl ec gni e man f he ke n a ke b a d. In
keyboard is designed any case, the alphanumeric, symbol, and punctuation keys are self-e lana . And e ll
to relieve the stress review the rest of the keys that are unique to a (101-key and 104-key) keyboard. However, we
of typing for long will ignore the three keys found above the numeric keypad (<Print Screen/Sys Req>, <Scroll
periods of time. Lock>, and <Pause/Break>) because they are all fairly useless on most computers today.
NOTE: If your keyboard includes multimedia and Internet buttons above the keys,
consult the manual that comes with your keyboard to learn their functions.
Table 2-4: Special Keys and Their Functions

Key(s) Description
The <Alt> ke doesn t do an thing b itself it needs another key to make things
happen. For example, pressing the <Tab> key while holding down the <Alt> key
switches between any programs that are currently running.
Just like the <Alt> ke , the <Ctrl> ke doesn t do an thing b itself you need to
press another key with it to make things happen. For example, pressing the <X>
key while holding down the <Ctrl> key cuts whatever is selected.
The <F1> key is the help key, and pressing it displays helpful information about
hat ou re doing.
The <Esc> (Escape) ke is the Wait, I ve changed m mind ke and is the same
as clicking Cancel in a dialog box. For example, if you click something and an
unfamiliar dialog box appears, you can close it by pressing the <Esc> key.

Key(s) Description
The <Enter> ke is the Carr out m orders ke and is the same as clicking the
OK button in a dialog bo . For e ample, after ou ve t ped the name of a program
you want to run in a dialog box, press <Enter> to run the program. The <Enter>
ke also adds ne lines and starts ne paragraphs if ou re entering te t.
When ou re in a dialog bo , pressing the <Tab> ke moves to the ne t field.

When ou re using a ord processor, the <Tab> ke orks just like ou d think it
would and jumps to the nearest tab stop whenever you press it.
The arro ke s move our computer s cursor across the screen.
Nothing surprising here. The <Delete> key deletes or erases whatever you
select files, te t, or graphical objects. If ou re orking ith te t, the <Delete>
key erases characters to the right of the insertion point.
Use the <Backspace> key to fix your typing mistakes it erases characters to the
left of the insertion point.
The <Home> key jumps to the beginning of the current line hen ou re orking
with text.
The <End> ke jumps to the end of the current line hen ou re orking ith te t.
The <Page Up> key moves up one screen.
The <Page Down> key moves down one screen.
Quick Reference
A keyboard lets you enter
information and
commands into a
computer.
48 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-6: Digital Cameras and

Web Cams
Figure 2-14
A digital camera.
Figure 2-15
A Web cam usually sits on
top of a computer s
monitor.
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-14
Cameras with more
megapixels can take
sharper and more detailed
pictures.
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-15
A megapixel contains
A digi al came a le ake ic e ha can an fe a c m e . Once e
one million pixels.
transferred your pictures you can print them, insert them in word processing document, or
send them in an e-mail message. You can also edit digital photos, to remove such undesirable
objects as redeye or an ex-boyfriend.
The quality of the pictures a digital camera takes depends on its resolution, which is measured
in megapixels. One megapixel is equal to one million, or 1000 1000 pixels. The higher the
number of megapixels, the clearer and more detailed the picture.
Digi al came a d n e film they store their pictures on a type of removable memory
called flash cards. Flash cards can store anywhere from a dozen to several hundred pictures,
depending on how much memory they have. There are three different types or formats of flash
cards out there:
CompactFlash: Defini el he m c mm n e f digi al film he e,

CompactFlash cards can typically store anywhere from 8MB to over 1GB.
SmartMedia: SmartMedia is another a very popular type of memory card because of

its small size. SmartMedia cards are also widely used in many PDAs. SmartMedia cards
are available in capacities ranging from 2 MB to 128 MB.

Memory Stick: Sony makes this type of memory card for use in its own products:
Sony digital cameras, Sony PDAs, etc. Memory sticks are available in capacities ranging
from 4 MB to 128 MB.
Another popular toy you can add to your computer is a Web cam. A Web cam is a tiny digital
vide came a ha all i n f a c m e m ni . Pe le e Web cam f
videoconferencing and to send live images over the Internet.
Table 2-5: Comparison of Megapixels

Megapixels Image Size Description
Under 1 640 480 Entry level and obsolete digital cameras have a measly resolution
of 640x480 pixels. These cameras are fine if you want to e-mail
someone a picture or send someone a photo on a computer, but
the quality of a printed image is terrible when printed as 4x6in
photo.
1 1024 768 Supposedly 1024 768 resolution is this is enough to make sharp
4x6 inch prints. The truth is, at this point it depends more on the
quality of the digital camera than the resolution. Many printed
photos can still look digital or blurr at this resolution.
2 1600 1200 Two-megapixel cameras can take fine 4x6 inch prints and even
respectable 8x10s, about what you'd expect from a low-end film
camera.
3 2048 1536 Once you reach the three-megapixel bracket the quality of print is
normally excellent up to 8x11 prints. If you're looking for a really
good digital camera with strong features and good image quality,
three megapixels is a good range to search in.
4 2272 1740 Four-megapixel cameras are starting to get into the enthusiast
territory. They take exceptionally sharp photos and can print even
larger prints than 8x11.
5 2560 1920 We re definitel in enthusiast professional territor no .
Five-megapixel cameras are even used by professional
photographers to take really big prints. Quick Reference
A digital camera lets you
take pictures and transfer
them to a computer.
The quality, or resolution
of the pictures a digital
camera can take are
measured in megapixels,
or millions of pixels (dots).
The more pixels, the
better the resolution.
50 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-7: Other Input Devices

Figure 2-17
There s usuall not
enough room to use a
mouse on an airplane or
on the beach. It s for this
reason that most laptops
have built-in touch pads
and AccuPoint® Pointing
Devices.
Figure 2-17
The keyboard and mouse are the two most common input devices for a computer, but there
are many more. Most respectable laptops have a built-in touch pad or AccuPoint® Pointing
Device or pointing stick that works like a mouse. Other mouse alternatives include track balls
and light pens.
Other common computer input devices include scanners for copying images to a computer,
joysticks for playing games, and microphones for recording sound. You can learn about these
input devices by taking a look at the table on the next page.

Table 2-6: Other Input Devices

Input Device Description
A touch pad is a small, touch-sensitive pad used as a pointing device on some
portable computers. By moving a finger or other object along the pad, you can
move the pointer on the display screen.
Touch Pad
An Accupoint® Pointing Device, or pointing stick, is another mouse substitute
that is found on many laptop computers. An Accupoint® Pointing Device usually
sits in the middle of the keyboard and resembles an eraser at the end of a
AccuPoint® pencil.
Pointing Device
A track ball is essentially a mouse lying on its back. To move the pointer, you
rotate the ball with your thumb, your fingers, or the palm of your hand.
Track Ball
A light pen is input device that utilizes a light-sensitive detector to select objects
on a display screen. A light pen is similar to a mouse, except that with a light
pen you can move the pointer and select objects on the display screen by
Light Pen directly pointing to the objects with the pen.
A scanner is a lot like a photocopier. Instead of producing copies, a scanner

converts images into digital information and stores it in a computer.
Scanner
Mostly used for computer games, a joystick is a lever that moves in all
directions and usually controls some type of movement on the computer.
Quick Reference
Joystick Other Input Devices
If your computer has a sound card (and most computer have one) you can plug Include:
in a microphone to digitally record sounds to your computer. Touch pads
AccuPoint® Pointing
Devices
Microphone
Track balls
Light pens
Scanners
Joysticks
Microphones
52 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-8: Monitor

Figure 2-18
Similar in appearance to a
television screen, a
monitor displays images
and text on its screen.
Figure 2-19
Flat-panel monitors are
more expensive than
traditional monitors, but
they take up less space
and use less electricity.
Figure 2-19
Common controls found
Move Image Stretch Image Pincushion
on the front of a monitor. Left-Right Left-Right In-Out Brightness
Move Image Stretch Image Wider-Narrower Contrast

Up-Down Up-Down Image
Figure 2-20
A com e m ni l k and k a l like a TV c een. The m ni i eall nl half

of what makes text and images appear on the screen. The other half is the graphic card, or
video/display adapter. The monitor plugs into the graphics card in the back of the computer.
Flat panel or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitors, like the one in Figure 2-19, will
eventually replace older CRT monitors, like the one shown in Figure 2-18. A flat panel
monitor is the same type of display that is found in laptop computers. Flat panel monitors are
thin, lightweight, and use a lot less electricity than traditional monitors. Flat panel monitors
are also considerably more expensive than traditional monitors, although the price is
dropping. Flat panel monitors are wider than traditional monitors are; in fact a 15-inch flat
panel monitor has almost the same viewing area as a 17-inch traditional monitor!
0.28 mm Size
dot pitch The size of a monitor is measured diagonally across the screen, just like TVs. Common
monitor sizes are 15, 17, 19, and 21 inches. The most popular monitor size is currently 17
inches.
Dot pitch is the Dot Pitch
distance between Dot pitch refers to the distance between each pixel, or dot, on the screen, as measured in
pixels or dots on a millimeters (mm). The smaller the dot pitch, the closer the dots, and the sharper the
screen. Dot pitch is image i . If e in he ma ke f a m ni find ne i h a 0.28 mm le .
measured in Refresh Rate
millimeters (mm). The refresh rate determines how quickly the monitor redraws, or updates, the image on
the screen. Higher refresh rates are better, since they flicker less and are easier on the
eyes. The refresh rate is measured in herz (Hz), or the number of times per second the
m ni ed a he en i e c een. If e b ing a ne m ni , make sure to get one
with a refresh rate of 72 Hz or better.

Screen Savers and Energy Star Compliance

A c een a e i a m ing ic e ha a ea n c m e c een hen d n
use your computer for a while. Screen savers originally prevented phosphor burn, which
occurred when a static image became etched onto the screen after a long period of time.
T da m ni a en ce ible h h b n, b me e le ill e c een
savers for fun.
Most monitors are Energy Star compliant. This means they automatically turn themselves
off after a period of time to save electricity. You turn the monitor back only by simply
moving the mouse or pressing a key on the keyboard.
Quick Reference
CRT Monitors:
Older type of monitor that
looks like a television set.
Flat Panel LCD Monitors:
Newer type of monitor
that is thin, lightweight
and somewhat more
expensive.
Other Things to Know
about Monitors:
The size of a monitor is
measured diagonally
across the screen.
Average monitor sizes
range from 15-inches to
21-inches.
The monitor refresh rate
determines how quickly
the monitor redraws, or
updates, the image on the
screen. Most monitors
have a refresh rate of
72MHz or better.
A screen saver is a
moving picture that
appears on your
computer screen when
ou don t use our
computer for a while.
54 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-9: Graphics Card

Figure 2-21
A computer s monitor
plugs into the graphic
card, an expansion slot
that plugs into a
computer s motherboard.
Figure 2-22
Newer computer games
have fantastic graphics Figure 2-21
but ou ll need a
3D graphics accelerator
card to see them. Figure 2-22
The second part of a c m e ide em i he g a hic ca d ide ada e . A g a hic

ca d i an e an i n ca d ha l g in a c m e m he b a d and i e n ible f all
he e and e image ha a ea n c m e m ni . Man c m e d n
have a graphics card at all all he ide ca abili ie a e in ead b il in he c m e
motherboard.
Graphics cards come in many models and prices. More expensive graphics cards are faster
and can display more complex, 3D graphics something especially ef l if e in
computer games. Here are the basics about graphic cards:
Screen Resolution
Resolution has to do with how much information can fit on the computer screen.
Ob i l can adj h la ge mall c m e m ni i ( i h
buying a new one that is), but you can make all the images on your screen larger or
smaller so you can see more information at once. You can adjust the screen resolution to
suit your needs and preferences. For more information about screen resolution see Table
2-7: Common Screen Resolutions.
Color Depth
Color depth is the number of colors that are displayed on the screen at once. So why
would you want to change the number of colors displayed on your screen? Perhaps you
want to use higher color depth settings to make videos and photographs more realistic. Or
some finicky games also require you to use a specific color depth. For more information
about color depth see Table 2-8: Common Color Depths.
Graphics Card Memory
Graphics cards have their n mem , RAM, j like a c m e . Y ll need m e
memory to display higher screen resolutions and color depths. Video cards can have
an he e f m 1 MB all he a 128 MB f mem . If e b ing a ne
computer, make sure it has at least 64 MB of memory.
3D Graphics Accelerator
A 3D graphics accelerator card has its own CPU that is used to create 3D graphics. If
e e en c n ide ing la ing game n c m e, h ld ha e a 3D graphics
accelerator card, as most newer games require one.

Table 2-7: Common Screen Resolutions

Resolution Description
No longer supported in most computers, 640 by 480 used to be the lowest
Higher Resolutions Require More Speed and Video Memory
resolution setting. Larger and cheaper monitors have made 640 by 480
resolution effectively obsolete.
640 by 480
This has been the standard resolution setting for most computers, and is the
lowest setting on newer monitors. This is a good in-between resolution,
allowing you to display quite a bit of information on the screen without having
to use a magnifying glass to read it. Use this setting if you have a 15-inch or
800 by 600 17-inch monitor.
The new standard, 1024 by 768 puts a lot of information on your screen, but
the images can start getting small and difficult to read at this point (unless you
have a large monitor). Use this setting if you have a 17-inch or larger monitor
or when you want to see a lot of information at the same time, for example if
1024 by 768 ou re orking on a large spreadsheet, graphic files, or multiple windows.
Depending on how expensive the graphics card in your computer is, there may
be several higher modes of resolution which continue to display more and
more information and smaller and smaller images.
Higher
resolutions
Quick Reference
Table 2-8: Common Color Depths Screen Resolution:
Color Depth Description Determines how much
No longer supported on many computers, 256 colors was the standard color information can fit on the
More Colors Require More Speed and Video Memory
depth years ago, but most computers and video cards are fast enough to run with computer screen at once.
more colors without taking a performance hit, making this color depth almost Common screen
obsolete. resolutions include
256 Colors 800 by 600 and
1,024 by 768.
16-bit color displays roughly 65,000 colors at once. This is the point where
pictures become photo-realistic. This is a good color depth setting because it can Color Depth:
display photo-realistic images without slowing your computer down. You have to Color depth is the number
really squint to see much difference between 16-bit color and higher levels of of colors that are
16-bit
color depth. displayed on the screen
at once. Common color
24-bit color displays 16.7 million of colors at once. Depending on how expensive depths include 16-bit and
the graphics card in your computer is there may be several higher modes of color 24-bit color.
depth, which continue to display more and more colors on the screen.
Video Cards:
24-bit Have their own memory
and processor. Generally
32-bit color displays 16.7 million of colors at once. 32-bit color is faster and more speaking, the more
efficient than 24-bit color. memory a video card has,
the higher the resolution
32-bit and color depth it can
display.
56 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-10: Printer Basics

Figure 2-23
InkJet printers are the
most inexpensive and
popular type of printer sold
today.
Figure 2-24
A printer s resolution
determines the quality of
the images it can produce.
Figure 2-23
300 dpi 600 dpi

Figure 2-24
A printer is an output device that puts text and graphics on paper. Using the printer is often the
last step in creating something n a c m e , he he i a le e , ead hee , digi al
photograph.
Unf na el , he e a l kn ab in e e eciall if eb ing ne. He e a e
the main printer concepts you should know:
Type of Printer
There are several different types of printers out there: InkJet and Laser printers are the
most common. InkJet printers are the cheapest and most common type of printer and can
be found in both homes and businesses. Laser printers are usually faster than InkJet
printers, but they normally can only print in black and white. Laser printers are used
mainly by businesses.
Color vs. Black and White
Color used to be an expensive option for printers, but not any more. Most InkJet printers
can print in color and so can an increasing number of laser printers. Most laser printers
still print in black in white great for text but not for images and graphics.
Resolution
A in e e l i n hel de e mine he ali f he image i can produce. Higher
resolution means higher quality images. Printer resolution is measured in dots per inch
(dpi). Generally, 600-dpi resolution works great for text documents, while you will
probably want 1200 dpi or better resolution for printing images. See Figure 2-24 for a
good illustration of varying resolutions.
Speed
A in e eed de e mine h ickl i can in age . S eed i mea ed
ways: in characters per second (cps) or in pages per minute (ppm). Either way you want a
higher number if you want to have a faster printer. Printers usually slow down quite a bit
when printing pages with a lot of complicated graphics, or color images.

Ink Cartridges and Toner

Today many InkJet printers are cheap about as much as dinner for two at a very fancy
e a an . S nd g d be e? He e he ca ch: he ink f m in e c a
lot of money. InkJet printers use ink cartridges that seem to run dry at an alarming speed.
Laser printers user toner cartridges filled with the same messy black powder that is found
in copy machines. Laser toner cartridges last a lot longer than InkJet cartridges, but they
also cost significantly more.
Memory
Laser printers have their own memory, or RAM, just like a computer. This memory is
used to store pages before they are printed. Memory is important for printing complex or
high-resolution images. Most laser printers have anywhere from 2 MB to 8 MB of
memory.
Print Buffer and Spooler
Computers are a lot faster than most printers are, so they can send information faster than
the printer can accept it. A printer buffer or spooler fixes this problem. A print buffer
works like a dam: it holds back the information and releases it at a rate that the printer
can handle.
Quick Reference
InkJet and Laser printers
are the most common
printer types.
Printer resolution
determines the quality of
the images a printer can
produce. Printer
resolution is measured in
dots per inch (dpi).
A printer s speed
determines how quickly it
can print pages.
Printers get their ink from
expensive cartridges
(InkJet printers) and
toners (laser printers)
Many printers have their
own memory, which is
required for printing more
complex images.
A print spooler or buffer
temporarily stores large
print jobs and releases
them when the printer is
able to print them.
58 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-11: Types of Printers

Figure 2-25
There are many different
types of printers available,
with an enormous range of
prices and features.
Figure 2-25
Le na d da Vinci didn limi him elf b ing nl ain and b he c ea e hi

masterpieces; he also used chalk to make sketches and a chisel and hammer to make
sculptures. Maybe Leonardo would have used an airbrush or spray paint if they had been
in en ed e . Hmm ma be n . Beca e he e a e diffe en e f in j b he e a e
diffe en e f in e . A e a h me e ha in an cca i nal le e ? Y ll
probably want to buy a cheap InkJet printer. Are you a busy office that has lots of people who
need in l f d c men ? Y e babl l king a ge ing a Laser printer.
The following table describes the main types of printers out there and how or why you would
use them, ll ha e n e c e f b ing he ng kind f in e hen ge a nd
to buying one.
Table 2-9: Types of Printers

Printer Type Description
Inkjet printers are easily the most popular and inexpensive type of printer out
there. If ou have a printer for our home computer, chances are it s an InkJet
printer. InkJet printers create images by spraying ink onto a page. The
inexpensive InkJet printer gets its ink from very expensive InkJet cartridges.
Most InkJet printers can print in color, and their speeds vary from 2 to 16 pages
Ink Jet per minute (ppm).

Printer Type Description

Laser printers have blazing speed anywhere from 4 to 20 pages per minute
(ppm), great resolution anywhere from 300 to 1,200 dots per inch (dpi), and
recently have become relatively inexpensive. Laser printers are great for
businesses and people who need to produce large amounts of text documents
or correspondence.
Laser printers use the same technology as photocopy machines to create black
Laser and white images on paper. Laser printers use powdered black ink, called toner,
just like photocopy machines do. When the toner cartridge runs out, you have to
replace it with a new toner cartridge. Toner cartridges cost a lot more than
InkJet cartridges do, but they also last a lot longer.
A color laser printer works just like an ordinary laser printer, except that it can
print in color, of course. Color laser printers are quite expensive and the color
toner cartridges for them are even costlier.
Color Laser
As its name implies, a multifunction printer can perform more than one task.
Multifunction printers can usually operate as a fax machine, copier, and scanner
in addition to their traditional printing duties.
Multifunction
Popular in the 1980 s, nois dot-matrix printers have gone the way of the
dinosaurs, except in businesses that need to print on carbon copies.
Dot matrix printers usually use a type of paper with holes punched along each
side called continuous form paper, and loads it through something called a
tractor feed. Dot-matrix printers range in speed from 25 to 450 characters per
second (cps), or 1 to 18 pages per minute (ppm).
Quick Reference
Resolution is measured differently with dot-matrix printers. Instead of using dot
Dot Matrix
per inch (dpi) dot matrix resolution is measured by how many little pins are on Print Types Include:
the dot-matrix print head. Dot-matrix printers are available with 9-pin (terrible InkJet
quality) and 24-pin (higher quality) print heads.
Laser and color laser
Don t e pect to find a plotter at our local computer store. Plotters are special, Multifunction
very expensive printers that are used to create posters and blueprints.
Dot matrix
Plotter
Plotter
60 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-12: Sound and Speakers

Figure 2-26
Older computers had a
sound card, which
plugged into the
motherboard of the
computer. Newer
computers have sound
capabilities built into the
motherboard.
Figure 2-27
You ll need to connect a Figure 2-26
pair of speakers or
headphones to your
computer if you want to
hear sound.
Figure 2-27
The term sound card is a little misleading; sound cards used to be expansion cards that
l gged in a c m e m he b a d. Al h gh ch nd ca d ill e i , da m
computers have sound capabilities built-it to their motherboards. Either way, a sound card
basically does two things: it plays and records digital sounds.
The types of sounds your computer can play range from the sounds you hear when you turn
on your computer, to explosions in a computer game. A sound card can also play MP3 music
files. An MP3 is a highly compressed sound file that lets you play CD-quality music on your
computer.
While i n nea l a im ant, sound cards also let you record sounds if you plug in a
stereo or microphone. For example, you could use a sound card to record your aging cassette
tape collection to MP3 files. Newer speech recognition software also requires that you have a
microphone plugged into your computer.
Sound cards have the most confusing ports or jacks on the entire computer. Most of them look
almost exactly the same e eciall if e c ched in he da k nde a de k ing l g
in a pair of speakers to your computer. The table on the following page might make things a
little easier by describing each of these ports.
Table 2-10: Sound Card Jacks and Ports

Jack Picture Description
This is the main jack where you connect your speakers or

headphones to hear the sounds produced by the sound card.
Speaker

Jack Picture Description
This jack lets you connect a microphone to your computer so

that you record sounds and use speech recognition software.
Microphone
You can listen to your computer through your home stereo

system if you plug it into this jack. This is especially useful if
Line Out you want to play MP3 files on your stereo.
You can record a cassette, audio CD, or the radio by

plugging a stereo system into this jack.
Line In
This port lets you connect a joystick, used for playing games,
Game Port to your computer.
Quick Reference
Sound Cards:
Allow computer to play
and record digital sounds.
62 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-13: Modem

Figure 2-28
An internal modem plugs
into an expansion slot
inside a computer.
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29
An external modem plugs
into a serial port and sits
outside a computer.
Figure 2-30
Most laptops have a
built-in modem.
Just about every new computer comes with a built-in modem. A modem translates a
c m e ne and e in a di ne , ha i can an mi inf ma i n e he h ne
lines to other modems. The speed of a modem is measured by how fast it can transmit
information in bits per second (bps).
Internal: Most computers have an internal modem, like the one shown in Figure 2-28.
Internal modems often plug into an expansion slot and are cheaper than external modems.
External: An external modem, like the one shown in Figure 2-29, plugs in to a
c m e e ial . Newer, broadband modem may plug into the USB or Ethernet
port. A broadband modem transmits information directly over a connection, unlike older
traditional modems that have to convert the information to tones or sounds first. Because
of this, broadband modems are very, very fast much faster than standard modems. DSL
and Cable are the most common types of broadband connections.
Quick Reference
He e a ick e ie f he maj e f m dem ha a e a ailable:
Standard Modems:
Transmit information over Table 2-11: Modem Types and Speeds
standard phone lines to
other computers. Type Speed (in bps) Description
Maximum speed is Standard 56K Standard modems connect to a standard telephone line
56K bps. and are used for dial-up connections to the Internet.
Broadband and Digital ISDN 56K to 128K One of the older broadband connections. It s onl t ice
Modems: as fast as a traditional modem and pretty much obsolete.
Digital / Broadband
Much faster than standard DSL 256K to 6,000K DSL modems take advantage of unused frequencies in
modems, with speeds up the phone line, such as a pause in conversation. DSL
to 4,000K bps. Broadband modems are very fast; the problem is that you have to be
modems include ISDN, close to a phone company in order to get DSL service.
DSL, and Cable.
Cable 640K to 4,000K A cable modem is the fastest modem you can buy for
home use. The problem is your cable company has to
offer cable Internet access in order to use it.

Lesson 2-14: Input/Output

Devices
Figure 2-31
A touch screen monitor is
an example of an
input/output device.
Figure 2-32
A multifunction printer is
another example of an
input (scanner)/output
(printer) device.
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-31
Some computer devices can be categorized as both an input device and an output device. For
example, a multifunction printer, like the one shown in Figure 2-32 has a scanner (input) and
a printer (output). Touch screen monitors are another example of an input/output device; they
display images (output) and also let users interact with the computer by pressing areas of the
screen (input). Quick Reference
Some computer devices
have both input and
output functions.
Examples include touch
screen monitors and
multifunction printers.
64 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-15: Hard Drive

Figure 2-33 Taxes Love Letters
Letter to Bill
How information is stored Investments
Letter to Mary
in a file cabinet.
Figure 2-34 Letters
How information is stored

on a hard disk.
A file cabinet s information is A folder may contain several
organized and grouped into files and even several
folders. subfolders.
Figure 2-33
Storage Notes:
Internal Hard Disk
A computer stores
Speed: Very fast. Most hard information on a hard disk.
disks have an average
access speed of between 8 Information on a hard disk is A folder may contain several
to 15 milliseconds (ms). Figure 2-34 organized and grouped into files and subfolders.
Capacity: Enormous. Many folders or directories.
hard disks have more than
200 Gigabytes (GB) of A hard drive or hard disk is a c m e main age de ice. M ha d d i e a e cked
storage. a a in he em ni f a c m e and hidden f m ie . Al h gh n mall can
ee a c m e internal hard drive you can usually hear it whirring inside when you start the
Cost: Hard disks are
computer or a g am. An e e nal ha d d i e i ide he c m e em ni and
becoming more and more
plugs into a USB, Firewire, or SCSI port.
inexpensive. Byte for byte
they are the most The hard drive is like the file-cabinet portion of your desk. And files really are saved in
inexpensive way to store folders on a computer, so this really is the perfect analogy. Most computers have a single hard
data. drive located inside of the computer case labeled C. When a computer has more than one hard
drive they are labeled D, then E, and so on. Unlike RAM, a hard drive retains its information
even when you turn the computer off.
S ha ed n a ha d d i e? Le ake a l k
Operating System Files
Ac m e e a ing em, like Wind XP, i ed n he ha d d i e.
Program Files
Program files are the programs you work with, like your word processor, your Internet
software, or your games. Programs usually come on floppy disks or CD-ROM , ei
Unlike floppy disks and first install, or copy, it to your hard drive in order to use the program.
CD-ROMs, most hard Data Files
disks reside inside of Whenever you create a document or data file on your computer, like a word processing
the computer or document, the computer stores it in its temporary memory (RAM.) You must save your
system unit and cannot documents to the hard drive or they will be lost when you turn off your computer.
be easily removed.

Most hard d i e a e c nnec ed a c m e m he b a d h gh me hing called an Storage Notes:

IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) connection. You can also connect CD-ROM and DVD External Hard Disk
drives to an IDE connection. A slight problem with IDE is that it only supports a total of four
de ice d i e . Thi i n a big deal f m h me e , b i i if e a b ine and Speed: Very fast, though
need a e e i h l f ha d d i e . S he e an he a c nnec ha d d i e a normally slower than internal
computer: through a SCSI (pronounced get this scuzzy) port. SCSI connections are often hard disks.
faster than IDE and they can connect up to seven devices instead of four. SATA (Serial ATA) Capacity: Enormous same
connections are currently emerging as the most dominant connection, however. as internal hard disks.
OK, so what else do you need to need to know about hard drives? Cost: Slightly more
expensive than internal hard
Hard Disk Size (or Capacity) disks.
How much information (how many programs and data) a hard drive can store is measured
in bytes, just like RAM. Hard drive sizes in newer computers range from
20 Megabytes (MB) all the way up to 200 Gigabytes (GB)! How big a hard drive should
ge hen b a c m e ? N mall ge a lea 40 Gigab e if ea
home or small business user. More is better in hard drives, because programs keep getting
bigger.
Average Access Time
A hard drives average access time is how fast it can find information. Average access
time is measured in milliseconds (ms), or 1/1000 of a second. The lower the access
speed, the faster the hard drive. Most newer computers have an average access time of 8
to 15 ms.
Quick Reference
Hard Drive:
A computer s main
storage device,
sometimes called the C
drive.
Modern hard drives can
store anywhere from
20GB to 250GB of
information.
Average access time is
how fast a hard drive can
find information.
Hard drives are
connected to a computer
through either an IDE,
SCSI or SATA interface.
66 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-16: Hard Drive

Maintenance
Figure 2-35
Routine hard drive
maintenance keeps
computers happy and
running smoothly.
Figure 2-36
Most hard disk repair tools
can be found in Microsoft
Windows by right-clicking
the hard drive, selecting
Properties from the
shortcut menu, and
clicking the Tools tab.
Figure 2-37
Hard drives need to be Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36
defragmented periodically
to make them more
efficient.
Create a
fragmentation report
on the selected drive
Defragment the
selected drive
Figure 2-37
Cars require maintenance to keep them running at their peak performance. Some car
maintenance tasks are simple and routine, such as changing the oil every 3,000 miles. Others
are more complicated, such as installing a new radio. Hard drives are no different they
require routine maintenance to prevent and/or correct problems and to keep them running at
their best performance.

B n e babl nde ing, H d e ne main ain a ha d d i e? The e a e iea

few ways:
Repair a Hard Drive
Over time, hard drives can become damaged, effecting their performance. Fortunately
most of the hard drive damage is caused by normal wear and tear and is not serious. You
can diagnose and correct most hard drive problems with a hard drive repair program.
Microsoft Windows comes with a built-in hard drive repair program.
Defragmenting a Hard Drive
Normally a computer stores a file in the same location on a hard drive. Over time, a hard
drive can become fragmented, and instead of storing a file in the same location it begins
storing parts of it all over. When the computer needs to read a fragmented file, it must Make sure you install
read several different parts of the hard drive instead of just one. Defragmenting a hard antivirus software on
drive puts the fragmented files back together in one place. You should defragment your your computer to
c m e ha d d i e ab nce a m n h. prevent malicious
Backing up a Hard Drive computer viruses.
A c m e ha d d i e e inf ma i n e en hen he c m e i n ff, b
should still back up the documents you create to some type of removable storage, like a
CD-RW or tape backup. This will give you an extra copy of your files in case your hard
drive is damaged.
Virus Protection
A computer virus is actually a small computer program written by a malicious person
with the purpose of vandalizing computers by erasing information on their hard drive and
causing other problems. Anti-Virus programs that protect computers against viruses, like
Norton AntiVirus or McAfee VirusScan, are available at most comp e e . If e Quick Reference
even thinking about connecting to the Internet, you need to have AntiVirus software Hard Drive Repair and
installed on your computer. Fragmentation:
Hard Drive Compression Over time, small errors
A computer can increase space on a hard drive by using a special program to compress, and fragmentation can
or squeeze together, the files stored on a hard drive. Most data compression programs can degrade the performance
effectively double the amount of information a hard drive can store. Sounds great, so why of a hard drive. These
d n man e le e di k c m e i n? Fi , da a c m e i n l ha d d i e problems can be
because the computer has to uncompress files before it can read them. Second, data corrected by a hard drive
c m e i n f en ca e m e blem in ha d d i e . Thi d, e e al g am n utility program.
n n he c m e i h c m e ed ha d d i e . D n c m e ha d d i e nle
you absolutely have to, and even then it might be better to start looking for a new, larger Hard Drive Backups:
hard drive than to use data compression. Should be performed to
give you an extra copy of
your files if your hard
drive becomes damaged.
Virus Protection:
Software should be
installed on every
computer to protect
against malicious
computer viruses.
Compression:
Increases the space on a
hard drive by
compressing, or
squeezing together, its
files.
68 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-17: CD-ROM Drive

Figure 2-38 CD-ROM Transfer
Speed Rate
A CD-ROM drive.
8x 1,000 KB/s
Figure 2-39 10x 1,600 KB/s
12x 1,800 KB/s
A CD-ROM drive can also
16x 2,400 KB/s
play the same, great audio
24x 3,600 KB/s
CDs that a stereo system
32x 4,800 KB/s
does.
40x 6,000 KB/s
Figure 2-40 Figure 2-38 48x 7,200 KB/s
60x 9,000 KB/s
Newer CD-ROM drives
can transfer data faster Figure 2-40
than older drives, as this
table shows.
Figure 2-39
Storage Notes: Another type of drive almost all computers have is a CD-ROM drive (CD-ROM stands for
CD-ROM Compact Disc-Read Only Memory). CD-ROM drives play CD-ROM discs the same kind of
Speed: Much slower than a compact discs you can play in your stereo system. CD-ROMs can store lots of information: a
hard disk, but still faster than single CD-ROM can hold more than 700 Megabytes (MB) of data more than an
a floppy. encyclopedia set! Unlike a hard drive, most CD-ROMs can only read information can
sa e, ec d an hing n hem ( ha ha he ROM in CD-ROM stands for: Read Only
Capacity: About
Memory!) On the other hand, CD-RW drives can read and write (or burn) to special CD-R and
650 Megabytes (MB).
CD-RW discs (the RW in CD-RW stands for ReWritable.) The CD-ROM drive is usually
Cost: Very inexpensive. labeled D on most computers.
The speed of a CD-ROM drive determines how quickly the computer can read information
stored on the CD-ROM. Faster CD-ROM drives produce better sound and video quality. The
original CD-ROM drive was no faster than an audio CD player, so the speed of all subsequent
CD-ROM drives is measured by how many times faster they are than the original, 1x CD-
ROM d i e. T da CD-ROM drives are up to sixty times (60x) faster than the original.

Here are some things you can do with CD-ROMs:

Install Programs
More programs are coming on CD-ROMs because of their large storage capacity. Instead
of installing and copying 20 floppies to your hard drive, you only have to install a single
CD-ROM.
Run CD-ROM Programs
CD-ROM-based programs are usually the coolest programs available for your computer.
CD-ROM programs often have rich, exiting multimedia content: high quality sounds,
music, videos, and animations. For example, a popular CD-ROM program is a complete,
searchable encyclopedia set which contains high quality pictures, sounds, music, and
videos.
Play Audio CDs
Most CD-ROM drives are capable of playing audio CDs the same kind your stereo
uses! So your computer can play music while you work.
Table 2-12: Types of CDs

CD Type Description
CD-ROM The original, standard CD, CD-ROM stands for Compact Disc, Read-Only Memory. What
this means is that you can only read information from a CD-ROM; ou can t add ne
information.
CD-R If you have a CD-RW drive you can permanently store information on a CD-R (Compact
Disc-Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a CD-R is permanent and
can t be changed or erased.
You can also use CD-R discs to create musical CDs that you can listen to in a stereo
system.
CD-RW Unlike CD-R discs, a CD-RW (Compact Disc-ReWritable) disc can be written to many
times. You can also modify and erase information on a CD-RW disc if you have a
CD-RW drive, of course. Quick Reference
CD-ROM:
Stands for Compact Disc-
Read Only Memory. A
CD-ROM drive lets you
install programs, run
CD-ROM based
programs, and play audio
CDs. A CD-ROM holds
about 650MB of
information.
CD-R:
Recordable. Lets you
permanently write or burn
information.
CD-RW:
ReWritable. Can be
written to and modified
many times.
70 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-18: DVD Drive

Figure 2-41
A DVD disc looks almost
identical to a CD-ROM
disc.
Figure 2-42
The DVD logo.
Figure 2-41
Figure 2-43
A single DVD can store as
much information as
several CD-ROMs.
Figure 2-44 Figure 2-42 Figure 2-44 Figure 2-43
A DVD drive can also play
the same, great movies Next generation DVD drives are quickly replacing CD-ROM drives in newer computers. A
that you can watch on a DVD (stands for Digital Versatile Disc) disc looks just like a CD-ROM, but it can store more
DVD player. than 4 Gigabytes (GB) of information as much as seven CDs. There are even rumored to be
f e DVD di c ha can h ld 17 Gigab e ! Unf na el he e ill eall i n a l
of software that is available on DVD discs. Most people simply use their DVD drive to watch
DVD movies. The CD-ROM drive is usually labeled D or E on most computers.
Storage Notes:
DVD New rewritable DVD drives, that can record or burn information to special type of DVD discs
have recently become available the market. Unfortunately for the consumer, the greedy DVD
Speed: Faster than a manufacture c ldn ag ee n a ni e al ec dable DVD anda d, he e a e e e al
CD-ROM drive but not as fast different competing formats out there. Hopefully consumers will eventually make the decision
as a hard disk. for the DVD manufacturers, like they did between Betamax and VHS videotapes. Until then
Capacity: Usually about he e i n eall an clea an e ab hich ec dable and e i able DVD f ma g
4 Gigabytes (GB), although with, although both DVD+RW and DVD-RW discs work in most newer DVD drives and
future DVD discs are players. We can tell you that recordable DVD-RAM format is almost universally not
rumored to hold up to compatible with most DVD players. Table 2-13: DVD Formats tries to make sense of all the
17 Gigabytes (GB). available formats. For more information on recordable DVD standards, visit
http://www.dvdrhelp.com/dvdplayers.php on the Web.
Cost: Slightly more than a
CD-ROM but still very
inexpensive. Table 2-13: DVD Formats
DVD Format Description
DVD-ROM The original, standard DVD. ROM stands for Read-Only Memory. This means
ou can onl read information from a DVD; ou can t add new information.
DVD-R If you have a DVD-RW drive you can permanently store information on a
DVD-R (DVD-Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a DVD-R is
permanent and can t be changed or erased.
DVD-RW drives can also write to DVD-RW discs

DVD Format Description

DVD-RW If you have a DVD-RW drive you can use DVD-RW (ReWritable) discs, which
can be re-written up to 1,000 times. You can also modify and erase information
on a DVD-RW disc. DVD-RW discs have some compatibility problems with
older DVD Players and DVD ROM drives.
DVD-RW drives can also write to DVD-R discs.
DVD+R If you have a DVD+RW drive you can permanently store information on a
DVD+R (DVD+Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a DVD+R
is permanent and can t be changed or erased.
DVD+RW drives can also write to DVD+RW discs.
DVD+RW If you have a DVD+RW drive you can use DVD+RW (ReWritable) discs, which
can be re-written to up to 1,000 times. You can also modify and erase
information on a DVD+RW disc. DVD+RW discs have some compatibility
problems with older DVD Players and DVD ROM drives.
DVD+RW drives can also write to DVD+R discs.
DVD-RAM DVD-RAM is a rewritable DVD format that can be re-written to many times.
DVD-RAM discs are beginning to look like an orphan format, since the on t
work in most DVD players.
Quick Reference
DVD:
Stands for Digital
Versatile Disc. A DVD disc
looks like a CD-ROM, but
can store much more
information.
Recordable and
Rewritable DVDs:
There are several
competing, non-
compatible formats out
there, including DVD-R
/DVD-RW and DVD+R/
DVD+RW.
72 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-19: Floppy Drive

Figure 2-45
A relic of the past, floppy
disks don t have the speed
or capacity to be very
useful in the 21st century.
Figure 2-45
Storage Notes: Most desktop computers still have a floppy drive, although most laptops have dropped the
Floppy Disk all-but-obsolete floppy drive. Floppy drives read flat, 3½-inch floppy disks. Floppy drives are
Speed: Very slow. as slow as a glacier when compared to hard drives and CD-ROM drives. Floppy disks can
only store a scant 1.44 Megabytes (MB) just a little more than your typical novel.
Capacity: Very small
1.44 Megabytes (MB). S h a e he e elic f m he 1980 ill a nd? Floppy disks can still be useful for
Cost: Very cheap. transferring and backing up small documents. Some other uses for floppy disks include:
A mini cutting board
An eye patch (for one-eyed software pirates)
A room divider for hamsters
Quick Reference
An accessory for aging computer nerds
Floppy Disks:
Are slow and can only
store 1.44MB. They are
all but obsolete.

Lesson 2-20: Zip and Jaz Drives

Figure 2-46
A Zip drive can store
100MB or 250MB on
removable Zip disks.
Figure 2-47
A Jaz drive can store 1GB
or 2GB on a removable
Jaz disk.
Figure 2-47
Figure 2-46
Removable storage drives have features of both hard drives and floppy drives. Removable Storage Notes:
storage drives work like a floppy drive because they read and write information on small, Zip Drive
removable cassettes that are about the size of a floppy disk. They are like hard drives because Speed: Significantly slower
each cassette can usually hold more than 100 megabytes (MB) and is much faster than a than most hard disks.
floppy disk, but still not quite as fast as a hard drive. Two of the most popular removable
Capacity: 100 to
storage drives are the Zip drive and Jaz drive, both made by Iomega.
250 Megabytes (MB).
Zip disks can store 100 to 250 Megabytes (MB) on a removable disk about 70 to 170 times Cost: Expensive when
as much as an old floppy disk. Zip drives are available in both 100MB and 250MB versions. compared to costs of
Y ll need a 250MB e i n ead b h 100MB and 250MB Zi di k . Zi di k a e a g ea equivalent CD-RW discs and
way to transfer and backup information b he e n m ch f a al e hen c m a ed other storage devices.
newer CD-RW and even newer DVD-RW discs.
Jaz disks can store 1 to 2 Gigabytes (GB) on a single removable disk as much as an older Storage Notes:
hard drive! Jaz drives are also fast, though not as fast as a hard disk, s he e g ea f Jaz Drive
backing up information. Despite their huge storage capacities, Jaz drives really never caught Speed: Slower than most
on. hard disks, but faster than a
Zip disk.
Capacity: 2 Gigabytes (GB).
Cost: Fairly expensive when
compared to costs of
equivalent CD-RW discs and
other storage devices.
Quick Reference
Zip and Jaz drives are
removable storage
devices that have
features of both floppy
and hard disks.
74 Computer Basics
Lesson 2-21: Other Storage

Devices
Figure 2-48
Flash cards are most
commonly used as the
film in digital cameras
and can also be read by
many PDAs and most
computers.
A tape backup
Figure 2-48
automatically makes a
copy, or backup, of all the
files on a computer s hard
drive.
We e c e ed he main age de ice ha a e he e, b i eem a if ne ne

storage devices are invented and elea ed e e ea ; me ca ch n, me d n . He e a
run-down on some of the less common storage devices that are out there:
Table 2-14: Other Storage Devices

Device Description
A tape drive creates copies, or backups, of the files on a computer s hard drive
onto a tape cartridge. The backed up files can be restored in case the original
files are lost due to disaster or stupidity.
Quick Reference
Other Storage Devices Tape Drive
Include: The LS-120 drive was meant to be an alternative to Zip disks, because it could
Tape drives store 120 MB of data on a disk, and a replacement for floppy drives, because it
LS-120 Super drives could also read and write to traditional 1.44 MB floppy disks. Unfortunately
LS-120 never really caught on with the general public.
Flash cards LS-120 SuperDrive
USB flash drives Flash cards are commonl used as the film for digital cameras. Flash cards
can store anywhere from a dozen to several hundred pictures, depending on
how much memory they have. There are three different types of flash cards:
Flash Cards CompactFlash cards, SmartMedia cards, and Memory Sticks. Flash cards can
store anywhere from 4 MB all the way up to 1 GB. Wow!
A USB flash drive is really another type of Flash Card that plugs into a USB
port. USB flash drives range in sizes from 16 MB to 512 MB.
USB Flash Drive

Lesson 2-22: Formatting a Disk

Quick (erase) Figure 2-50
Erases all information from
the disk, but doesn't scan the Most floppy disks and
disk for damaged areas. Only hard drives come pre-
works on disks that have
previously been formatted. formatted
Enable Compression
Figure 2-51
Formats the volume so that Formatting a floppy disk in
folders and files on it are
compressed. Compression is Microsoft Windows XP.
supported only on NTFS
drives.
Create an MS-DOS startup

disk
If ou re having problems ith
your computer, use a startup
disk to help remedy your
Figure 2-50 problems.
Figure 2-51
Floppy disks must be formatted before you can use them. Fortunately, today most floppy
disks you can buy come pre-f ma ed, d n ha e d i elf. When format
a disk, you erase everything on it and prepare it so that it can be read and used by the
c m e e a ing em. Ac all , can f ma m age devices, such as a hard
di k and Zi di k , nl ll an be e a ca ef l ab f ma ing he e de ice , a
he e a l m e inf ma i n ha ill be e a ed hen f ma hem.
I ea f ma a fl di k. He e he ced e f f matting a floppy disk in
Windows XP
1. Click the Start button and select My Computer.

The M C m e ind ill di la c m e ai age de ice .
2. Right-click the drive containing the floppy disk you want to format Quick Reference
(usually A:), and select Format from the shortcut menu.
Formatting a Disk:
The Format dialog box appears. There are several options you can specify when
formatting a floppy disk see Figure 2-51 to see what they are. Prepares it for use, so
that it can be read and
3. Click Start.
used b the computer s
The floppy drive will whir as it formats the floppy disk. Formatting a floppy disk operating system.
usually takes about a minute, formatting a hard disk takes a long time over an hour if
Formatting a disk erases
you have a slow computer and large hard disk.
everything on it.
76 Computer Basics
Chapter Two Review
Lesson Summary
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is the computer s main chip. It calculates and processes
information.
CPU speed is measured in megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz).
Common CPUs include: Intel Pentium III, Intel Pentium 4, Intel Celeron, AMD Athlon, AMD Duron.
Memory
Computers use the binary system, where on is represented by a one (1) and off is represented by a
zero (0).
A Bit is the smallest memory unit. Bit stands for binary digit.
Eight bits make one Byte. A byte equals one character (letter, number, or symbol).
1,024 bytes make one Kilobyte (K or KB) which is equivalent to a one-page, double-spaced letter.
1,048,576 bytes make one Megabyte (M or MB) which is equivalent to a novel.
1,073,741,824 bytes make one Gigabyte (G or GB) which is equivalent to an encyclopedia set.
1,099, 511,627,776 bytes make one Terabyte (T or TB) which is equivalent to a small bookstore.
RAM and ROM

RAM: Stands for Random Access Memor . This is the computer s main memor , hich is used to
process information. You can read from and write to RAM. RAM is volatile, and any data
disappears when you shut off the computer.
ROM: Stands for Read Only Memor . This is the computer s lo -level memory, which is used to
perform its most basic functions. You can read from ROM but ou can t rite to it.
Mouse
A mouse acts as a handheld pointing device and controls the actions of that blinking item on your
computer screen known as a cursor.
Keyboard
A keyboard lets you enter information and commands into a computer.
Digital Cameras and Web Cams

A digital camera lets you take pictures and transfer them to a computer.

The quality, or resolution of the pictures a digital camera can take is measured in megapixels, or
millions of pixels (dots). The more pixels, the crisper the image will appear when it is printed.
Other Input Devices

Other input devices include touch pads, AccuPoint® pointing devices, track balls, light pens.
scanners, joysticks, and microphones.
Monitors
A CRT Monitor is an older type of monitor that looks like a television screen.
A Flat Panel LCD Monitor is a newer type of monitor that is thin, lightweight and somewhat
expensive.
The size of a monitor is measured diagonally across the screen. Average monitor sizes range from
15-inches to 21-inches.
The monitor refresh rate determines how quickly the monitor redraws, or updates, the image on
the screen. Most monitors have a refresh rate of 72MHz or better.
A screen saver is a moving picture that appears on our computer screen hen ou don t use
your computer for a while.
Graphics Cards
Screen Resolution determines how much information can fit on the computer screen at once.
Common screen resolutions include 800 by 600 and 1,024 by 768.
Color Depth is the number of colors that are displayed on the screen at once. Common color
depths include 16-bit and 24-bit color.
Video Cards have their own memory and processor. Generally speaking, the more memory a
video card has the higher the resolution and color depth it can display.
Printer Basics
InkJet and Laser printers are the most common printer types.
Printer resolution determines the quality of the images a printer can produce. Printer resolution is
measured in dots per inch (dpi).
A printer s speed determines ho quickl it can print pages.
Printers get their ink from expensive cartridges (InkJet printers) and toners (laser printers).
Many printers have their own memory, which is required for printing more complex images.
A print spooler or buffer temporarily stores large print jobs and releases them when the printer is
able to actually print them.
Types of Printers
Print types include InkJet, laser and color laser, multifunction, dot matrix, and plotters.
Sound and Speakers

A sound card lets a computer digitally play and record sounds.
78 Computer Basics
Modems
A standard modem transmits information over standard phone lines to other computers and has a
maximum speed of 56K bps.
A broadband or digital modem is much faster than a standard modem, with speeds up to 6,000
Kbps. Broadband modems include ISDN, DSL, and Cable.
Input/Output Devices
Some computer devices have both input and output functions. Examples include touch screen
monitors and multifunction printers.
Hard Drive
A hard drive is a computer s main storage device, usuall labeled C.
Modern hard drives can store anywhere from 20GB to 250GB of information.
Average access time is how fast a hard drive can find information.
Hard drives are connected to a computer through either an IDE or SCSI interface.
Hard Drive Maintenance

Hard Drive Repair and Fragmentation: Over time, small errors and fragmentation can degrade
the performance of a hard drive. These problems can be corrected by a hard drive utility program.
Hard Drive Backups: Should be performed to give you an extra copy of your files if your hard
drive becomes damaged.
Virus Protection: Software should be installed on every computer to protect against malicious
computer viruses.
Compression: Increases the space on a hard drive by compressing, or squeezing together, its
files.
CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM: Stands for Compact Disc-Read Only Memory. A CD-ROM drive lets you install
programs, run CD-ROM based programs, and play audio CDs. A CD-ROM holds about 650MB of
information.
CD-R: Stands for Compact Disc-Recordable. Lets you permanently write or burn information.
CD-RW: Stands for Compact Disc-ReWritable. Can be written to and modified many times.
DVD Drive
DVD: Stands for Digital Versatile Disc. A DVD disc looks like a CD-ROM, but can store much more
information.
Recordable and ReWritable DVDs: There are several competing, non-compatible formats out
there, including DVD-R /DVD-RW and DVD+R/ DVD+RW.
Floppy Drive
Floppy disks are slow and can only store 1.44MB. They are all but obsolete.

Zip and Jaz Drives

Zip and Jaz drives are removable storage devices that have features of both floppy and hard disks.
Other Storage Devices

Other storage devices include tape drives, LS-120 Super drives, flash cards, and USB flash drives.
Formatting a Disk
Formatting a disk prepares it for use, so that it can be read b the computer s operating s stem.
Formatting a disk erases everything on it.
Quiz
1. The speed of a CPU is measured in what?
A. Megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz)
B. Horsepower
C. Bits per second (Bps)
D. Lux
2. How much information can be stored in a kilobyte?

A. As much as a one page letter.
B. As much as a novel.
C. As much as an encyclopedia set.
D. As much as a bookstore.
3. Generally speaking, which of the following storage devices can hold the
most information?
A. A hard disk
B. A Zip disk
C. A CD-ROM
D. A DVD
4. W a a a a a a ?
A. RAM
B. ROM
C. RUM
D. Flash
5. Y a a a a ROM. (T Fa ?)
6. Which of the following modems is the slowest?

A. ISDN
B. DSL
C. Cable
D. Standard
80 Computer Basics
7. Which of the following can you read and write to many times?
A. CD-ROM
B. CD-R
C. CD-RW
D. DVD-ROM
Quiz Answers
1. A. The speed of the CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is measured in megahertz
(MHz) and gigahertz (GHz).
2. A. A kilobyte holds 1,024 characters; about as much information as a single page
letter.
3. A. A hard disk will generally have more storage capacity than a Zip disk, CD-ROM,
or even DVD.
4. A. RAM or Random Access Memory.
5. False. A computer can read from ROM but not write to it.
6. D. A standard modem is much slower than the other digital modems.
7. C. You can read and write to a CD-RW, or CD ReWritable disc many times.

Chapter Three:
Understanding
Software
Learn about operating systems
computers.
Learn about application software
Learn about word processors, spreadsheets, databases, and more
Learn about programming
This chapter is all about software. Software is a computer program that tells computer
hardware how to operate. Software is even more diverse than hardware there are thousands
and thousands of software programs out there. Software ranges from the Windows XP
operating system that manages your computer, to the word processor you use to print letters,
to the Web browser you use to peruse the Internet.
This chapter will give you an incredibly broad overview of the various types of software out
he e. We ll e lain ha an e a ing em d e and ide a ick hi f ai
e a ing em . Ne e ll ake a ick f he m la e f g am
he e, f m d ce da aba e . Finall e ll ake a glance a me f he m e
common programming languages that are used to write software.
82 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-1: Understanding

Graphical User Interfaces
Figure 3-52 Microsoft(R) MS-DOS
(C)Copyright Microsoft Corp
The procedure for deleting
a file in a text-based C:\>DEL LETTER.DOC
operating system.
Figure 3-53
The procedure for deleting
a file in a GUI-based
operating system. Which
is easier?
Originally, the information on a computer screen was strictly text, and that text was
manipulated using a keyboard. Then computers started using graphical images on the screen
to represent a program or file. Those images are called icons. Along with the introduction of
icons came the development of graphical user interfaces (GUIs). GUIs allow computer users
to point at pictures and icons and then click the icon to manipulate that program or file, thus
the phrase point and click. Obviously, the mouse is a manifestation of this point-and-click
mentality because the mouse controls the onscreen cursor.
Graphical user
interfaces (GUIs) Figure 3-52 and Figure 3-53 make a good illustration of how much easier a GUI makes it to
allow computer users do things, like delete a file. The following table describes some of the most common icons
to point and click. ll ee in he Wind XP GUI.
Table 3-1: Thing Yo ll See in he Windo XP GUI

Object Object
You use the arrow or pointer to point and The Recycle Bin stores your deleted files.
click at things.
Quick Reference
A Graphical User Click the Start button to access Click the Close button to close the current
Interface, or GUI, makes the programs on a computer. window or program.
computers easier to
Double-click My Computer to access Click the Minimize button to temporarily
operate by using pictures the drives and files on a computer. hide a window or program.
and icons to represent
files and programs. Double-click the Hard Drive to access Click the Maximize button to expand a
the hard drive s folders and files. window or program to fill the entire screen.
Double-click the CD-ROM Drive to play A thumbnail displays a tiny preview of a
or run the contents of the CD-ROM. digital picture or photograph.
Folders hold files and subfolders, just
like a filing cabinet.

Chapter Three: Understanding Software 83
Lesson 3-2: Types of Software

Figure 3-54
Microsoft Windows is an
operating system.
Figure 3-55
Microsoft Excel is an
application program.
Figure 3-56
Not again! Software
manufacturers release
Figure 3-54
new versions of their
software regularly to add
features and fix bugs (and
line their pockets).
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-55
Quick Reference
Before we delve into the world of software we need to ask and address a few basic questions:
What is an operating system? An Operating System:
An operating system is a software program that loads automatically and controls just Loads automatically and
about everything on your computer. There are a number of operating systems out there, controls just about
including MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows XP. everything on your
What is an application program? computer.
An application program helps you accomplish a certain task, such as writing a letter, An Application Program:
browsing the Internet, or playing a game. Examples include word-processing programs,
Helps you accomplish a
spreadsheets, databases, and games.
certain task, such as
Why are new versions of software released year after year? writing a letter, browsing
Software manufacturers will tell you need a new version of their program because it has the Internet, or playing a
ne fea e and fe e b g . O he e le ill ell i he f a e man fac e game.
can continue to make money year after year. Each software release is given a new name
or number, such as Windows 95, Windows 98, to help distinguish the software from older New Software Versions
versions. and Releases:
Come out periodically that
G i ? G ea ! Le c n in e in he ld f c m e f a e.
add new features to a
program and make its
manufacturers more
money.
84 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-3: Operating Systems

Figure 3-57
MS-DOS is a text-based
operating system from the
Stone Age.
Figure 3-58
Introducing the Start
menu! Microsoft Windows
95 was a very popular
operating system that
features long file names,
better performance, and a Figure 3-57 Figure 3-58
easy-to-use interface.
An operating system is a software program that loads automatically and controls just about
e e hing n c m e . He e ha an e ating system does:
C Y C Ha a
Wind c n l he diffe en de ice f c m e em. I ha make your
printer print, what makes graphics and text appear on your monitor, and what makes your
mouse point and click.
R Y C P a
An operating system is what runs all your programs. Without an operating system, your
word processor, Web br e (In e ne ), and game ldn k. An e a ing em
lets your programs talk to your hardware, so, for example, your word processor can print
things to the printer.
C:\> Organizes Files
A command prompt is An e a ing em e inf ma i n in file and f lde n c m e l cal di k,
where you type just like you store files and folders in a filing cabinet.
commands in MS-DOS. An operating system is like an orchestra conductor who makes sure all the parts of your
computer your hardware and programs work together. Operating systems have been
around for a long time he e a b ief hi f he a i e a ing em he e:
Table 3-2: Types of Operating Systems

Operating System Released Description
MS-DOS 1980 MS-DOS stands for Microsoft Disk Operating System.
MS-DOS was one of the earliest PC operating systems
that displayed boring lines of text on the screen instead
of icons and pictures. You performed tasks in MS-DOS
by typing text commands. MS-DOS file names could
only be eight characters long.
Windows 3.1 1992 Windows 3.1 was the first successful operating system
for the PC that featured a GUI (Graphical User
Interface) that used easy to use pictures instead of hard-
to-remember MS-DOS commands. Technically
speaking, Windows 3.1 was not a true operating system,
since it still required MS-DOS to operate.

Operating System Released Description

Windows 95 1995 The incredibly successful successor to Windows 3.1,
Windows 95 was a true operating system (no more
MS-DOS). It featured long file names, better
performance, and a greatly improved interface.
Windows 98 1998 Very similar with Windows 95, Windows 98 included
several new and improved features. More importantly,
Windows 98 came with support for many of the new
hardware devices out there.
Windows ME 2000 Windows ME was the successor to Windows 98. ME
stands for Millennium Edition or Mistake Eternal,
depending on who you talk to. Windows ME was very
similar to Windows 95 and 98 but it included new
multimedia features, new utilities and lots of new bugs.
Windows NT 1993 Windows NT (stands for New Technology) was a
powerful 32-bit operating system that was faster, more
secure, and much more stable than Windows 95 or 98.
Windows NT was designed for use in large companies
where stability and security were especially important.
Windows 2000 2000 Windows 2000 was the successor to Windows NT.
Windows 2000 includes the best features of Windows
98 (easy Plug and Play hardware installation) and
Windows NT (security and stability). Windows 2000 is
still widely used in many businesses.
Windows XP Home 2001 Windows XP (stands for eXPerience huh?) Home is
designed for home and consumer computing and is the
successor to Windows ME. Windows XP has the same
technolog found in Windo s NT and 2000, so it s much
more stable than earlier versions of Windows.
Windows XP Professional 2001 Windows XP Professional is the business edition of Quick Reference
Windows and is the successor to Windows NT and
Windows 2000. A O e ai gS e
Windows CE / Pocket PC Varies Windows CE (stands for Consumer Electronics) is the Loads automatically and
operating system made by Microsoft used to power controls just about
handheld computers or PDAs (Personal Data everything on your
Assistants). computer.
Palm OS® Varies The Palm OS is another operating system that can be
found on handheld computers or PDAs.
UNIX Varies UNIX is an older, very powerful operating system that
can run on a computer, mainframe, or network. UNIX
features great performance, security, and reliability.
Linux Varies Linux is a newer UNIX-base operating system that is
available for FREE on the Internet. Linux is becoming a
popular alternative to Microsoft Windows.
Mac OS X 2001 Mac OS X is the latest operating system for Macintosh
computers.
86 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-4: Word Processing

Figure 3-59
A word processor lets you
write letters, resumes, and
much, much more.
Figure 3-59
Perhaps the most widely used and recognized computer application, word processing software
lets you create letters, reports, and many other documents on a computer.
Create Letters and Documents
Whe he i a 500 age eam mance n el a ick hank-you note to your
neighbor, a word processor makes writing things easier. Best of all, a word processor lets
you change, or edit, the text in a document before it appears on paper. You can easily add,
delete, or rearrange the text in a word processing document. Most word processors also
allow you to check your documents for spelling and grammar errors.
Microsoft Word is the Format Text
orld s most pop lar Most word processors can make the text in your documents look pretty e en if ea
word processing terrible writer. For example, you can use various fonts, or typefaces, create bulleted or
software program. numbered lists, and change the alignment of text on the page.
Create Tables
Tables are great: they are ranked right up there with the spell checker as one of the neatest
word processing features. A table neatly arranges text and data in a grid, organized by
columns and rows.
Quick Reference Add Images
A word processor is a Most word processors let you insert pictures and images to create all kinds of neat
program that lets you documents: newsletters, greeting cards, pamphlets, and more.
create letters and Perform Mail Merges
documents. Mail merge letters are used to send the same or similar documents to many different
e le a nce. Since he c n ain he eci ien name, add e , and he inf mation,
mail merge letters feel more personal just like a typical sweepstake letter: If you have
the winning number, Bob Boyarksi, You are the winner of $10 Million Dollars!

Lesson 3-5: Spreadsheets

Figure 3-60
A spreadsheet program is
useful for calculating and
presenting information
even if it s not hat ou
ant to see
Figure 3-60
Spreadsheet programs are super-powered calculators. Have you ever found yourself using a
calculator to add together more than 5 or 6 numbers? If so, you probably could be using a
spreadsheet program to make working with numbers faster, easier, and more accurate. You
can also analyze data and make it into charts with a spreadsheet.
Perform Calculations
A spreadsheet can add various cells, perform powerful formulas, and calculate and
analyze information. The entire spreadsheet is updated and recalculated every time you
change a value. That way you can change one number to see how it affects everything
else. Microsoft Excel is the
Manage and Organize Information orld s most pop lar
Spreadsheets neatly arrange values in a grid, organized by columns and rows. You can spreadsheet software
use a spreadsheet to present information in a professional and easy-to-read format. You program.
can also use a spreadsheet to store large collections of data, such as mailing and product
lists.
Format and Present Information Quick Reference
You can enhance the appearance of all those numbers by using various fonts, or A spreadsheet is a
typefaces, borders, shading, and more. program that organizes,
Create Charts calculates, and presents
Like he a ing a ic e i h a h and d , cha a e f en better at numbers.
presenting information than hard-to-read numbers in a spreadsheet. A chart illustrates
data, relationships, or trends graphically.
88 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-6: Databases

Figure 3-61 Field Names
A name that
A database stores and identifies the
information in a
manages information field.
related to a particular
subject or purpose. Field
A specific type of
information, such
as the last names
of your
employees.
Record
A collection of
information about
one person or
thing, such as the
name and address
Figure 3-60 of one employee.
In its simplest form, a database is a collection of information that is organized into a list.
Whenever you make a list of information, such as names, addresses, products, or invoices,
a e, in fac , c ea ing a da aba e. Technicall eaking, d n e en ha e to use a
database program to create a database.
A database program, however, is much more powerful than a simple list you keep on paper. A
database program lets you:
Store Information
A database stores lists of information that are related to a particular subject or purpose. A
Microsoft Access is
da aba e e e nal inf ma i n, ch a a li f a n Mild ed h me eci e ,
the orld s most business information, such as a list of hundreds of thousands of customers. A database
popular database also makes it easy to add, update, organize, and delete information.
software program.
Find Information
You can easily and instantly locate information stored in a database. For example, you
can find all he c me i h he la name J hn n all he c me s who live in
the 55417 Zip code and are older than 65.
Analyze and Print Information
You can perform calculations on information in a database. For example, you could
calculate what percentage of your total sales comes from the state of Texas. You can also
present information in a professional-looking printed report.
Manage Information
Databases make it easy to work with and manage huge amounts of information. For
example, with a few keystrokes you can change the area code for hundreds of customers
in the (612) area code to a new (817) area code.
Share Information
Most database programs allow more than one user to view and work with the same
information at once. Such databases are called multi-user databases.

Databases usually consist of several parts. The table on this page identifies the main
components of a database.
Table 3-3: Database Objects

Object Description
Tables store a database s data in ro s (records) and columns (fields). For
example, one table could store a list of customers and their addresses while
Tables another table could store the customers orders. A database must al a s
contain at least one table where it can store information all the other database
objects are optional.
Queries ask a question about data stored in a table. For example, a query might
Queries ask Access to display only customers who are from Texas.
Forms are custom screens that provide an easy way to enter and view data in a
Forms table or query.
Reports present data from a table or query in a printed format.
Reports
Programming codes help you perform routine tasks by automating them into a
Codes single command.
Quick Reference
A database program
stores, manages, and
organizes lists of
information.
90 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-7: Presentation Software

Figure 3-62
Even if your presentation
stinks, a presentation
program can at least make
it look pretty.
Figure 3-62
A presentation program turns your ideas into professional, convincing presentations, or slide
h . If e e e ed an e head jec , fli cha , e en a black b a d, ll l e
presentation software. A presentation program lets you create slides that include text,
graphics, charts, and even digital movies. Once you have created a presentation, you can
Microsoft PowerPoint display it as an electronic slide show on any computer.
is the orld s most
Create Professional Presentations
popular presentation
The e eall a n m ch he m ie Star Wars I: Attack of the Clones, but it sure
software program.
looked impressive. Presentation software can do the same thing for presentations, making
even the dullest speech look more professional.
Add Drawings, Charts, and Illustrations
Presentations with pictures, graphics, and visuals are much more compelling and
effective at conveying messages than ones that contain only boring text. A presentation
Quick Reference software application like Microsoft PowerPoint makes it easy to add pictures and
drawings to your slides, making them look as though you hired a professional graphic
A presentation software design company to create them.
program is used to
create professional, Outline What You Want to Say
convincing presentations, If you think way back to your high school speech class, you might remember that you
or slide shows. learned to organize a presentation by writing down its major points in an outline (if only
some public speakers could remember this). Most presentation software has built-in
outlining tools to help you organize your presentation. Just remember to stick to that
outline during your presentation!

Lesson 3-8: Accounting

Figure 3-63
Accounting software, like
Intuit s Quicken or
QuickBooks (shown
below) can help you pay
bills, balance your bank
account, and even
perform payroll.
Figure 3-63
Personal finance and accounting software keep track of your personal or business finances. A
personal finance program can show you what your current checking, savings, or credit card
balance a e, he e e ending money, and will even help you reconcile your QuickBooks is a very
account when you get a bank statement. Business accounting programs go a step further popular accounting
they will create invoices, keep track of your receivables and payables, and even do payroll. software program for
Once you use a personal financing program for your home finances or an accounting program small businesses.
f b ine , ll ne e kn h e e g al ng i h ne.
Balance Your Checkbook and Manage Finances
Accounting software automatically keeps a running balance of your bank accounts if
emembe en e check and de i . If d n , man acc n g am
can download your banking statements.
Write Checks and Pay Bills
You can purchase s ecial check ha in n c m e in e a e Quick Reference
time and present a more professional image.
Accounting software
Create Invoices helps manage personal
If you run a business, an account program can print invoices and keep track of who owes and/or business finances
you money. and balance accounts.
Perform Payroll
Many accounting programs have a payroll module, which deducts, and tracks Social
Security, Medicare, and state and federal employee taxes.
Bank Online
Online banking lets you view your current checking and savings balances, pay bills, and
even accept online credit card payments.
92 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-9: Web Browsing

Figure 3-64
A Web browser lets you
view Web pages on the
Internet.
Figure 3-64
Web addresses and pages are everywhere on television advertisements, in magazine and
newspaper articles, and even on business cards. Together, these Web pages make up what is
know as the World Wide Web (WWW) or Web for short. To view a Web age ll need a
piece of software called a Web browser. L ckil n need b a Web b e , ince
it comes standard on most computers. In fact, Microsoft has spent a considerable amount of
money and time in court determining that Windows is actually a Web browser.
Browse and View Web Pages
Web pages are written in a simple language called HTML, which stands for Hypertext
Markup Language. A Web browser converts the HTML in a Web page into a readable
format and displays that information on your computer screen.
Find Information
You can use a search engine to find just about anything on the World Wide Web. A search
engine catalogs the billions of Web pages on the Internet so that you can find information
on the topics that interest you. Google and Yahoo are two of the most popular search
engines out there.
Quick Reference
Download Files
A Web browser allows The Internet is filled with files and programs that you can download, or save to your
users to view Web pages computer. You can download images and pictures, programs, even MP3 files that you can
on the Internet. listen to.
Shop
You can spend lots of money on the World Wide Web. Anything that you can buy in a
store you can probably buy on the Internet. People use the Internet to shop for books,
computers, clothes, and even cars.

Lesson 3-10: Web Authoring

Figure 3-65
Web Authoring software
can help you create
spectacular Web pages,
like the newsletter shown
here.
Figure 3-65
A few years ago, only the brainy computer types knew how to write their own Web pages.
Today Web authoring programs make it easy for even a novice to get their own Web site up
on the Internet for the whole world to see. Macromedia
Create Web Pages Dreamweaver is a very
All those pretty Web pages you visit on the Internet are written in a simple language popular Web authoring
called HTML (stand f H e Te Ma k Lang age). I ac all possible to create a software program.
Web page by writing it directly in HTML using a simple text editor or word processor,
b m e le e Web A h ing f a e beca e i e f l and ea e.
Insert Images
Web Authoring software makes it easy to add pictures and graphics to a Web page,
he he i a fe i nal l g f a c a e Web i e a fake h g a h f an
online dating service.
Quick Reference
Add Hyperlinks
You can easily add hyperlinks to a Web page that point to other sites of interest on the A Web Authoring
Internet. program lets users
create Web pages in
Publish Your Web Pages to the Internet HTML that they can then
A Web i e i n an g d if e le can ee i . M Web A h ing g am ha e l publish to the Internet.
to help you upload, or save your Web pages on to the Internet.
94 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-11: Programming

Languages
Figure 3-66
Microsoft Visual Basic lets
users create programs
using a graphical
programming environment
and painting metaphor.
Figure 3-66
All software programs, from Microsoft Windows XP to Word 2000 are written in a
programming language. A programming language is a vocabulary and set of grammatical
rules for instructing a computer to perform specific tasks.
Computers can only understand special machine languages, which consist almost entirely of
numbers. Humans, however, can nde and he e h ge e ie f n mbe , he e high-
level programming languages, such as C++ and Java to write software programs and then
translate or compile them into machine language.
Every language has its strengths and weaknesses. For example, FORTRAN is a good
lang age f ce ing n mbe , b i n ell i ed f la ge g am . C++ ha
powerful object-oriented features, but it is complex and difficult to learn. There are literally
hundreds, if not thousands, of programming languages out there. The following table briefly
describes some of the more common programming languages you might overhear computer
nerds discussing.
Table 3-4: Common Programming Languages

Language Description
The lowest-level programming language, machine languages can be read by
Machine Language computers, but are almost impossible for humans to use because they consist
entirely of numbers.
Assembly languages have the same structure and set of commands as
Assembly Language machine languages, but they enable a programmer to use names instead of
numbers when writing code.

Language Description
SQL, or Structured Query Language, is a standardized language for
SQL
requesting information from a database.
Acronym for Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code, BASIC is one
BASIC of the earliest and simplest high-level programming languages and was taught
by educators to students during the 1970s and 80s.
A high-level programming language developed in the mid-1970s, it is still one
of the most popular programming languages in use today. C is similar
C, C++
assembly language and allows programmers to write very efficient code. C++
adds many object-oriented features to its predecessor, C.
COBOL, or Common Business Oriented Language, was developed back in the
COBOL
late 1950s, and despite its age is still used on many mainframe computers.
High-Level
Acronym for formula translator, FORTRAN is the oldest high-level

FORTRAN programming language. Despite its age, FORTRAN is still popular for scientific
applications that require extensive mathematical computations.
An object-oriented language developed by Sun Microsystems, similar to C++,
but simplified to eliminate language features that cause common programming
Object-Oriented
Java errors. Compiled Java code can run on most computers, including UNIX,
Macintosh, and Windows. Small Java applications called applets can be
downloaded from the Internet and run on your computer.
Based on BASIC, Microsoft Visual Basic allows users to create programs with
Visual a graphical programming environment and painting metaphor. Visual Basic, or
Basic VB, is sometimes called an event-driven language because each object can
react to different events such as a mouse click.
Active Server Pages and Java Server Pages are programming languages that
ASP, JSP
generate dynamic HTML code and send it back to the browser.
HTML, or HyperText Markup Language, is the authoring language used to
HTML create documents, or Web pages on the World Wide Web. HTML defines the
structure and layout of a Web document by using tags and attributes.
Web Development
A scripting language that enables Web authors to design interactive sites.

JavaScript Javascript can interact with HTML source code, enabling Web authors to spice
up their sites with dynamic content.
Short for Practical Extraction and Report Language, Perl is a programming
Perl
language designed for processing text.
An open source, server-side, HTML embedded scripting language used to
PHP Quick Reference
create dynamic Web pages.
A programming
Short for Extensible Markup Language, XML allows designers to create their language is a vocabulary
XML own customized tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, and and set of grammatical
interpretation of data between applications and between organizations. rules for instructing a
computer to perform
specific tasks.
96 Computer Basics
Lesson 3-12: Systems

Development
Figure 3-67
Define Requirements
Possible steps in
developing a computer
system.
Feasibility Study
System Design and Cost

Analysis
Programming/
Product Development
Testing
Installation
Training
Monitoring and Maintenance
Figure 3-67
C m e g am and em d n a ea f hin ai ; he e a e a series of procedures

that are normally followed. The steps and procedures for system development are very
imila , he he i a mall c m an e lacing i em l ee ime cl ck i h a c m e i ed
attendance system or a huge software company releasing a new software program.
Table 3-5: Common Stages in System Development

Stage Description
Define Requirements Determine the purpose of the system, all inputs, outputs, and control
mechanisms.

Stage Description
Feasibility Study Determine if the system is economically and technically practical.
System Design and Create an action plan or blueprint for creating the system, and determine
Cost how much the system will cost.
Programming/ Write the programs necessary for the system using a high-level
Product Development programming language. Purchase any hardware required by the system.
Testing Test the completed system using real data to identify and correct any bugs.
Implementation Install the completed system and put it to use.
Training Train users on how to use or operate the new system.
Monitoring and Problems usually arise soon after implementation that must be corrected.
Maintenance Computer systems often require upgrades and routine maintenance.
Quick Reference
Common Steps in
Systems Development:
1. Define Requirements
2. Feasibility Study
3. System Design and Cost
4. Programming/Product
Development
5. Testing
6. Implementation
7. Training
8. Monitoring and
Maintenance
98 Computer Basics
Chapter Three Review
Lesson Summary
Understanding Graphical User Interfaces
A Graphical User Interface, or GUI, makes computers easier to operate by using pictures and
icons to represent files and programs.
Types of Software
An operating system loads automatically and controls just about everything on your computer.
An application program helps you accomplish a certain task, such as writing a letter, browsing the
Internet, or playing a game.
New software versions and releases come out periodically that add new features to a program
and make the soft are manufacturers rich!
Operating Systems
An operating system loads automatically and controls just about everything on your computer.
Word Processing
A word processor is a program that lets you create letters and documents.
Spreadsheets
A spreadsheet is a program that organizes, calculates, and presents numbers.
Databases
A database program stores, manages, and organizes lists of information.
Presentation Software
A presentation software program is used to create professional, convincing presentations, or
slide shows.
Accounting
Accounting software helps manage personal and/or business finances and balance accounts.
Web Browsing
A Web browser allows users to view Web pages on the Internet.

Web Authoring
A Web Authoring program lets users create Web pages in HTML that they can then publish to the
Internet.
Programming Languages
A programming language is a vocabulary and set of grammatical rules for instructing a computer
to perform specific tasks.
Systems Development
Common Steps in Systems Development
1. Define Requirements
2. Feasibility Study
3. System Design and Cost
4. Programming/Product Development
5. Testing
6. Implementation
7. Training
8. Monitoring and Maintenance
Quiz
1. An operating system is built- a ROM-BIOS. (True or False?)
2. Which of the following is a text-based operating system?

A. Windows 95
B. Windows 2000
C. Windows CE
D. MS-DOS
3. Which of the following programs would be best suited for helping you
calculate a monthly budget?
A. A word processor
B. A spreadsheet
C. A database
D. COBOL
4. Which of the following programs would be best suited for storing a list of
customers and their orders?
A. A word processor
B. A spreadsheet
C. A database
D. COBOL
Quiz Answers
1. False. An operating system is software that the computer loads when it first starts up.
100 Computer Basics
2. D. MS-DOS is a text-based operating system.

3. B. A spreadsheet would be the program best suited to help you balance your budget.
4. C. A database would be best suited for storing a list of customers and their orders.

Chapter Four:
Information
Networks
Learn about networks
computers.
Learn the difference between a LAN and WAN
Learn the basics about the Internet
Learn what Intranets and Extranets are
Understand telephone networks used to connect to the Internet
This chapter will give you an incredibly brief look into the world of networking. A network is
several computers, printers, and other devices that are connected together. When you think of
a network, you probably think of how your computers are connected at work and ha
definitely one type of network. But did you know that the Internet itself is one vast network?
We ll c e he e ic and m e in hi cha e .
104 Computer Basics
Lesson 4-1: Introduction to

Networks
Figure 4-1
The parts of a network
(see Table 4-1: Network Shared files
Components for a Workstation
description of everything)
Figure 4-2
Network Interface
In a peer-to-peer network, Card (NIC)
everyone stores their files
on their own computer.
Anyone on the network
can access files stored on Cable Shared files Shared files
any other computer.
Workstation Workstation
Figure 4-3
Peer-To-Peer Network
In a client/server network, Hub
Figure 4-2
everyone stores his or her
files on a central computer
called a server. Everyone
on the network can access
the files stored on the Sever
Shared files
server.
Network Software
(Windows 95, 98, NT,
2000, XP and possibly
Novell Netware)
Figure 4-1 Workstation Workstation

Client/Server Network
Figure 4-3
So what are the benefits of networking? Plenty:

Share Information: Networks allow you to share files and programs. Before networks,
people had to save their files on floppy disks to exchange information. This wasted a lot
of time especially if the computers were located in opposite ends of the building!
Share Equipment: Computers connected to a network can share equipment to reduce
costs. For example, rather than buying a printer for each computer, everyone can share
A Local Area Network
one central network printer.
(LAN) connects
computers in the same
building or facility.

Chapter Four: Information Networks 105
Use Network Software: Software designed for networks lets people send and receive
electronic mail (e-mail) with other users on the network, schedule meetings with other
users on he ne k, and ha e da aba e . When eb ing he Web, e
actually using software designed for a network!
There are two basic types of networks:
Local Area Networks (LAN): A network that connects computers in the same
geographic area or building, using cables. Local Area Networks are what most people
think of when they think of a network and ha ha e ll be di c ing h gh
the chapter.
Wide Area Networks (WAN): A network that connects computers across a large
geographic area. The Internet is actually a huge Wide Area Network.
Local Area Networks (LANs) are subdivided into two types of network subcategories:
peer-to-peer and client/server, as shown in Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3:
Peer-to-Peer Network or Workgroup: In a peer-to-peer network, everyone stores
their files on their own computer, and anyone on the network can access files stored on
any he c m e . Beca e d n need an addi i nal f a e, ee -to-peer A Wide Area Network
networking is an inexpensive way to connect computers in a small office or home. The (WAN) connects
disadvantages of a peer-to- ee ne k a e ha i d e n ffe a m ch ec i a computers over wide
client/server networks, and it can be difficult to find files that are stored on many geographic areas. The
different computers. Both versions of Windows XP Home and Professional support Internet is an example
peer-to-peer networking. of a WAN.
Client/Server Network: In a client/server network, everyone stores their files on a
central computer called a server. Everyone on the network can access the files stored on
the server. Client/server networks are more secure, easier to administer, and much more
powerful than peer-to-peer networks. Tha h he a e ed c nnec c m e in
most businesses. The disadvantages of client/server networks are that they require
special, expensive software, such as Windows XP Server or NetWare, and they are more
complicated to install and configure than peer-to-peer networks. Only Windows XP Quick Reference
Professional supports client/server networking. LAN:
Figure 4-1 shows the basic parts in a network. The following table explains what they are: Stands for Local Area
Network and connects
computers in the same
Table 4-1: Network Components
geographic area or
Component Description building, using cables.
Network Interface A network interface card is a device that plugs into your computer and WAN:
Card (NIC) physically connects each computer to the network and allows your computer to
talk to other computers and devices on the network. Stands for Wide Area
Network and connects
Cables Cables are the wires that physically connect the computers, printers, and other computers across a large
equipment on a network. geographic area.
Hub A hub is a device where all the cables on a network connect, similar to a power Peer-to-Peer/Workgroup:
strip. Files and resources are
Network Operating Your operating system must provide networking capabilities. Windows XP and shared on every
Software Windows XP Professional have peer-to-peer networking capabilities. Windows computer. Easier to setup
XP Professional and NetWare have client/server capabilities. but very insecure.
Client/Server Network:
Files are stored on a
single central computer,
or server. More secure
and expensive.
106 Computer Basics
Lesson 4-2: The Internet

Figure 4-4
WWW
The Internet is the largest
network in the world,
consisting of millions of
computers, all over the
world, all connected
together. Headlines
Figure 4-5
Web pages are stored on
Amazon
Web servers computers
WWW
that are permanently
connected to the Internet.
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
The Internet is the largest computer network in the world. It consists of millions of computers
all over the planet, all connected to each other.
The Internet was born in the 1960s when the United States military worried that a nuclear
b mb c ld de i c m e em ( he e e en man f hem back hen). S i
placed several computers far apart from each other and connected them with some super-fast
telephone lines so that the computers could talk to each other. If a nuclear bomb blew up one
c m e , an he c m e c ld in an l ake e ; h , he c m e ne k ldn
go down. Years passed and other organizations, such as colleges and universities, started
connecting their computers to this growing network to share information.
Al h gh he In e ne ha been a nd a l ng ime, i a n n il he 1990 ha me ne
thought of a wonderful idea called the World Wide Web. Many people use the terms Internet
and World Wide Web or Web interchangeably, but in fact the terms are two separate but
related things. The Internet is a massive network of networks that connects millions of
computers to one another. A good analogy would be the cables that provide cable television.
The World Wide Web is simply one way to communicate and share information over the
Internet. Using our cable television analogy, the World Wide Web would simply be single
channel that is broadcast over the cable system.
The World Wide Web consists of millions of documents that are stored on hundreds of
thousands of computers that are always connected to the Internet. These documents are called
Web pages, and you can find Web pages on every subject imaginable from your local
newspaper to online catalogs to airline schedules, and much, much more.
Web pages are stored on Web servers. A Web server is a computer, not unlike your own
computer, only bigger and faster. There are hundreds of thousands of Web servers located all
over the world. Web servers are always connected to the Internet so that people can view their
Web pages 24 hours a day.
S ha can d nce e c nnec ed he In e ne ? Plen . Table 4-2: What Can I do
on the Internet? shows just a few of the many things there are to do on the Internet.

Table 4-2: What Can I do on the Internet?

Task Description
Send and Receive Exchanging electronic mail (or e-mail) is the most used and most popular
E-mail feature on the Internet. Just like regular paper mail, you can send and
receive e-mail with people around the world, as long as they have access
to a computer and the Internet. Unlike regular paper mail, e-mail is usually
delivered to its destination almost instantly.
Browse the World Wide The World Wide Web is what most people think of when they think of the
Web Internet although it s reall onl a part of the Internet. The World Wide
Web is an enormous collection of interconnected documents stored on
Web servers all over the world. The World Wide Web has information on
every subject imaginable.
Join online discussions Newsgroups are discussion groups on the Internet that you can join to read
with newsgroups and post messages to and from people with similar interests. There are
thousands of newsgroups on topics such as computers, education,
romance, hobbies, politics, religion, and more.
Chat with other online Chatting lets you communicate with people on the Internet instantly no
users matter how far away they are! Most chats are text-based, meaning you
have to type when you converse with people on the Internet. A growing
number of chats have voice and even video capabilities all without having
to pay long distance changes.
Download software You can download pictures, demo programs, patches and drivers for your
computer, and many other types of files and save them to your computer.
Listen to music and You can listen to sound on the Web, such as radio stations, or music by
watch videos your favorite artists.
Quick Reference
Internet:
computer network in the
world, connecting millions
of computers.
World Wide Web:
A way of accessing
information over the
Internet.
108 Computer Basics
Lesson 4-3: Intranets and

Extranets
Figure 4-6
An Intranet is a miniature
version of the Internet that
works within a company or
organization.
Figure 4-7
An Extranet is also like a
miniature version of the
Internet, but Extranets are Figure 4-6
accessible to authorized
users outside of a
company or organization.
Figure 4-7
An Intranet is a miniature version of the Internet that works within a company or

organization. Web sites on an Intranet look and act just like any other Web sites, but can only
be viewed by users within the company or organization. A firewall surrounds the Intranet and
fends off unauthorized access.
An Extranet is similar to an Intranet, but while an Intranet is generally only accessible to users
within same company or organization, an Extranet is accessible by authorized outside users.
Business partners use Extranets to share information.
Like the Internet itself, Intranets and Extranets are used to share information. Secure Intranets
are now the fastest-growing segment of the Internet because they are much less expensive to
build and manage than private networks based on proprietary protocols.

So what are the advantages of Intranets and Extranets? Both Intranets and Extranets can:
Share Information: Intranets and Extranets offer a very simple and inexpensive way to
make internal company documents, such as a phone directory, available to employees.
Connect Documents: Documents on an Intranet or Extranet can be connected by
hyperlinks, so users can easily jump from one related document to another.
Use Special Software: Some software can only be used on an Intranet or Extranet,
such as Web based e-mail programs.
Quick Reference
Intranet:
A miniature version of the
Internet that works on a
network within a company
or organization.
Extranet:
A miniature version of the
Internet that allows
access to authorized
outside users, such as
business partners.
110 Computer Basics
Lesson 4-4: Telephones and

Networks
Figure 4-8
An internal modem plugs
into an expansion slot
inside a computer. Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
An external modem plugs
into a serial port and sits
outside a computer.
Figure 4-10
Most laptops have a
built-in modem. Figure 4-9 Figure 4-10
A modem i a de ice ha an la e a c m e ne and e in a di ne , ha i

can transmit information over the phone lines to other modems. The speed in which a modem
can transmit and receive data is measured in bits per second (bps), or baud. For example, a
300-baud modem can transmit 300 bits per second. The most common way people use
modems is to connect to the Internet. By the way, modem stands for modulator-demodulator.
Modems come in two basic flavors:
Analog Modems: Computers store information digitally, while telephone lines transmit
conversations and sounds. An analog modem converts a c m e ne and e
tones than can then be transmitted over standard phone lines. Analog modems are limited
to speeds of 56Kbps.
Digital Modems: Use binary ones and zeros to transmit data like a computer. Digital
modems can transmit information much faster than analog modems. Digital modems are
often referred to as broadband modems.
Table 4-3: Modem Types and Speeds describes the most common analog and digital modems
out there.

Table 4-3: Modem Types and Speeds

Type Speed (in bps) Description
PSTN, PSDN 56K PSTN stands for Public Switched Telephone Network,
and is nothing more than your everyday, ordinary
telephone system based on copper wires. PSTN is often
Analog
referred to as POTS, or plain old telephone service.

PSDN stands for Public Switched Data Network and is
just another technical term for the telephone system in
use today.
ISDN 56K to 128K One of the older broadband connections. It s onl t ice
as fast as a traditional modem and pretty much obsolete.
Digital, Broadband
ADSL, DSL 256K to 8,000K ADSL modems take advantage of unused frequencies in
the phone line, such as a pause in conversation. DSL Quick Reference
modems are very fast; the problem is that you have to be
Analog Modem:
close to a phone company in order to get DSL service.
Converts a computer s
Cable 640K to 4,000K A cable modem is the fastest modem you can buy for ones and zeros to tones
home use. The problem is your cable company has to that can then be
offer cable Internet access in order to use it. transmitted over standard
phone lines. Analog
modems are limited to
speeds of 56Kbps.
Digital Modem:
Uses binary ones and
zeros to transmit data like
a computer. Digital
modems can transmit
information much faster
than analog modems.
PSTN, PSDN:
Ordinary, everyday
telephone network, limited
to 56Kbps.
ISDN:
An older broadband
connection, twice as fast
as a traditional modem at
128Kbps.
ASDL, DSL:
Fast digital connection
with speeds up to
8,000Kbps.
Cable:
Fast digital connection
with speeds up to
4,000Kbps.
112 Computer Basics
Chapter Four Review
Lesson Summary
Introduction to Networks
LAN: Stands for Local Area Network and connects computers in the same geographic area or
building, using cables.
WAN: Stands for Wide Area Network and connects computers across a large geographic area.
Peer-to-Peer/Workgroup: Files and resources are shared on every computer. Easier to setup but
very insecure.
Client/Server Network: Files are stored on a single central computer, or server. More secure and
expensive.
The Internet
Internet: The Internet is the largest computer network in the world and connects millions of
computers.
World Wide Web: A way of accessing information over the Internet.
Intranets and Extranets

Intranet: A miniature version of the Internet that works on a network within a company or
organization.
Extranet: A miniature version of the Internet that allows access to authorized outside users, such
as business partners.
Telephones and Networks

An analog modem converts a computer s ones and eros to tones that can then be transmitted
over standard phone lines. Analog modems are limited to speeds of 56Kbps.
A digital modem uses binary ones and zeros to transmit data like a computer. Digital modems can
transmit information much faster than analog modems.
PSTN, PSDN: Ordinary, everyday telephone network, limited to 56Kbps.
ISDN: An older broadband connection, twice as fast as a traditional modem at 128Kbps.
ASDL, DSL: Fast digital connection with speeds up to 8,000Kbps.
Cable: Fast digital connection with speeds up to 4,000Kbps.

1. A LAN connects computers in the same building or facility. (True or False?)
2. What does LAN stand for?

A. Linked Area Network
B. Lots of Anarchy and Nonsense
C. Local Area Network
D. Linked Applications Node
3. An Intranet is a miniature version of the Internet that allows access to

authorized outside users, such as business partners. (True or False?)
4. Which of the following modems is the slowest?

A. ISDN
B. DSL
C. Cable
D. Standard
Quiz Answers
1. True. A LAN connects computers in the same building or facility.
2. C. LAN stands for Local Area Network.
3. False. An Extranet is a miniature version of the Internet that allows access to
authorized outside users, such as business partners
4. D. A standard modem is much slower than the other digital modems.
Chapter Five:
Introduction to
Windows XP
Windows XP installed
Start and log on to Windows
on the computer.
Understand the Windows XP screen
Understand the new Windows XP interface
Use the mouse to: point, click, double-click, right-click, click,
and drag
Use the keyboard

Exit Windows and turn off the computer
Welcome Wind XP! If e ne Wind , c m e al ge he , e

a ing a he igh cha e . Thi cha e c e he ba e-b ne ba ic ab lea ning h
a c m e and l ad Wind . Y ll lea n h e a e he m e b clicking,
double-clicking, clicking and dragging, and right-clicking. Y ll al lea n ab
c m e ke b a d and ha h e c ic-l king ke a e ed f . Finall , ll lea n
how to exit Windows and shut down your computer.
Before we start, take a deep breath and relax. You may find this difficult to believe, but
c m e a en nea l a diffic l and c m lica ed a babl hink he a e. N ma e
ha e i e e ience i h c m e ha been, hi cha e a me e he m st
computer-illiterate person in the world and keeps everything as simple as possible. Actually,
e babl g ing find ha me f he le n in hi cha e a e a li le too easy.
When you come across something you already know how to do, go ahead and skip the lesson
( nle e in a cla m fc e then go ahead and show everyone what a computer
whiz you are!).
Read ? Did ake ha dee b ea h? Then n he age and le ge a ed!
118 Microsoft Windows XP
Lesson 5-1: Starting and Logging

On to Windows XP Home
Figure 5-1
The Welcome screen is
the default log in screen.
Figure 5-2
The Log On to Windows
dialog box appears if the To log in, click your user
Welcome screen has been account.
turned off.
Figure 5-1
Enter the account user name and

Quick Reference password.
If the account does not have a
To Log On To Windows XP password, leave the text box blank.
Home Using the Welcome
Screen:
Figure 5-2
Click your account user
name. Enter your account
password if prompted. After taking off your jacket and grabbing a cup of coffee, you probably begin your day by
turning on your computer and starting Windows. Windows XP should automatically start after
To Log On To Windows XP you turn on your computer. This lesson also explains what you need to do next...
Home Without the
Welcome Screen: The default log in screen is the Welcome screen, as shown in Figure 5-1.
1. Enter your user name and 1. Click your account user name.
password. If your account
If your account has a password, you will be prompted to enter it.
doesn t have a pass ord,
leave the text box blank. NOTE: If someone has turned off the Welcome screen, logging in will be a little
Or different, as shown in Figure 5-2.
2. Press <Enter> or click 2. E a a a .I a a a
OK. password, leave the text box blank.
Remember that when you enter your password, Windows will display a series
of ******s to protect your password from prying eyes.
3. Press <Enter> or click OK.
Windows logs in using your account settings.

Chapter Five: Introduction to Windows XP 119
Lesson 5-2: Starting and Logging

On to Windows XP Professional
Figure 5-3
The Welcome to Windows
dialog box.
Figure 5-4
The Welcome to Windows
dialog box.
Figure 5-3
Enter your user name and

password.
Specify the computer or domain

you want to log on to.
Click Options to display/hide the Log on
To list, which lets you specify which
Figure 5-4 network domain you want to log on to.
Logging on to a computer using Windows XP Professional is a little different because you are
Quick Reference
logging in to a network, not just a computer, so security needs to be tight.
The first screen is a defense against hackers or worms that might try to hack into your To Log On to Windows XP
c m e hile en ing i . Professional:
1. Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
1. Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>. <Delete>.
The Welcome to Windows dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 5-4. 2. Enter your user name and
password.
2. Enter your user name and password.
3. Make sure you are
Remember that when you enter your password Windows will display a series
logging in to the correct
of ******s to protect your password from prying eyes.
domain.
3. If necessary, click Options and click the Log on To list arrow to select 4. Press <Enter> or click
the domain name that you want to log on to. OK.
Thi e ing babl n e e change, b h ld be a a e ha i i e i ed
log in to the domain.
4. Press <Enter> or click OK.
P e !Y e l gged n Wind XP and a e ead ge back k.
Lesson 5-3: Understanding the

Windows XP Screen
Figure 5-5 Recycle
Bin
The major parts of the
Windows XP screen. More
items may appear on your
computer, depending on
how it is set up.
Desktop
Start System
button Tray Area
Quick Launch bar Taskbar

Figure 5-5
You might find the Windows screen a bit confusing and overwhelming the first time you see
it. Nothing on the screen appears familiar to you where do you even start? This lesson will
help you become familiar with the main Windows screen, known as the desktop. The e i n a
step-by-step exercise anywhere in this lesson all you have to do is look at Figure 5-5 and
then refer to Table 5-4: Major Parts of the Windows XP Screen, ee ha e e hing e
looking at means. And, most of all, relax! This lesson is only meant to help you get
acquainted with Windows d n ha e mem i e an hing.
NOTE: If e g ading Wind f m e i versions, you may be
i ed a he lack f ic n and fea e n he c een. D n be ala med:
My Documents, My Computer and other useful functions are still around,
he e j been m ed nde he S a b n.

Table 5-4: Major Parts of the Windows XP Screen

Item Description
Desktop This is the large background area of the Windows screen. You can customize the
desktop by adding shortcuts to your favorite programs, documents, and printers.
You can also change the appearance of the desktop to fit your mood and
personality.
Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin stores all the files you delete from your computer. You can use the
Rec cle Bin to retrieve files ou ve accidentall deleted. Create more disk space b
emptying the Recycle Bin.
Taskbar The Taskbar usually appears at the bottom of your screen and contains the famous
Start button, which you use to start your programs. Whenever you open a program,
document, or window, an icon for that program appears on the taskbar. This lets
you see which programs are currently running and allows you to easily switch
between them.
Start button The Start button lets you quickly open your programs and documents. You can also
use the Start button to find files and change the settings for Windows.
Quick Launch The Quick Launch bar gives you quick access to your most frequently used
bar applications. Internet Explorer, Outlook Express and the Windows desktop are
included in the Quick Launch bar by default.
D n if find me f he e hing c nf ing a fi they will make more sense in

he c ming le n , af e e actually had a chance to use them.
Lesson 5-4: A Look at the New

Windows XP Start Menu
Figure 5-6 The current user name
appears at the top of the The right side of the Start
The new Windows XP Start menu. menu gives you quick
Start menu. access to your documents,
files, and system settings.
You can also find three very
important icons here that
were found on the Desktop
in previous versions of
This area displays the
Windows:
programs you use
most often. If a My Documents
program doesn t Provides a convenient
appear here you can location to save your
find it under All files.
Programs.
My Computer
Displays all the
available drives on
your computer.
Lists all the programs
that are installed on My Network Places
your computer. Displays the network
locations available on
your computer.
Figure 5-6
Y e babl al ead n iced ha Wind XP S a men i d a icall diffe en han

the Start menu in earlier versions. All the icons that were formerly stored on the desktop, such
as My Computer and My Documents, are now on the Start menu, making it your single source
for launching applications, finding documents, and changing computer settings.
The new Windows XP Start menu takes a lot of getting used to e eciall if e familia
with the Start menu in pre i e i n f Wind . Once again, he e i n a e -by-step
exercise in this lesson all you have to do is look at Figure 5-6 and then refer to Table 5-5:
Items in the Windows XP Start Menu, to see what everything in the new Windows XP Start
menu does.
1. Click the Start button.

The Windows XP Start menu appears, as shown in Figure 5-6.
2. Keep the Start menu open and refer to Table 5-5: Items in the Windows XP
Start Menu a W XP S a .
The new Windows XP Start menu takes a lot of getting used to e eciall if e familia
with the Start menu used in earlier versi n f Wind .D n if j ca get
used to the new Windows XP Start menu i ea change back he cla ic S a men
ha e m e familia i h e ll c e ha e ic in an he cha e .

Table 5-5: Items in the Windows XP Start Menu

Item Description
Internet Explorer Opens your Internet browser.
Outlook Express Opens your default e-mail software.

Left Side
Gives you quick access to the programs you use most often. If a
Recently Used Programs program doesn t appear here ou ill have to look under All
Programs .
Gives you access to all the programs installed on your computer,
All Programs although you may have to wade through several submenus in
order to find the program ou re looking for.
Provides a convenient location to save your files. In previous
My Documents versions of Windows, My Documents was located on the Windows
Desktop.
Recent Documents Opens files you have recently worked on.
My Pictures Provides a convenient location to save your photos and pictures.
My Music Provides a convenient location to save your music files.
Gives you access to the drives, folders, and files on your

My Computer computer. In previous versions of Windows, My Computer was
located on the Windows Desktop.
Access the drives, folders, and printers on the network. In
My Network Places previous versions of Windows, My Network Places was located on
the Windows Desktop.
Right Side
Control Panel Opens the Windows Control Panel.
Connect To Connects to the Internet or a network.
Set Program Access Sets the default programs that handle certain activities on your
and Defaults computer.
Printers and Faxes Shows installed printers and faxes. Also provides access to
wizards that help install new printers and faxes.
Help and Support Gets help on how to use Windows.
Search Finds a file on your computer.
R Runs a program.
Log Off Logs off of Windows so that another user can log on to your
computer.
Shut Down Provides options for turning off or restarting your computer.
Lesson 5-5: Using the Mouse:

Pointing, Clicking and
Double-clicking
Figure 5-7
Click!
Clicking and double-
Click
clicking with the mouse. Press and
release the left
Figure 5-8 mouse button.
Click the Start button to
open the Windows XP Click!
Start menu. Click!
Figure 5-9 Double-click
Quickly press and
Double-click the Recycle release the left
mouse Click!
Bin icon to open it and button twice, in rapid
display its contents. succession.
Clicking and double- Close button

clicking
Click!with the
mouse.
Click!
Figure 5-8
Click the Start button
to open the Windows
XP Start menu.
Figure 5-9
Double-click the
Recycle Bin icon to
open it and display
its contents. Figure 5-9
Just like you control your television set using a remote control, you control Windows by using
the mouse and keyboard. A mouse is a palm-sized device that lets you point at, select, and
move objects on your computer screen. The mouse is linked to the pointer on your computer
screen when you move the mouse on your desk, the pointer moves on the computer screen.
Think of the mouse as an electronic extension of your hand. This lesson will show you how to
perform the two most basic mouse actions: clicking, and double-clicking.
1. Rest your hand on top of the mouse, then move the mouse and watch as
Mouse Pointer the arrow moves across the screen.
The arrow (also called the cursor or pointer) follows the mouse as you move it across
the desk or mouse pad.
Pointing is the most basic action you can do with the mouse. To point to something,
simply place the mouse pointer over it by moving the mouse.

2. Move the mouse pointer until the tip of the pointer is over the Start
button. Leave the pointer there for a few seconds.
The me age Click he e begin a ea b he in e af e e e al seconds. Start button
Clicking means pressing and releasing the left mouse button one time. The mouse
makes a clicking noise whenever you press and release one of its buttons, hence the
e m clicking . The ne e ill h h en he S a men b clicking
it.
3. Move the pointer over the Start button and then click the left mouse
button.
When you click the Start button, the Windows XP menu pops up, as shown in Figure
5-8. C ng a la i n ! Y e j made fi click!
NOTE: Most mice have two mouse buttons. Normally you will use the left mouse
button (unless someone has changed the mouse options and reversed the
buttons!). You can assume that you will use the left mouse button whenever
you see the words click or double-click. The right mouse button has its own
purpose and e ll di c i in an c ming le n.
You can close the Windows XP Start menu without selecting anything by clicking Recycle Bin
anywhere outside the menu.
4. Move the pointer anywhere outside the Windows XP Start menu and click
the left mouse button.
N ha e feeling c mf able i h in ing and clicking, e ll m e n
something a little more tricky: double-clicking. Just as it sounds, double-clicking
means pressing and releasing the mouse button twice in rapid succession. You will Close button
usually open an object, such as a file, folder, or program by double-clicking it.
5. Position your pointer over the Recycle Bin icon and double-click it with
your left mouse button. Quick Reference
The Recycle Bin opens to reveal its contents, as shown in Figure 5-9. To Point:
NOTE: A lot of people have problems the first time they try double-clicking. If your Move the mouse so that
double-click d e n eem k, i babl beca e e ei her not the pointer is over the
h lding he m e ead hile e d ble-clicking, e n d ble- object.
clicking fast enough. If you click the mouse button too hard, you may To Click:
acciden all lide he m e bef e e fini hed d ble-clicking and your
double-click n egi e . If e ce ain ha e h lding he m e Point to the object and
steady while you double-click, you can adjust the double-click speed in the press and release the
Wind C n l Panel, hich e ll alk ab m e in a la e le n. mouse button.
6. Close the Recycle Bin window by clicking its Close button, as shown in To Double-click:
Figure 5-9. Point to the object and
click the mouse button
Table 5-6: Things you can click and double-click twice in rapid succession.
Click when you want to: Double-click when you want to:
Select something. Open a file.
Open a menu. Open a folder.
Press a button on a toolbar or a control in a dialog Display the properties or settings for an object (in
box. certain programs).
Move to the area or field you want in a program or
dialog box.

Clicking and Dragging
Figure 5-10
Hold down the mouse
Clicking and dragging with button while you drag the
the mouse. mouse across your desk.
Figure 5-11
Opening a game of
Solitaire.
Drag
Figure 5-12 Place the pointer over an object and press
and hold down the left mouse button. While
The Solitaire game, which you are still holding down the button, move
comes with Windows. the mouse to where you want to place the
object and then release the mouse button.
Figure 5-10
Clicking and Figure 5-11

dragging with the
mouse. Close button
Figure 5-11
Opening a game of
Solitaire.
Figure 5-12
The Solitaire game,
which comes with
Windows.
Figure 5-12
You can move items around your computer screen by clicking and dragging them with the
mouse. To click and drag something: (1) Move the mouse pointer over the object you want to
move, then click and hold down the mouse button. (2) While you are still holding down the
mouse button, move the mouse until the pointer is over the place you want to put the object.
Then, (3) release the mouse button.
This will probably be the most entertaining lesson in the book, because your assignment is to
master clicking and dragging by playing a game of Solitaire! Microsoft included Solitaire
Start button
i h Wind hel e le im e hei m e kill . Y e probably noticed that a lot of
e le ne e ac icing he e kill i h S li ai e. He e h en S li ai e:

Remember the Start button is located in the bottom-left corner of your screen. The You may have trouble
Windows XP Start menu appears. mastering click and
2. Point to the word All Programs.
drag right a a . Don t
get discouraged; this
The All Programs menu pops out to the right. is a tricky task for
3. Point to the word Games. beginners. Just keep
Another menu, the Games menu, pops out, as shown in Figure 5-11. practicing and o ll
4. Click the word Solitaire. improve.
Y e finall he e! The S li ai e g am en , a h n in Figure 5-12.

5. Play a game of Solitaire and practice clicking and dragging the cards.
If d n kn h la S li ai e, can ill ac ice clicking and
dragging. Just point to a card, click and hold down the mouse button, and move the
card around the screen. Release the mouse button to drop the card. If you try dropping
a card in an invalid location, the card will be whisked back to its original pile.
6. Click the Close button located in the top right corner of the Solitaire
program to exit the pr a a .
The Solitaire program closes. Close button
Oka , he e ha e be m e hing click and d ag be ide ca d ! Al h gh e ll be
covering this stuff later on, Table 5-7: Things you can click and drag gives some examples of
when you can use click and drag.
Table 5-7: Things you can click and drag

You can do this: By dragging this:
Move a window to a new Drag the window by its title bar and drop it in a new location on the
location on the screen. screen.
Move a file to a new folder. Drag the file and drop it in the desired folder.
Change the size of a window. Drag the borders or corners of the window. Quick Reference
To Click and Drag:
Scroll a window to see Drag the scroll box (the little elevator) up or down the scroll bar and
1. Point to the object you
something located off- drop it in a new location.
want to click and drag and
screen.
click and hold down the
mouse button.
Move just about anything on Point to the object, click, and hold down the mouse button, drag the
c e c ee . object to a new place, and then release the mouse button. 2. While ou re still holding
down the mouse button,
drag the object to the
desired location on the
screen.
3. Release the mouse
button.

Right-clicking
Figure 5-13
Click!
Right-clicking with the
Right-click
mouse. Press and release
the right mouse
Figure 5-14 button.
The shortcut menu for the Figure 5-14
Recycle Bin.
Figure 5-15 Figure 5-13 The shortcut menu
for the Recycle Bin.
The shortcut menu for the Figure 5-15
clock.
Figure 5-16
The Local Disk (C:)
Properties dialog box.
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
You already know that the left mouse button is the primary mouse button, used for clicking
and double-clicking, and i he m e b n ill e e 95 e cen f he ime hen
k i h Wind . S ha he igh m e b n ed f ? Whene e right-
click something, it brings up a shortcut menu that lists everything you can do to the object.
Whene e e n e c i ab ha can d i h an bjec , in i and click
it with the right mouse button. A shortcut menu will appear with a list of commands related to
the object or area you right-clicked.
Right mouse button shortcut menus are a great way to give commands to Windows because
d n have to wade through several levels of menus to do something.
1. Move the pointer over the Recycle Bin icon and click the right mouse
button.
Recycle Bin
A shortcut menu appears with a list of commands related to the Recycle Bin, as shown
in Figure 5-14.
Right-click an object
to open a shortcut
menu of commands for
the object.

2. Point to and click the Empty Recycle Bin option on the shortcut menu
with the left mouse button.
You still use the left mouse button to select menu items, even if they are found in a
right-mouse button shortcut menu. A dialog box appears, asking you if you are sure
an dele e he c n en f he Rec cle Bin. Be e la i afe and
3. Click No with the left mouse button.
Next, you realize the clock displayed on the far right side of the taskbar is ten minutes
fa . Y can di la he cl ck e ie b igh -clicking the clock.
4. Move the pointer over the clock, located on the far right end of the
taskbar, and click the right mouse button.
Another shortcut menu appears, with commands related to the Windows clock, as Windows clock
shown in Figure 5-15.
Notice one of the commands listed on the shortcut menu is Adjust Date/Time. You
would selec hi men i em if needed adj he da e and/ ime. B d n
want to adjust the date or time, so you can move on to the next step and close the
shortcut menu without selecting anything.
5. Click anywhere outside the shortcut menu with the left mouse button.
The final bjec e ll igh -click in hi le n i he c m e L cal Di k d i e. T
get to the Local Disk Drive you have to open My Computer. My Computer
6. Click the Start button. Click My Computer from the menu.
The My Computer window opens, displaying the contents of your computer. You want
ee h m ch ace i lef n c m e l cal di k.
7. Right-click the Local Disk (C:) icon.
A shortcut menu appears, with a list of commands related to the local disk. Local Disk (C:)
8. Click the Properties option on the shortcut menu with the left mouse icon
button.
A dialog box appears, showing a graph that illustrates how much space is left on your
hard drive, as shown in Figure 5-16.
9. Click Cancel.
Quick Reference
The dialog box closes.
T Di la a Objec
Y e d ne! Y e lea ned all he ac i n can e f m i h he m e: in ing,
Shortcut Menu:
clicking, double-clicking, clicking and dragging, and right-clicking. What an
accomplishment! Point to the object and
click the right mouse
button. Select items from
the shortcut menu with
the left mouse button.
To Close a Shortcut Menu
Without Selecting
Anything:
Click anywhere outside
the shortcut menu with
the left mouse button, or
press the <Esc> key.
Lesson 5-8: Using the Keyboard

Esc key Function ke s or F ke s
Figure 5-17
A standard keyboard
(Your computer may have Num Caps Scroll
a slightly different layout Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Scroll

Pause Lock Lock Lock
Screen Lock
than the one pictured

here). ~
`
!
1
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
0
+
=
Backspace Insert Home Page
Up
Num
Lock
/ *
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | 7 8 9
Figure 5-18
Tab Delete End Page
[ ] \ Down Home PgUp
+
Caps A S D F G H J K L : " 4 5 6
Enter
;
The Shut Down Windows
Lock
'
Z X C V B N M < > ? 1 2 3
dialog box. Shift , . / Shift
End PgDn
Enter
0 .
Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl
Ins Del
Ctrl key Start key Shift key Shift key Alt key Start key Numeric keypad
Figure 5-17 Alt key Ctrl key
Arrow keys
Figure 5-18
N ha e ma e ed he m e, i ime m e n he he de ice ha e
control your computer: the keyboard. The keyboard may seem more familiar and easy to use
han he m e a fi , b d n be f led! C m e ke b a d neak in me e a ke
that are very useful. This lesson explains what these extra keys on the keyboard are and when
to use them.
1. Press and hold down the <Alt> key, press the <F4> key, then release
both keys.
P e ing he e ke c mmand he c en g am cl e. Since e ing he
Windows Desktop, the Shut Down Windows dialog box appears, as shown in Figure
5-18.
We e n ead h Wind d nj e . F ll he ne e back f
the Shut Down Windows dialog box without selecting anything.
2. Press the <Esc> key.
Pressing <Esc> does the same thing as clicking the Cancel button. The Shut Down
Wind dial g b di a ea and e back a he Wind de k .
Table 5-8: Special Keys and Their Functions describes the <Alt> and <Esc> keys you just
used, as well as some of the other confusing keys on the keyboard.

Table 5-8: Special Keys and Their Functions

Key(s) Description
The <Alt> ke doesn t do an thing by itself it needs another key to make things
happen. For example, pressing the <Tab> key while holding down the <Alt> key
switches between any programs that are currently running.
Just like the <Alt> ke , the <Ctrl> ke doesn t do anything by itself you need to
press another key along with it to make things happen. For example, pressing the
<X> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key cuts whatever is selected.
The <F1> key is the Help key for most programs. Pressing it displays helpful
information about hat ou re doing and ans ers our questions about the
program.
The <Esc> (Escape) ke is the Wait, I ve changed m mind! ke . Its function is

the same as clicking Cancel in a dialog box. For example, if you click something
and an unfamiliar dialog box appears, you can close it by pressing the <Esc> key.
The <Enter> ke is the Carr out m orders ke . Its function is the same as
clicking OK in a dialog box. For example, after ou ve t ped the name of a
program you want to run in a dialog box, press <Enter> to run the program. The
<Enter> ke also adds ne lines and starts ne paragraphs if ou re entering te t.
When ou re in a dialog bo , pressing the <Tab> key moves to the next field.
When ou re using a ord processor, the <Tab> ke orks just like ou d think it
would: it jumps to the nearest tab stop whenever you press it.
The arro ke s move our computer s cursor on the screen.
Quick Reference
To Use a Keystroke
Nothing surprising here. The <Delete> key deletes or erases whatever you
Combination:
select files, te t, or graphical objects. If ou re orking ith te t, the <Delete>
key erases characters to the right of the insertion point. Press and hold down the
first key, press the second
Use the <Backspace> key to fix your typing mistakes it erases characters to the key, then release both
left of the insertion point. keys. For example, press
the <Tab> key while
The <Home> ke jumps to the beginning of the current line hen ou re orking ou re holding do n the
with text. <Alt> key.
To Use the Special Keys
The <End> ke jumps to the end of the current line hen ou re orking ith te t. on the Keyboard:
Refer to Table 5-8:
Special Keys and Their
The <Page Up> key moves up one screen.
Functions.
The <Page Down> key moves down one screen.
Lesson 5-9: Exiting Windows and

Turning Off Your Computer
Figure 5-19
The Shut Down Windows
dialog box.
Click the list arrow and

select Shut down
...then click OK.
Figure 5-19
At the end of the day when e fini hed ing c m e, need h d n

Windows before you turn your computer off. Shutting down gives Windows a chance to tidy
af e i elf, a ing inf ma i n in he c m e mem he l cal di k, cleaning
temporary file , and e if ing ha e a ed an change made an file
worked on.
Should I turn my computer off at all? One of the great computer debates is whether you
h ld n c m e ff a all. S me e le n ff hei c m e hene e he e
Start button
fini hed i h i , j like a ele i i n e . O he d n n hei c m e ff ever. People
who turn their computers off at night say that keeping the computer on 24 hours a day, 7 days
a eek ea he c m e mechanical c m nen and a e elec ici . O he e le
say that leaving your computer on keeps temperature fluctuations down, which is better for
the comp e delica e in e nal c m nen . Pl , m ne c m e en e a andb
hibe na e m de af e a e i d f ime, he d n eall c n me ha m ch e . Which
me h d i be ? Tha a deci i n ll ha e make n n. S me e le n their
home computer off when they finish using it and leave their office computer on 24 hours a
day.
Whether or not you turn your computer off, you should always follow the next few steps
when you shut down your computer.
1. Save all your work and exit all your programs.

Sa ing an file e been king n i he m im an e f all hen
shut down your computer. You should also consider backing up any vital information if
Shut Down button you have a tape backup, Zip drive, or other backup device. You can also save any
Other Ways to Shut important files to a disk.
Down: 2. Click the Start button.
Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + The Start menu appears.
<Delete> and click
Shut Down.
3. Click the Shut Down button in the Start menu.
The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 5-19.

4. Click the What do you want your computer to do? list arrow and
select Shut down from the list. Click OK.
The c m e ha d d i e h m a Wind clean and h itself down.
NOTE: Lea ing n hing chance, Wind check make e e a ed
e e hing e been king n, ch a d c men c ea ed in
d ce ing g am. If Wind n ice ha en a ed a file, i a k
if you want to save the changes you made to the file before it begins the shut
down procedure.
Eventually Windows finishes shutting down and turns off your computer.
5. Make sure your computer and monitor are off.
C ng a la i n ! Y e c m le ed he cha e and a e ell on your way to mastering
Wind XP! Y e babl nde ing Wha e e h e he Sh D n i n f ?
Table 5-9: Shut Down Windows Options explains them:
Table 5-9: Shut Down Windows Options

Shut Down Option What it Does
Stand by Use Stand by if you have a laptop and are going to leave your computer
briefly but want to conserve as much energy as possible while you are
away. After you return your computer to its original running state, you will
be able to pick up exactly where you left off. (Make sure you save
everything you were working on first!)
Shut down Use this option if you want to turn your computer off. It saves your
Windows settings and saves any information stored in memory to the
local disk.
Restart Saves any Windows settings, writes any information stored in your
computer s memor to the local disk, and restarts our computer. Use
this option if Windows or your Windows-based programs start acting
flaky. You often have to restart your computer after installing new
software. Quick Reference
L g Off A This option appears only if your computer is connected to a network. To Shut Down Windows:
This option closes all your programs and disconnects your computer
from the network, preparing your computer to be used by someone else. 1. Save any files ou ve
been working on and exit
Hibernate Hibernate goes one step further than Stand by, allowing you to keep all your programs.
programs and documents open and shut off power. Hibernate saves 2. Click the Start button
your desktop status to the hard disk so the power can be turned off. and click the Shut Down
button in the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Delete> and click Shut
Down.
3. Click the What do you
want your computer to
do? list arrow and select
the Shut Down option
from the list. Click OK.
Chapter Five Review
Lesson Summary
Starting and Logging On to Windows XP Home
To Log On To Windows XP Home Using the Welcome Screen: Click your account user name.
Enter your account password if prompted.
To Log On To Windows XP Home Without the Welcome Screen: Enter your user name and
pass ord. If our account doesn t have a pass ord, leave the te t bo blank. Press <Enter> or
click OK.
Starting and Logging On to Windows XP Professional

To Log On To Windows XP Professional: Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>. Enter your user
name and password. Make sure you are logging in to the correct domain. Press <Enter> or click
OK.
Understanding the Windows XP Screen

Be able to identify the main components of the Windows screen.
A Look at the New Windows XP Start Menu

Be able to identify the new components of the Windows XP Start menu.
Using the Mouse: Pointing, Clicking and Double-clicking

To Point: Move the mouse so that the pointer is over the object.
To Click: Point to the object and press and release the left mouse button.
To Double-click: Point to the object and click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Using the Mouse: Clicking and Dragging

Point to the object you want to click and drag and click and hold down the mouse button. While
ou re still holding do n the mouse button, drag the object to the desired location on the screen
and then release the mouse button.
Using the Mouse: Right-clicking

T Di la a Objec Sh c Me : Point to the object and click the right mouse button.
Select items from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button.
To Close a Shortcut Menu Without Selecting Anything: Click anywhere outside the shortcut
menu with the left mouse button, or press the <Esc> key.

Using the Keyboard

To Use a Keystroke Combination: Press one key while holding down the other key. For example,
press the <Tab> key while holding down the <Alt> key.
Exiting Windows and Turning Off Your Computer

To Shut Down Windows: Save an files ou ve been orking on and e it all our programs. Click
the Start button and click the Shut Down button in the menu, or press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>
and click Shut Down. Click the What do you want your computer to do? list arrow and select
the Shut Down option from the list. Click OK.
Quiz
1. Microsoft Windows is a (an):
A. Word processing program.
B. Database program.
C. Operating System.
D. Graphics program.
2. Windows uses only the left mouse button. (True or False?)
3. How do you move the pointer to another location onscreen?

A. Press the arrow keys on the keyboard.
B. Move the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
C. Move the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and then click the left mouse
button.
D. Move the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the right mouse button.
4. A keystroke combination is:

A. Pressing two or more keys at the same time.
B. A way to lock your computer to prevent unauthorized access. To unlock the
computer, simply retype your keystroke combination.
C. Using the keyboard in conjunction with the mouse.
D. A type of mixed drink.
5. To display a shortcut menu for an object, do the following:

A. Point to the object and press <Ctrl> + .
B. Touch the object onscreen with your finger.
C. Click the object.
D. Right-click the object.
6. T <F1> a a a . (T
or False?)
Homework
1. Turn on your computer and start Windows XP.
2. Find, point to, and click the Start button, then close the Start menu without selecting
anything.
3. Find and double-click My Computer.
4. Shut down Windows by selecting Shut down from the Start menu, verifying the Shut
down option is selected, and clicking the OK button.
Quiz Answers
1. C. Microsoft Windows is an Operating System.
2. False. Windows uses both the left and right mouse buttons.
3. B. Move the pointer by moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
4. A. A keystroke combination is when you press two or more keys at the same time. For
example, pressing the <Shift> and <Tab> keys simultaneously.
5. D. Right-click the object.
6. T e. P e ing he <F1> ke di la hel n ha e e i i ha e king n.

Chapter Six:
Working with a
Window
How to start and shut
Starting a program
down Windows
Understanding the parts of a window How to use the mouse
to click, double-click,
Minimizing, maximizing, and restoring a window
drag and drop, and
Moving and closing a window right-click
Changing the size of a window
Switching between several programs

Tiling and cascading windows
No doubt about it: computers are sophisticated, complex machines. To make computers easier
to use, Microsoft designed Windows to operate how you work at the desk in your office.
When you work at your desk, you spread everything out, grab a piece of paper, work on it for
a while, and then shuffle an he iece f a e n f i . Tha h Wind k,
except instead of working with papers, you work with windows boxes that contain programs
and information.
You can shuffle these windows around the screen just like you shuffle papers on your desk
which is why the main Windows screen is called the desktop. J like de k, if e
working with a lot of things at the same time, the Windows desktop can become messy and
difficult to find things on.
This chapter explains how to manage the wind and g am n c een. Fi , ll
lea n h en a ind . Ne , ll di c e he a ha c n i e a ind ( hich
a e A LOT diffe en han he ne n h e). Then ll lea n h change he i e f
a window minimizing it to a tiny little icon that appears only on the Taskbar and maximizing
i ha i fill he en i e c een. Y ll al lea n h h ffle ind a nd, ending
me he backg nd and b inging he he f ef n . Le ge a ed!
138 Computer Basics
Lesson 6-1: Starting a Program

Figure 6-1
Click on the Start button to
open the menu, and then
point to All Programs to
open the menu.
Figure 6-2
Click on Accessories to
open the menu, and then
click on WordPad to open
the program.
Figure 6-3
The WordPad program
Any programs that are currently

running appear as icons on the
taskbar
Figure 6-3
To do just about anything with your computer, you need to run a program. A program is a
complex set of instructions that tells your computer how to do something. Your word
Start button processor is a program, and so is the Solitaire game that comes with Windows. The easiest
way to start a program is by clicking the Windows Start button and then selecting the program
from the All Programs menu. This lesson explains one of the most basic operations you can
do with Windows: starting a program.

Remember that the Start button resides in the bottom-left corner of the computer
screen. The Start menu pops up.

Chapter Six: Working with a Window 139
2. Point to All Programs.
A menu listing the different program categories pops out above the Start menu, as
3. Point to the word Accessories. All Programs
Another menu, the Accessories menu, shoots out to the side of the All Programs menu,
as shown in Figure 6-2. The program you want to load, WordPad, is in the Accessories
menu. Can you find it?
4. Click the word WordPad.
The WordPad program appears on the screen in its own window, as shown in Figure Accessories
6-3. WordPad is a simple word processing program that is included with Microsoft
Windows.
NOTE: The All Programs menu is merely a list of the programs that should be
available on your computer. When installed, programs should automatically
add themselves to the Start menu. Occasionally, old MS-DOS programs or
programs that are poorly written may not put themselves on the Start menu WordPad program
when you install them, and you will have to find and add the program to the
All P g am men elf. Y ll lea n h man all add g am
the Start menu in an upcoming lesson.
Most programs run in
G ea ! Y ej a ed fi g am. T n he age and e ll e amine he a f he
their own separate
WordPad window.
window on the screen.
Quick Reference
To Start a Program:
2. If the program appears on
the Start menu click it,
otherwise point to the All
Programs option.
3. Click the menu and any
submenus where the
program you want to run
is located.
4. Click the name of the
program you want to run.
140 Computer Basics

Parts of a Window
Title bar Minimize Maximize
Figure 6-4 button button
The parts of a typical Menu Close button

window bar
Toolbars
Main
Window or
Document
Area
Status bar
Figure 6-4
Located in every window are several little buttons, menus, and controls that you use to control
the program and window. Beca e he a ea in e e Wind g am, e g ing
have to learn what these little buttons, menus, and controls are and learn how to use them.
He e he g d ne : nce can find a a nd a ind f ne g am, ll
be familiar with the windows for most programs since this window/menu/button concept
appears in just about every Windows program.
There are no exercises or homework for you in this lesson i j he e hel bec me
familiar with the parts of a window. All you have to do is look at Figure 6-4 and then refer to
Table 6-1: Parts of a Window iden if ha e l king a .
And d n ; ll ge a chance la ih me f he e b n and men la e n.

Table 6-1: Parts of a Window

Part Description
Title bar Displays the name of the program or window
Minimize button Minimizes a window, hiding it from your screen but keeping it running in your
computer s memor , read for quick use. You can minimi e a program ou re
not using so that it is still running, but is out of sight.
Maximize/Restore Depending on the size of the window, this button toggles between maximize
button and restore. Here s hat each one does:
Maximize: Enlarges the window so that it fills the entire screen. This lets
ou see more of the indo s contents. The Ma imi e button onl
appears hen the indo isn t ma imi ed (doesn t fill the entire screen).
Restore: When a window is maximized (fills the entire screen), clicking
the Restore button returns the window to its previous size.
Close button Closes the indo or program hen ou re finished orking ith it, removing it
from the screen and the computer s memory.
Menu bar Controls what the program does. The items listed on the menu bar change from
program to program, but the menu bar s location doesn t it s al a s perched
near the top of a window, right below the Title bar.
Toolbar Some (but not all) windows and programs have one or more toolbars, which
contain buttons you point and/or click to access frequently used commands.
Main Window or This is where all the action takes place here ou ork on hatever ou re
Document Area working on. If you were using a word processor, this is where your letter would
appear. If you were browsing the Internet, this is where the Web pages would
appear.
Status bar Displays information such as instructions, messages about the state of the
computer, or your location in the window.
G e e hing d n? D n if d n ; hi le n i j a ick-guided tour of a

ical ind . The e f he le n in hi cha e f c nh e a ind
controls, buttons, and menus.
142 Computer Basics
Lesson 6-3: Minimizing,

Maximizing, and Restoring a
Window
Minimize Maximize button (or
Figure 6-5 button Restore button if the
window is already
The Minimize, Maximize, maximized)
and Restore buttons
appear in the upper right
corner of most programs.
Figure 6-6
A window in a restored Figure 6-5
state only fills up part of
the screen.
A window in a maximized
state fills up the entire
screen.
Figure 6-8
A window in a minimized
state appears only as an
icon on the taskbar.
One of the benefits of Windows XP is that it enables you to open and work with several
programs at the same time. To make working with several programs at once easier, you can
change the size of the windows. You can maximize, or enlarge, a window so it takes up the
entire screen; minimize, or reduce, a window so that it only appears as a button in the
Windows taskbar; or size a window somewhere in between. This lesson explains how to
change the size of a window by maximizing, minimizing, and restoring.
Fi , le l k a h maximize a window. Some programs, such as word processors and
Maximize button Web browsers, are easier to work with and fill the entire screen. To enlarge a window to fill
your computer screen, click the Maximize button.
1. C W Pa Maximize button the middle button in

W Pa ba .
The WordPad program maximizes, filling the entire screen. You can change a
maximized window back to its original size by clicking the Restore button. The
Restore button Restore button appears in place of the Maximize button whenever a window is already
in a maximized state.

2. C W Pa Restore button to restore the WordPad Other Ways to Maximize
window back to its previous size. and Restore a Window:
The window returns to its previous size. Double-click the title bar
Just like you can keep several papers on top of your desk, Windows can run more than of the window to toggle
one program at a time. For example, you can work on a letter with your word between maximized
processing program while your Web browser is open and downloading a file from the and restored states.
Internet. There is a potential pitfall with running several programs simultaneously
though he e i n en gh m f all f hem fi n c m e c een!
Luckily, you can tuck programs away, keeping them running and ready for use, yet
away from view, by minimizing them.
3. C W Pa Minimize button to minimize the WordPad
program.
Minimize button
The WordPad program shrinks to an icon located in the Windows taskbar. WordPad is
still open and running i j hidden f m ie , cked a a and ready for future
e. I im an n e ha minimi ed g am can ill n in he backg nd. If a
program is doing something, such as downloading a file from the Internet, it will keep
going, even when the program is minimized.
I ea edi la a minimi ed g am ind hen e ead ei
again.
WordPad icon
4. Find and click the WordPad icon in the Windows taskbar.
The WordPad program springs back to life and appears on the screen.
I im an ha ge all hi maximize/minimize/restore stuff down, because it will help
you be more productive with your computer.
Quick Reference
To Maximize a Window:
Click the indo s
Maximize button.
Or
Double-click the indo s
title bar.
To Restore a Maximized
Window:
Click the indo s
Restore button.
Or
Double-click the indo s
title bar.
To Minimize a Window:
Click the indo s
Minimize button.
To Restore a Minimized
Window:
Click the indo s icon
on the taskbar.
144 Computer Basics
Lesson 6-4: Closing a Window

Figure 6-9
Click the Close button on
the window you want to
close.
Figure 6-10
The window disappears
from your screen.

Close button Close button The icon for the window
Other Ways to Close a disappears from the taskbar.
Window:
Select File Exit from When e fini hed king i h a ind g am, can cl e i em e i from
the menu. he c een and c m e mem . Y can cl e an ind g am b clicking i
Close button, which appears in the upper-right corner of the window.
Right-click the
program s icon on the
task bar and select
1. C W Pa Close button.
Close from the shortcut The WordPad program closes. Notice the WordPad icon no longer appears in the
menu. Wind a kba a he b m f he c een. Tha all he e i cl ing a ind
program.
Press <Alt> + <F4>.
NOTE: If a program has more than one window open, you can close all of its open
windows by holding down the <Shift> key when you click the Close button
for any window.
Quick Reference Since e g ing be king i h he W dPad g am in he ne fe le n ,
you will need to open it again.
To Close a Window:
Click the indo s Close
button. The Windows XP Start menu appears.
Or 3. Select All Programs Accessories WordPad from the Start menu.
Right-click the program s The WordPad program reappears.
icon on the task bar and If a program happens to be minimized, you need to restore it by clicking its icon on the
select Close from the taskbar before you can see and click the windo cl e b n.
shortcut menu.
Or
Press <Alt> + <F4>.
To Close All Open
Windows:
Hold down the <Shift>
key while you click the
Close button of any
window.

Lesson 6-5: Moving a Window

Move a window by Figure 6-11
dragging it by its title
bar to a new location Moving a window to a new
on the screen. location on the screen.
Figure 6-11
When you have several programs or windows open, you may find that one window covers the
other windows or other items on your screen. When this happens, you can simply move a
window to a new location on the screen just like you would move a report or folder to a
diffe en l ca i n n de k. He e h m e a ind :
1. Position the mouse pointer over the title bar of the WordPad program.
Remember that the title bar is the colored bar at the very top of a window or program. Quick Reference
It displays the name of the program or window.
To Move a Window:
2. Click the title bar and move the mouse while still holding down the
mouse button. Click and drag the
window by its title bar.
Ye , i ha d ag and d ff lea ned earlier. An outline of the window follows
Release the mouse
your mouse as you drag the window, as shown in Figure 6-11, showing you where you
button to drop the window
are moving it.
in the desired location on
3. Release the mouse button to drop the window to a new location. the screen.
146 Computer Basics
Lesson 6-6: Sizing a Window

Figure 6-12
Dragging a indo s edge
or corner changes the size
of the window.
1. Point at the border of 2. Click and hold the 3. Release the mouse
the window until the mouse button and button when the
pointer changes to drag the border of window is the size
a . the window. you want.
Figure 6-12
If e been f ll ing he le n in hi cha e , h ld al ead kn h change

the size of a window or program by minimizing, maximizing, and restoring it. This lesson
explains how you can fine-tune the size of a window to meet your own specific needs.
The mouse pointer

1. Ma W Pa a a a a a a
entire screen.
changes shapes over
A ind d e n ha e be ma imi ed (fill he en i e c een) minimi ed
the border of a
(appear only as a button on the Taskbar) if you want to manually size it.
window.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the right border of the WordPad window
until it changes to a .
The two arrows point in the directions that you can drag the window's border, in this
case, left or right. Had you positioned the pointer over the top or bottom of the
window, the pointer would have changed to a , indicating that you could drag the top
or bottom of the window up or down.
NOTE: Windows is very picky where you place the pointer, and sometimes it can be
tricky finding he e ac he e he in e change . I he e just move
the pointer slowly over the border until you find it.
3. Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the
right 1 inch to move the window border.
Notice that the window stretches as you drag the mouse. When the window is the size
you want, you can release the mouse button.
4. Release the mouse button.
The window is displayed in its new size.

This lesson explained how to resize a window by adjusting the right border of a window, but
can change a ind i e b d agging i lef , , and b m b de . Y can al
resize a window by dragging its corners just like you drag its borders.
Quick Reference
To Cha ge a Wi d
Size:
1. Point at the indo s
borders or corners until
the pointer changes to a
double-arrow (like ).
2. Click and hold down the
mouse button and drag
the border or corner to a
new location, until the
window is the size you
want.
148 Computer Basics
Lesson 6-7: Switching Between

Windows
Figure 6-13 Click any part of a window to switch to
that window.
You can only work in one
window at a time. Notice
that WordPad appears in
front of all other windows
and has a blue title bar.
Figure 6-14
Click any part of the
Calculator window or its
button on the taskbar so The taskbar displays icons for each
that it appears in front of open window. Click an icon to switch
all the other windows. to its window.
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-15
Pressing <Alt> + <Tab>
lists all the programs that
are currently running.
Figure 6-15
The active indo s icon is darker

blue to show it is pressed down on
the taskbar.
Figure 6-14
You can have several programs or windows open and running simultaneously, but you can
only work in one window at a time. The ind e king i h i called he active
window and always appears on top of any other windows that you have open. If you think
about it, you do the same thing when you work at your desk. When you want to work on a
piece of paper, you place it on top of everything else on your desk.
This lesson explains how to switch be een he g am e nning. The e a e ac all
e e al a i ch be een ind , and e ll c e all f hem in hi le n. Fi ,
need make e ha e e e al g am nning
1. Make sure the WordPad program is still open.

If i i n en, click he S a b n and elec All P g am Accessories
WordPad. Notice an icon for the WordPad program appears on the taskbar. Next, you
need to open another program that comes with Windows XP the calculator.

2. Start the calculator by clicking the Start button and selecting All
Programs Accessories Calculator.
The calculator program appears in front of the WordPad program. An icon for the
Calculator program also appears in the taskbar, next to the WordPad icon. Notice the
Calculator program appears in front, and its icon is depressed on the taskbar, which
indicates it is the active window. You can make WordPad the active window by
clicking its icon on the taskbar.
3. Click the WordPad button on the taskbar.
The WordPad program appears in front, and its icon on the taskbar is depressesed, WordPad button
which indicates it is the active window. You can make another open window the active on the taskbar
window by clicking on any visible part of the window.
4. Click any portion of the Calculator window.
If can ee he Calc la ind a all, i beca e he Calc la ind i
completely covered by the WordPad window. In this case, you will have to click the
Calculator icon on the taskbar.
Yet another method of switching between windows is the most famous keystroke
combination in Windows: <Alt> + <Tab>.
5. Press and hold down the <Alt> key, press and release the <Tab> key, but
a <A > .
The task window appears, as shown in Figure 6-15. The task window lists all the
windows and programs that are currently running. Move on to the next step to see how
you can retrieve a program or window from the task list.
6. While still holding down the <Alt> key, press and release the <Tab> key
until the WordPad program is selected, then release the <Alt> key.
When you release the <Alt> key, the selected window or program is activated and
displayed in front of any other windows.
NOTE: <Alt> + <Tab> is especially useful when you use programs that fill the entire
computer screen, such as MS-DOS programs and some games. When you
can ee he a kba an a f an he ind , <Al > + <Tab> i he
only way you can switch between programs.
Quick Reference
NOTE: When e king i h m l i le g am , be careful not to accidentally
run a second copy of the same program. This wastes memory and makes To Switch between Open
hing c nf ing. F e am le, if e been ing he Calc la g am Programs:
and an b ing i back , make e check he a kba ee if i Click the program s icon
already running (a Calculator icon appears on the taskbar). If it is, use any of on the taskbar.
he me h d e lea ned in hi le n i ch i . If a g am i Or
already running and you load it again from the Start menu, a second copy of
the program opens and two icons for the program will appear on the taskbar. Click on any part of the
window you want to
Think you have a handle on switching between programs and windows? Good, because when appear in front.
k i h Wind , ll find elf i ching be een g am and ind Or
throughout the day.
Press and hold down the
<Alt> key and press the
<Tab> key to display the
task list. Press the <Tab>
key until the program you
want is selected, then
release the <Alt> key.
150 Computer Basics
Chapter Six Review
Lesson Summary
Starting a Program
Start a program by clicking the Start button, clicking the All Programs menu, clicking the menu
and any submenus where the program you want to run is located, and clicking the name of the
Understanding the Parts of a Window

Be able to identif a indo s title bar, menu, minimi e, ma imi e, and close buttons.
Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring a Window

Maximize a window so that it fills the entire screen by clicking its Maximize button, or by double-
clicking its title bar.
Restore a window to its previous size by clicking its Restore button, or by double-clicking its title
bar.
Minimize a window so that it only appears as an icon on the taskbar b clicking the indo s
Minimize button.
Restore a minimized window by clicking its icon on the taskbar.
Closing a Window
Close a window by clicking its Close button, or by pressing <Alt> + <F4>.
Close all open windows by holding down the <Shift> key while you click the Close button of any
window.
Moving a Window
To Move a Window: Click and drag the window by its title bar. Release the mouse button to drop
the window in the desired location on the screen.
Sizing a Window
To Change a Wind Si e: Point at the indo s borders or corners until the pointer changes to
a double-arrow (like ). Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the border or corner to a
new location until the window is the size you want.
Switching between Windows

You can onl ork on one indo at a time. The indo ou re orking on is the active indo
and appears in front of all the inactive windows.

To Switch between Open Programs: There are three ways to switch between open programs:
1. Click on the program s icon on the taskbar.
2. Click on any visible part of the window that you want to appear in front.
3. Press and hold down the <Alt> key and press the <Tab> key to display the task list. Press the
<Tab> key until the program you want is selected, then release the <Alt> key.
Quiz
1. To start a program in Windows XP, do the following:
A. Make sure the Program Manager is open, double-click the Program Group where the
program you want to run is located, and double-click the Program.
B. Click the Start button, point to the All Programs menu, click the menu and any
submenus where the program you want to run is located, and click the name of the
C. Click the Start button, point to the Run menu, click the menu and any submenus
where the program you want to run is located, and then click the name of the
D. None of the above.
2. T ba a a a a a a a
window is called the:
A. Windows bar.
B. Program bar.
C. Title bar.
D. Very top of the window bar.
3. You start your favorite word processing program to type a letter, but the
a a a a a a .H a
maximize the window so it fills the entire screen? (Select all that apply.)
A. Select Window Full Screen from the menu.
B. Double-click he ind Ti le ba .
C. Click he g am ic n n he a kba .
D. Click he Ma imi e b n l ca ed in he igh ide f he ind Ti le ba .
4. You can open or restore a minimized window by clicking its icon on the
taskbar. (True or False?)
5. You can move a window to a different position on your computer screen by

dragging it by its:
A. Title bar.
B. Status bar.
C. Move handle.
D. Tail.
152 Computer Basics
6. You have several programs open at the same time how can you switch
between these programs? (Select all that apply.)
A. Restart the program Click the Start button, point to the All Programs menu, click
the menu and any submenus where the program you want to switch to is located, and
click the name of the program you want to view.
B. Click he g am ic n n he a kba .
C. Click on any visible part of the window you want to appear in front.
D. Press and hold down the <Alt> key and press the <Tab> key to display the task list.
Press the <Tab> key until the program you want is selected, then release the <Alt>
key.
Homework
1. Click the Start button, select All Programs, and click the Accessories menu.
2. Start the NotePad program (located under All Programs Accessories).
3. Make the NotePad window a few inches bigger.
4. Maximize the NotePad window.
5. Restore the NotePad window to its previous size.
6. Move the NotePad window to a different location on the screen.
7. Open the Calculator program.
8. Tile both windows on the screen by right-clicking a blank area of the taskbar.
9. Close both windows.
Quiz Answers
1. B.
2. C. The li le ba al ng he ind ha li he g am name i he Ti le ba .
3. B and D. Double-clicking he ind Ti le ba clicking he ind Ma imi e
button will maximize the window so it fills the entire screen.
4. True. Clicking the icon of a minimized program on the taskbar restores the window.
5. A. Move a window by dragging its Title bar.
6. B, C, and D. You can use any of these methods to switch between open programs.
D n e A, hich a an he c f he g am in ead f i ching he
already open program.

Chapter Seven:
Working with
Programs
How to start and shut
Use menus and toolbars
down Windows.
Fill out a dialog box How to use the mouse
Enter and edit text
click and drag, and
Save and open a file right-click.
How to use the
Select, replace, and delete text
keyboard.
Use the undo function
Print a file
Cut, copy, and paste text
Format fonts and paragraphs
Get help
Save and open files in different locations
U n il n , e e nl been f c ing n h e he Wind XP e a ing em. In

hi cha e , ll be working with a program. This chapter explains how to control programs
ing men and lba . Y ll al lea n ha a dialog box i ( ll ee a l f hem in
Windows), and how to fill one out.
Ne , e ll ge m e ecific. E e g am i different, but the procedure for doing things
in all programs is the same. This chapter explains these basic generic chores using the
W dPad g am. Y ll lea n h en e , edi , and dele e e ; h en, a e, and
print a file; and how to get help when need i . Once e lea ned he e ba ic kill in
WordPad, you can apply them to just about every other Windows program. This is one of the
l nge cha e ab Wind XP, e ha e a l f g nd c e . Le ge a ed
Lesson 7-1: Using Menus

Figure 7-1
Starting the WordPad
program.
Figure 7-2
The WordPad program
window.
Figure 7-3
The Date and Time dialog
box.
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-3
To make a program do your bidding, you give it commands. You can give commands to your
Windows program several different ways: by using menus, toolbars, right mouse button
shortcut menus and keystroke shortcuts. This lesson explains the most common method of
issuing commands to Windows programs through men . Y can find a g am men
near the top of a window just beneath the title bar. In Figure 7-2, notice the words File, Edit,
View, Insert, Format, and Help that appear near the top of the WordPad program. Those words
are menus, and the next few steps will show you why they are there.

Start button The Start menu appears.
2. Select All Programs Accessories WordPad from the Start menu.
That means you should click All P g am , hen click he d Acce ie f m
he All P g am men , and hen click he d W dPad f m he Acce ie
menu, as shown in Figure 7-1. The WordPad program appears.
3. Move the pointer to and click the word Insert on the menu bar.
A menu drops down under the word Insert, as shown in Figure 7-2.
The In e men c n ain a li f c mmand in e hing , ch a he Da e and
Time , hich in e he c en da e and/ ime, and Objec , hich in e a file
created in another program.

Chapter Seven: Working with Programs 155
4. Point to and click the Date and Time option from the Insert menu.
The Date and Time dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-3, presenting you with
e e al diffe en da e and ime f ma ch e f m. Y ll lea n m e ab dial g
boxes in an upcoming lesson.
5. Click the OK button.
The Date and Time dialog box disappears and the current date is inserted into the OK button
WordPad document.
Take a close look at the WordPad menu bar notice that every word in the menu has an
underlined letter somewhere in it? For example, the F in the File menu is underlined.
Pressing the <Alt> key and then pressing the underlined letter in a menu does the same
You can open menus by
thing as clicking the menu with the mouse.
clicking the menu name
6. Press the <Alt> key then press the <F> key. with the mouse or by
The File menu appears. Once a menu is open, you can use the arrow keys on your pressing the <Alt> key
c m e ke b a d na iga e h gh he men , e an he nde lined and the underlined
letters in the menu. letter in the menu
7. Press the right arrow key < >. name.
The next menu to the right, the Edit menu, opens.
If en a men and change mind, i ea cl e i i h elec ing an
commands. Just click anywhere outside the menu or else press the <Esc> key.
8. Click anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without selecting any You can close a menu
commands. without selecting any
commands by clicking
NOTE: The procedure for using menus and the general order/layout of the menu is anywhere outside the
usually similar in most Windows programs. So if you master the menus in one menu or by pressing
Windows program, you will be familiar with the layout and function of the the <Esc> key.
menus in other Windows programs.
Table 7-2: Common Windows Program Menus gives you a preview of some of the different
menu items you will come across.
Table 7-2: Common Windows Program Menus Quick Reference

File Description
To Open a Menu:
File Commands to open, save, close, print, and create new files
Click the menu name with
Edit Commands to copy, cut, paste, find, and replace text in a document the mouse.
View Commands to change how the document is displayed on the screen Or
Insert Lists items that you can insert into a document, such as graphics, page Press <Alt> and the
numbers, and the current date underlined letter in the
menu name.
Format Commands to format text, paragraphs, tab stops, etc. Strangely, the command
to format the page (i.e. margins, etc.) is located in the File menu under Page
Setup.
Window Commands to display and arrange multiple windows (if you have more than one
document open). WordPad doesn t have this menu since it can only have one
file open at a time.
Help Get help on the program you are using.
Lesson 7-2: Using Toolbars

Figure 7-4
Move the pointer over a
button and wait a few
seconds for the button s
description.
The Date and Time dialog
box.
Figure 7-6
The WordPad document.
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Toolbars are another common way to boss around your programs. While menus contain every
conceivable command for a program, toolbars contain buttons for the commands you use
most frequently. Instead of having to wade through several menus to do something, you can
click a single button.
Two toolbars appear in the WordPad program the Standard toolbar and the Formatting
toolbar. The Standard toolbar appears on top and contains buttons for the most frequently
used commands in WordPad, such as saving and printing a document. The Formatting toolbar
is located right underneath the Standard toolbar and has buttons for quickly formatting fonts
and paragraphs.
Toolbar buttons have small icons to indicate what they do. For example, a small picture of a
in e a ea n he P in b n. If ill d n kn ha a b ni ed f , m e he
pointer over the button and wait a few seconds. Usually, a little window will appear with a
brief description of the button.
1. Click after the date you entered in the last lesson and press the <Enter>
key.
A new paragraph is started.
2. Point the mouse point Da /T b W Pa
Standard toolbar.
Date/Time button
A small window appears over the button, briefly identifying what the button is in this
ca e Da e/Time as shown in Figure 7-4.
3. Click the Date/Time button.
The Date and Time dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-5, presenting you with
several different date and time formats to choose from.

4. Click the OK button.
WordPad inserts the current date and time in the WordPad document.
5. Press and hold the <Backspace> key to delete the date you just entered. OK button
Only one date remains on your screen. You will learn more about deleting text in a later
lesson.
Compare your screen with the one in Figure 7-6.
Quick Reference
To Use a Toolbar Button:
Click the toolbar button.
To See What a Toolbar
Button Does:
Position the pointer over
the toolbar button and
wait a second. A
ScreenTip will appear
above the button.
Lesson 7-3: Filling Out a Dialog

Box
Figure 7-7
The Font dialog box. Text box OK button
Figure 7-8 Cancel button
A scroll bar.
List box
Check box
Preview area
List arrow
Figure 7-7
Scroll Up button
Click here to scroll up.
Scroll box
Indicates your current position in the
list (you can also click and drag the
Scroll Down button scroll box to scroll up or down).
Click here to scroll
You can select a down.
control in a dialog box
Figure 7-8
by clicking the control
with the mouse or by
Some commands are more complicated than others. For example, saving a file is a simple
pressing the <Tab> key
process all you have to do is select File Save from the menu or click the Save button on
until the control is
the Standard toolbar. Other commands are more complex. Whenever you want to do
selected.
something relatively complicated in Windows, you need to fill out a dialog box. Filling out a
dialog box is not much different than filling out a paper form. Dialog boxes usually contain
several types of controls, including:
Text boxes
Text box List boxes
Check boxes
List arrows
Buttons
This lesson will give you a quick tour of a more complicated dialog box and show you how to
use the various dialog box components you will come across.
List box 1. Select Format from the menu.

The Format menu appears.

Look at the items listed in the Format menu Font, Paragraph and Tabs are followed
b elli e Whene e ee a men i em f ll ed b elli e , a dial g b i
lurking just behind the menu.
2. Select Font from the Format menu. List arrow
The Font dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-7.
The Font dialog box is one of the most complex dialog boxes in the WordPad program
and contains several types of controls. You have to select a control to use it. You can do
this by clicking the control with the mouse. Or you can move to the control by pressing
Check box
the <Tab> key to move to the next control, or <Shift> + <Tab> to move to the previous
control, until the cursor appears in the control or it becomes highlighted.
Fi , le l k a e b e . Te b xes are nothing more than the fill-in-the-blank
b e e al ead ed in man e f a e f m . Te b e a e inc edibl
easy to use just type in the text you want.
Quick Reference
3. Make sure the cursor is in the Font text box type Arial.
Y e j filled t the text box nothing to it. To Select a Dialog Box
Control:
The next stop in our dialog box tour is the list box. A list box puts several options
ge he in a mall b . S me ime li b e c n ain man i n ha he can Click the control with the
all be displayed at once, and you must click the li b scroll bar to move up or mouse.
down the list. See Figure 7-8 for an illustration of a scroll box. Or
4. Click and hold the Font list box Scroll Down button until Times New Press <Tab> to move to
Roman appears in the list. the next control in the
5. Click the Times New Roman option in the list. dialog box or <Shift> +
<Tab> to move to the
Our next destination is the list arrow. The list arrow is the cousin of the list box it, previous control until you
too, displays a list of options. The only difference is that you must click the downward arrive at the desired
pointing arrow in order to display the list. control.
6. Click the Color list arrow.
To Use a Text Box:
A list of color options appears.
Simply type the
7. Select the Blue color from the list. information directly into
Sometimes you need to select more than one item in a dialog box. For example, what if the text box.
you want to add Strikeout formatting and Underline formatting to the selected font?
To Use a List Box:
U e he check b c n l hen e e en ed i h m l i le ch ice .
8. Click the Strikeout check box and click the Underline check box. Click the option you want
from list box. Use the
The last destination on our dialog box tour is the button. Buttons are used to execute or scroll bar to move up and
void commands. Two buttons can be found in every dialog box. They are: down through its options.
OK: Applies and saves any changes you have made and then closes the dialog
To Use a List Arrow:
box. Pressing the <Enter> key usually does the same thing as clicking the OK
button. Click the list arrow to
display the list options.
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without applying and saving any changes.
Click an option from the
Pressing the <Esc> key usually does the same thing as clicking the cancel
list to select it.
button.
9. Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes you made and close the To Close a Dialog Box and
Font dialog box. Save Changes:
Click the OK button or
press <Enter>.
To Close a Dialog Box
Without Saving Changes:
Click the Cancel button
or press <Esc>.
Lesson 7-4: Entering Text in the

WordPad Program
Figure 7-9
A simple letter created in
the WordPad program.
Figure 7-9
This lesson explains how to create a document using the WordPad program. Actually, there
i n m ch e lain all you have to do is type!
1. If necessary, open the WordPad program.

Start button If d n emembe h en W dPad, elec All P ograms Accessories
WordPad from the menu.
Le en e me e .
2. Click ins the WordPad window, and type 9/29
G d. N e e g ing i e a le e .
3. Press the <Enter> key twice.
WordPad inserts a new paragraph, or new line, each time you press the <Enter> key.
4. Type the following text: To the La Fanci Nails Company:
As you type, notice that the insertion point (the small, blinking vertical bar) moves to
indicate where you are typing.
5. Press the <Enter> key twice, and type the following text:
I bought a set of your press-on nails last month, and I
was extremely displeased with them. While pressing my La
Fanci Nails on, I went to pet my poodle, Pizzy, and my
hand and nails stuck to her shaggy little pelt. That was
in A g and e e ill gl ed together.
The press-on nail glue should not have been so strong!

Pi ba king i d i ing me mad. Plea e ec n ide he
strength of your product.

Make sure you press the <Enter> key twice to add a blank line between the two While you type, word-
a ag a h . D n e <En e > hen each he end f a line WordPad will wrap continues text
automatically move the text to the next line for you. This feature is called word-wrap. from one line to the
When e finished typing, compare your letter with Figure 7-9. next without making
you press <Enter>.
Quick Reference
To Enter Text in WordPad:
1. Place the insertion point
in WordPad by clicking in
the WordPad screen.
2. Type your text.
Lesson 7-5: Editing Text

Figure 7-10
Use the keyboard or the
mouse to move the
insertion point in a
document.
Move the insertion or b using the

point with the arrow mouse to click
keys on your where you want to
computer s Figure 7-10 place the insertion
ke board point with the
pointer.
After typing a document, you will often discover that you need to make some changes to your
text perhaps you want to rephrase or even delete a sentence. Editing a document by inserting
and deleting text is very simple. To insert text, move the insertion point (the blinking bar) to
where you want to insert the text. You can move the insertion point using the arrow keys on
the keyboard or by using the mouse to click where you want to move it, as shown in Figure
7-10. Once the insertion point is where you want it, just start typing.
There are a couple ways to delete text. One way to delete text is to place the insertion point
immediately after the text you want to delete and press the <Backspace> key. Another way to
delete text is to place the insertion point immediately before the text you want to delete and
press the <Delete> key.
In hi le n, ll ge ac ice inserting and deleting text and revising the letter you created
in WordPad.
1. Press the up arrow key < >.

The insertion point moves up one line.
2. Press and hold the up arrow key < > to move the insertion point to the
very top line in the document.
Now you need to move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
3. Press and hold the left arrow key < > to move the insertion point to the
very beginning of the line.
4. Type Subject: Glue Trauma and press <Enter> twice.

Placing the The text and blank line is inserted at the insertion point, before the rest of the
insertion point d c men . Y e j lea ned h in e e in a d c men pretty easy, huh?
5. Move the insertion point immediately after the word extremely in the first
body paragraph.
He e, need dele e me e ; dele e he d e emel .

6. Press the <Backspace> a ,
deleted.
The Backspace key deletes one space to the left of the insertion point.
7. Type very.
Y e j dele ed he d e emel and in e ed he d e ake i The <Backspace> key
place. deletes one space to
You can also use the mouse to move the insertion point instead of the arrow keys. the left of, or behind,
Simply use the mouse to move the pointer where you want to place the insertion point the insertion point.
and then click.
8. C a a A T a a
A a .
The inser i n in a ea immedia el af e he d A g right where you
clicked the mouse button.
You can also use the Delete key to delete text. Like the Backspace key, the Delete key
also deletes text, but in a slightly different way. The Backspace key deletes text before,
The <Delete> key
or to the left of the insertion point, while the Delete key deletes text after, or to the right
deletes one space to
of the insertion point.
the right of, or
9. Press the <Delete> key. before, the insertion
The Delete key deletes text to the right of, or before, the insertion point. point.
10. Press and hold the <Delete> key until you have deleted the rest of the
a .
G ea ! Y e lea ned h dele e e ing he Dele e ke .
Compare your revised document with the one shown in Figure 7-10.
Quick Reference
To Move the Insertion
Point:
Use the arrow keys.
Or
Click where you want to
place the insertion point
with the pointer.
To Insert Text:
Move the insertion point
where you want to insert
the text and then type the
text you want to insert.
To Delete Text:
The <Backspace> key
deletes text behind, or to
the left of, the insertion
point.
The <Delete> key deletes
text before, or to the right
of, the insertion point.
Lesson 7-6: Saving and Opening a

File
Figure 7-11 Save in list
Select the drive or folder where
The Save As dialog box.
you want to save the file.
Figure 7-12
The Open dialog box. Displays files located in the
selected drive or folder.
File name text box

Type the name you want to save
your file as here.
Figure 7-11
Look in list
Select the drive or folder where the
file you want to open is located.
Displays files located in the

selected drive or folder select the
file you want to open here.
The letter file.
Figure 7-12
Once you have created something in a program, you must save the file if you ever want to use
i again in he f e. When a e a file, e an fe ing i f m c m e
Save button mem ( hich i e a ed hen cl e he g am) he c m e l cal di k ( hich i
Other Ways to Save: permanent and not erased when you close the program). In this lesson, you will learn how to
Select File Save save a file and then open or retrieve it from the local disk.
from the menu.
1. Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar.
The Save As dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-11. You must give your file a
name and specify where you want to save it. First, tell the computer you want to save
the file in your Practice folder.
2. Navigate to your Practice folder.
Your computer stores information in files and folders, just like you store information in
a filing cabine . T en a file, m fi find and en he f lde he e i a ed.
The Save As dialog box has its own toolbar, making it easy to browse through your
c m e d i e and f lde . T c n l n hi lba a e a ic la l helpful:

Look in list: Click to list the drives on your computer
and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose contents you
want to display.
Up button: Click to move up one folder level.

If necessary, follow your in c di ec i n elec he a ia e d i e and
folder where your practice files are located.
3. Click the File name text box.
The File name box is where you give your file a name. Close button
NOTE: File names can be up to 255 characters long and contain letters, numbers, and
me mb l . Y can e he mb l " \ / : * | < > in a file name.
4. Type Letter.
Thi ill a e he d c men c ea ed in a file named Le e .
5. Click Save.
Y c m e a e he Le e file he c m e ha d di k. Open button
N ha e a ed he file, can afel cl e W dPad e en n ff he Other Ways to Open a
c m e , kn ing ha W dPad Le e file i ed and can be e ie ed File:
whenever you want to work on it again.
Select File Open
6. Close the WordPad program by clicking its Close button. from the menu.
The WordPad program closes.
Le make e he Le e d c men c ea ed and a ed in W dPad i ill he e.
7. Open the WordPad program again.
Once you have started WordPad, you can open the Letter document you saved.
8. Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.
The Open dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-12. The Open dialog box is very
similar to the Save As dialog box, except you specify the name and location of the file
you want to open.
9. If necessary, navigate to your Practice folder. Quick Reference
The Open dialog box will display any WordPad files that have been saved in the To Save a File:
P ac ice f lde . He e h elec a file you want to open. Click the Save button on
10. Click the Letter file. the Standard toolbar.
Shading appears over the Letter file, indicating that it is selected. Or
11. Click the Open button. Select File Save from
The Letter document appears in the WordPad window. the menu.
When you open a file, instead of selecting a file and clicking the Open button, you can save a To Open a File:
half-second or so by simply double-clicking the file you want to open. Click the Open button on
the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select File Open from
the menu.
Lesson 7-7: Selecting, Replacing,

and Deleting Text
Figure 7-13
1. Position the insertion point before or after
You can select and the text that you want to select.
replace text.
Figure 7-14 2. Click and hold down the left mouse button,
drag the mouse across the text you want to
The updated letter. select, and then release the mouse button.
3. If you want to replace the selected text,

simply type in the new text it will overwrite
the selected text.
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
This lesson explains how to select text. Whenever you want to edit more than one character at
a time, you must select it first. A lot of editing and formatting techniques such as formatting,
cutting, copying and pasting text also require that you select the text you want to modify.
There are probably hundreds of reasons to select text in many Windows-based programs, so it
pays to be an expert at it.
To replace text, select
the text you want to 1. Place the insertion point immediately in front of the word August in the
replace and type the last sentence of the first paragraph.
new text you want to You learned how to move the insertion around using the mouse earlier in this chapter.
replace it with. Actually, you can place the insertion point before or after the text you want to select.
2. Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse across the
word August (the words should be highlighted). Release the mouse
b .
The word August should be highlighted in blue, as shown in Figure 7-13. Selecting text
with the mouse can be a little tricky a fi , e eciall if e ill a n ice a ing
the mouse. When you select text, anything you type will replace the selected text.

3. Type July.
The d J l e lace he elec ed e , A g . A ick a elec a ingle
word is to double-click the word you want to select.
4. Double-click the word Trauma in the Subject line.
Other Ways to Select
5. Type Crisis. Text:
The word Crisis replaces the word Trauma. You can also use the keyboard to select text Double-click a word to
if d n like ing he m e. T elec e ing he ke b a d, m e he in e i n select it.
point before or after the text you want to select, and then press and hold down the
<Shift> key while you use the arrow keys to select the text.
6. Move the insertion point to the very end of the Subject: Glue Crisis line.
Try selecting text with the keyboard in the next step.
7. Press and hold down the <Shift> key and press and hold down the left
arrow key < > until the Subject line is selected.
If you change your mind af e elec ing e , i ea de elec i . J click an he e
else on the screen.
8. Click anywhere in the document to deselect the text. Quick Reference
The Subject line is no longer selected. To Select a String of Text:
Another trick you should know is that you can delete any selected text by pressing the 1. Move the insertion point
<Delete> key. to the beginning or end of
9. Select the date and press the <Delete> key. the text you want to
The date is deleted. select.
2. Click and hold the left
And ha all he e i elec ing e in Wind . Again, i e im an ha kn
mouse button and drag
how to select text. Knowing how to select text will make you much more proficient at using
the insertion point across
many Window programs.
the text, then release the
mouse button once the
Table 7-3: Shortcuts for Selecting Text text is selected.
To Select This Do This Or
A word Double-click the word. Press and hold down the
<Shift> key while using
A line Click next to the line in the left margin. the arrow keys to select
A sentence Press and hold <Ctrl> and double-click the sentence. the text.
The entire document Press and hold <Ctrl> and double-click in the left margin. To Select a Single Word:
Double-click the word you
want to select.
To Replace Text:
Replace text by first
selecting it, then typing
the new text.
To Deselect Text:
Click anywhere on the
computer screen.
To Delete Selected Text:
1. Select the text.
2. Press the <Delete> key.
Lesson 7-8: Using Undo

Figure 7-15
You can cancel a text
deletion with the Undo
feature.
Undo
Figure 7-15
You ma n an admi hi , b e g ing make mi ake hen e Wind .

Undo button Y migh acciden all dele e a en ence in d ce ing g am ha didn
mean dele e, a e me hing ha didn mean a e. F na el , Windows and
Other Ways to Undo: most Windows programs come with a wonderful feature called undo that does just that
Select Edit Undo undoes your last action, making it as though it never happened.
from the menu.
Many people that are new to Windows or computers in general are often terrified of using
Press <Ctrl> + <Z>. computers because they are afraid they will make a mistake and seriously mess things up.
Fi f all, i m e diffic l me c m e han hink i i . Sec ndl ,
will learn how to use Undo, so even if you do make a mistake, you can easily cancel it.
1. Select the Subject: Glue Crisis line and delete it by pressing the
<Delete> key.
Wh ! Y didn eall an dele e ha ! Wa ch h can nd
mi ake.
Quick Reference 2. Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar.
To Undo Your Previous P f! W dPad cancel la ac i n and he dele ed e S bjec : Gl e C i i
Action: reappears.
Click the Undo button on In m g am , Und ill nl cancel la ac i n change; if d n ca ch

the toolbar. mistake right after you make it, Undo may not be able to help.
Or
Select Edit Undo from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <Z>.

Lesson 7-9: Printing a File

Figure 7-16
The Print dialog box.
Figure 7-16
This lesson will sh h end ha e e e king n he in e . P in ing i

one of the easiest things to do in Windows.
Other Ways to Print:
1. Select File Print from the menu.
Click the Print button
The Print dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-16. The Print dialog box may differ if it appears on the
de ending n he g am e ing, b i h ld all c n ain he i n li ed toolbar.
in Table 7-4: Print Dialog Box Options.
Press <Ctrl> + .
2. Click OK.
Windows sends the document to the printer.
Table 7-4: Print Dialog Box Options Quick Reference

Print option Description To Print a File:
Name Used to select what printer to send your file to when it prints (if you are Click the Print button on
connected to more than one printer). The currently selected printer is the Standard toolbar.
displayed. Or
Properties Displays a dialog box with options available to your specific printer such as Select File Print from
printing on both sides of the page, selecting the paper size you want to use, the menu.
printing in color or black and white, etc.
Or
Page range Allows you to specify what pages you want to print. There are several Press <Ctrl> + .
options:
All: Prints the entire document.
Selection: Prints only the text you have selected (before selecting the
print command).
Pages: Prints only the pages of the file you specify. Select a range of
pages with a hyphen (for example: 5-8) and separate single pages with
a comma (for example: 3,7).
Number of copies Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Lesson 7-10: Cutting, Copying and

Pasting Text
Figure 7-17
The steps involved in 1. Select the text or object you want
cutting and pasting text. to cut and click the Cut button on
the Standard Toolbar. The text or
object is removed or cut from its
original location.
2. Move the insertion point to

where you want to place the cut
text or object.
3. Click the Paste button on the

Standard Toolbar to paste the
cut text or object.
Cut button
Other Ways to Cut: By now, you should already know how to select text in a document. Once text is selected, you
Select Edit Cut from can move it to another place in the document by cutting it and then pasting it elsewhere.
the menu. Cutting and pasting text is one of the more common tasks you will use in your programs.
Anything you cut is placed in a temporary storage area called the Windows Clipboard. The
Press <Ctrl> + <X>.
Clipboard is available to any Windows program, so you can cut and paste text between
different programs.
1. Select the entire subject line.

Paste button Remember how to select text? Point to the beginning or end of the text you want to
Other Ways to Paste: select, hold down the left mouse button, drag the cursor across the text, and release the
Select Edit Paste mouse button.
from the menu. Now you can cut the selected text to the Windows clipboard.
Press <Ctrl> + <V>.

2. Click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar.
The selected text, the subject line, disappears from WordPad and is placed on the
Windows Clipboard, ready to be moved to a new location.
Copy button
NOTE: The Windows Clipboard can only hold one piece of information at a time.
Every time you cut or copy something to the Clipboard, it replaces the Other Ways to Copy:
previous information. Select Edit Copy
3. Move the insertion point to the blank line immediately below To the La from the menu.
Fanci Nails Company: Press <Ctrl> + <C>.
This is where you want to paste the line you cut.
4. Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.
Poof! The cut text, the subject line, appears at the insertion point.
Quick Reference
Copying information is very similar to cutting information. Both commands put your
selected information on the Clipboard where you can then paste it to a new location. To Cut an Object or Text:
The only difference between the two commands is that Cut command deletes selected 1. Select the text or object
information when it copies it to the clipboard, while the Copy command copies the you want to cut.
selected information to the clipboard without deleting it.
2. Click the Cut button on
5. Select the entire document by holding down the <Ctrl> key and clicking the Standard toolbar.
the pointer in the left margin.
Or
Now you can copy the selected text to the clipboard.
Select Edit Cut from
6. Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar. the menu.
Nothing appears to happen, but the selected text has been copied to the clipboard. Or
One of the great things about Windows is that it allows you to share information Press <Ctrl> + <X>.
between programs. For example, the information that you just copied to the Windows
clipboard from WordPad can be pasted into another Windows program. To see how this To Copy an Object or Text:
works, you will need to open another Windows program the Notepad. 1. Select the text or object
7. Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories you want to copy.
Notepad. 2. Click the Copy button on
The N e ad g am a ea . N e ad d e n ha e a lba like W dPad d e , the Standard toolbar.
you will have to access the Paste command through the menu. Or
8. Select Edit Paste from the Notepad menu. Select Edit Copy from
The document you copied from the WordPad program is pasted into the Notepad the menu.
g am. Y n be ing he N e ad g am an m e in hi cha e , can Or
close it. Press <Ctrl> + <C>.
9. C N a a Close button. To Paste a Cut or Copied
A dialog box appears, asking if you want to save the changes you made to the Notepad Object:
file. Y d n need a e an change , can afel click N . 1. Place the insertion point
10. Click No. where you want to paste
Y h ld a e he change e made W dPad d c men . the text or object.
11. Click the Save button W Pa Sa a ba a 2. Click the Paste button on
a a . the Standard toolbar.
WordPad saves your recent changes. Or
Select Edit Paste
from the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <V>.
Lesson 7-11: Changing the Font

Type and Size
Figure 7-18
Select a font from the Font
list.
Figure 7-19
The Font dialog box.
Figure 7-18
Select the font style

The current font type. (Bold and/or Italic).
Select the font type. Change the size of

the font.
Special font
formatting
effects.
Preview of the current
font settings.
Change the color of
the font.
Figure 7-19
In hi le n, ll lea n h change he f n e i e and le. Al h gh ll be

working with the WordPad program, the basic procedure for changing the size and type of a
font is the same in all Windows programs.
Font list 1. Move the insertion point the very end of the document and press
<Enter> twice to add a blank line.
Other Ways to Change
Fonts: You are going to add your name to the document here, but first you want to use a
different font to make it stand out.
Select Format Font
from the menu, select 2. Click the Font list arrow on the Formatting toolbar.
the font options you A list appears with all the fonts that are available on your computer, listed in
want from the font alphabetical order. Since the e i n en gh m di la all he f n e a nce,
dialog box, then click you may have to scroll up or down the list until you find the font type you want.
OK. 3. Scroll up the Font list until you see the Bookman Old Style font, then
click the Bookman Old Style font.
Anything you type at this point will appear in the selected Bookman Old Style font.

4. Type Jane Plain.
The name Jane Plain appears in the Bookman Old Style font. You can also select text
and change it to a new font.
5. Select the line To the La Fanci Nails Company:.
In he ne e , e ll change he elec ed e C ie Ne f n e.
6. Click the Font list arrow and select Courier New from the Font list.
The selected text changes to the Courier New font. Font Size list
You can also change the size of a font and make it larger or smaller. Font size is Other Ways to Change
measured in points: the bigger the point number, the larger the size of the font. 10 point the Font Size:
and 12 point are the most commonly used font sizes. Changing the font size is similar
Select Format Font
to changing font types.
from the menu, select
7. Make sure the To the La Fanci Nails Company: line is still selected, the font options you
and click the Font Size list arrow. want from the font
A list of font sizes appears. dialog box, and click
8. Select 14 from the Font Size list. OK.
The font for the selected line is enlarged to 14 point.
S fa , e been ing he F ma ing lba change he e and i e f f n .
Another method of adjusting the type and size of fonts is to use the Font dialog box,
which you can open using the menu. Since not all Windows programs have a
Formatting toolbar, you should know how to format fonts with this method.
9. Select Format Font from the menu.
The Font dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-19. Notice there are options for
changing he f n e and i e, a ell a he f ma ing i n . Af e e
surveyed the Font dialog box, you can close it without making any changes by clicking
the Cancel button.
10. Click Cancel to close the Font dialog box without making any changes.
Quick Reference
Table 7-5: Examples of Font Types and Sizes
To Change Font Size:
Common Font Types Common Font Sizes
Arial 8 point
Click the Font Size list
Arial arrow on the Formatting
Comic Sans MS Arial 10 point toolbar and select the
point size from the list.
Courier New Arial 12 point Or
Times New Roman Select Format Font
Arial 14 point from the menu and select
the font size in the Font
dialog box.
To Change Font Type:
Click the Font list arrow
on the Formatting toolbar
and select a font type
from the list.
Or
Select Format Font
from the menu and select
the font type in the Font
dialog box.
Lesson 7-12: Using Bold, Italics

and Underline
Align Align
Figure 7-20 Font list Font script list Bold Underline Left Right
WordPad s Formatting
toolbar.
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21 Font Size Italics Font Color Center Bullets
list
The document with bold
and italics formatting.
Bold
Italics button
Other Ways to Italics:
Italics
Select Format Font
Figure 7-21
from the menu, select
Italic from the Font
Style box, and then
click OK. In the previous lesson, you learned how to format characters in a document by changing their
Press <Ctrl> + . font type and font size. This lesson will show you how to emphasize text in a document by
making the text darker and heavier (bold), slanted (italics), or by adding underlining.
Bold button 1. Select the text La Fanci Nails, located in the first body paragraph of
your document.
You can make the selected text stand out by formatting with Italics.
Quick Reference 2. Click the Italics button on the Formatting toolbar.
To Format Text with Bold, The selected text, La Fanci Nails, appears in italics. Notice that the Italics button is
Italics, or Underlining: pushed down on the Formatting toolbar, indicating the text is formatted with Italics.
I j a ea f ma cha ac e i h b ld nde line formatting.
Click the Bold, Italics,
or Underline button on 3. Select the line Subject: Glue Crisis.
the Formatting toolbar. Now format the selected text with bold formatting.
Or 4. Click the Bold button on the Formatting toolbar.
Select Format Font The selected text appears in bold. To remove the bold style, repeat step 4.
from the menu and select 5. Make sure Subject: Glue Crisis is still selected, then click the Bold
the formatting from the button on the Formatting toolbar.
Font Style list.
The bold style is removed from the selected text. You can remove italic and underline
Or formatting from text by using the same method, except you would click the Italics or
Press the <Ctrl> key and: Underline button.
 for Bold
 for Italics
 for Underlining

Lesson 7-13: Changing Paragraph

Alignment
This paragraph is left aligned. This paragraph Figure 7-22
is left aligned. This paragraph is left aligned.
This paragraph is left aligned. Place the insertion point in
Left Align the paragraph you want to
align, or select the
This paragraph is right aligned. This paragraph
is right aligned. This paragraph is right aligned. paragraph(s).
This paragraph is right aligned.
Right Align Figure 7-23

Clicking the Center button
This paragraph is center aligned. This
paragraph is center aligned. This paragraph is on the Formatting toolbar
center aligned. This paragraph is center
aligned.
centers the selected
paragraphs.
Figure 7-22 Centered
This paragraph is justified. This paragraph is Figure 7-24
justified. This paragraph is justified. This
paragraph is justified.
Left, right, centered, and
Justified justified paragraphs.
Figure 7-24
Align Right button
Center button
Figure 7-23
Align Left button
This lesson moves on to paragraph formatting and explains how to justify paragraphs or align
them to the left, right, or center of a page. These are common formatting tasks for all word
processing programs.
Quick Reference
1. Place the insertion point anywhere in the last line, Jane Plain, and then T Cha ge a Pa ag a h
click the Align Right button on the Formatting toolbar. Alignment:
The last line is aligned along the right side of the window.
Place the insertion point
2. Click and drag the mouse pointer to select the two body paragraphs, then in the paragraph and click
click the Center button on the Formatting toolbar. the Align Left, Center,
The selected paragraphs are centered on the page. or Align Right button.
3. Press the <End> key to move to the end of the current line, then press Or
<Enter>. Place the insertion point
Notice the new paragraph will be centered like he ne ab e i . Tha beca e hen in the paragraph, select
e <En e >, he ne a ag a h inhe i he f ma ing f m he a ag a h Format Paragraph
above it. from the menu and select
4. Select the two paragraphs again, and click the Align Left button on the
the alignment, from the
Alignment list.
Formatting toolbar.
The selected paragraphs are again aligned to the left.
5. Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar to save your work.
Lesson 7-14: Getting Help by

Contents
Figure 7-25
The Contents tab of the
Help window.
Figure 7-26
You can expand a Help
topic.
Figure 7-27
The displayed Help topic.
Figure 7-27
When d n kn h d me hing in Wind a Wind ba ed g am, d n

despair most programs come with a built-in help feature. Help is one of the greatest and
sadly, one of the least used features of most Windows programs. There is often more
information about how to use a program under the Help feature than there is in the program
manual! Many people actually learn how to use entire programs by simply using the Help
fea e f he g am hen he d n kn h d me hing.
Help allows you to try new, exciting things in programs all by yourself. It simply cannot be
stressed how important and useful the Help feature is. There are several ways you can get help
in Windows e ll l k a hem in he ne c le f le n .
F hi le n, imagine ha e een e e al f c -workers use different sized fonts
in hei W dPad d c men . Y decide i ime lea ned h change the size of fonts
in WordPad, so you decide to use the Help feature.
1. Make sure the WordPad program is open and press the <F1> key.
The <F1> key displays
help on hat o re
doing.

The Help window appears with the Contents tab in front, as shown in Figure 7-25. One
a ge hel i b g ing C n en . U ing Hel C n en i imila ing a
b k able f c n en . Hel C n en i a g d a ge gene al inf ma i n n a
ic, e eciall if i a bjec e n familia i h. The Hel C n en a e
organized in outline form. The book icons that appear to the left of a topic tell you
there are sub-topics. To view this information, you have to open or expand the topic by
clicking it.
2. Click the WordPad icon and then click the Format Text topic to expand
it.
The topic opens and a list of sub-topics appear under it, as shown in Figure 7-26. Options button
3. Click the Change a font type, style, or size topic (it has a question
mark icon that appears to the left of it).
Information on text formatting appears in the right pane of the Help window, as shown
in Figure 7-27.
You can also easily in an Hel ic
4. Click the Options button at the top of the dialog box and select Print
from the list.
The Print Topics box appears. We just want to print one topic.
5. Select Print Selected Topic and click OK.
The Print dialog box appears, ready to carry out your print command. Since you
already know how to print in Windows, save the paper and cancel the print job.
6. Click the Cancel button.
The Print dialog box closes and nothing is sent to the printer.
Quick Reference
To Get Help by Contents:
1. Press <F1> or select
Help from the menu bar,
and click the Contents
tab if necessary.
2. Scroll through the list and
click the help topic ou re
looking for.
3. Click any Help
subtopic(s).
To Move to a Previous
Help Screen or Topic:
Click the Back button.
To Print a Help Topic:
Click the Options button
and select Print.
Lesson 7-15: Getting Help with

the Help Index and Search
Figure 7-28
The Index tab of the Help
dialog box.
Figure 7-29
The Topics Found dialog
box.
Figure 7-30
Using the Help button.
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30 Click a control with the Help

cursor to view a description of
the control.
Two more methods of getting help are with the Help Index and Search. You use the Help
Index just like you would use the index in the back of a book.
1. I H a a , <F1> to open it.

2. Click the Index tab.
The Inde ab a ea in f n f he Hel ind . Thi ime, le ge me hel n
how to save files in WordPad.

3. Type Saving in the Type in the keyword to find box.
The Index topics list box displays all index entries that begin i h he d Sa ing ,
as shown in Figure 7-28. A help topic called Saving Text is listed le ee ha hi
topic is about.
4. Double-click the saving text topic.
The Topics Found dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-29. We need to choose a Help button
topic.
5. Double-click the Create, open, or save a WordPad document topic.
Information on saving changes to a document appears in the right pane of the Help
window.
The Search function is another way that you can search for Help topics. Search is much
m e ecific and e f l han ei he Hel C n en he Hel Inde . Sea ch
Help cursor
allows you to search for specific information.
6. Click the Search tab.
Next, you must specify what Help topic you want to look for.
7. Type Save in the Type the word(s) you want to find box and click the
List Topics button.
Both the words and topics lists are updated to show all Help topics that contain the
d Sa e. Quick Reference
You can refine a Help search by typing in more than one word. To Use the Help Index:
8. Click after the word Save in the Type the word(s) you want to find box. 1. Press <F1> or select
Press the <Spacebar> and type File. Click Display. Help Help Topics
Both the words and topics lists are updated and display only those help topics that from the menu and click
c n ain b h he d Sa e and File in hem. the Index tab.
9. Double-click the WordPad overview topic. 2. Type the keyword(s) that
describe the help topic
Windows displays the WordPad overview Help topic.
you are looking for.
10. Click the Close button. 3. Double-click the help
During your journey with Windows you will probably come across dialog boxes with a topic ou re looking for.
number of confusing controls and options. To help you find out what the various
controls and options in a dialog box do, many dialog boxes contain a Help button, To Find a Help Topic:
located right next to the Close button. 1. Press <F1> or select
11. Select Format Paragraph from the menu. Help from the menu and
click the Search tab.
The Pa ag a h dial g b a ea . N ice he Hel b n l ca ed in he dial g b
i le ba j he lef f he dial g b cl e b n. 2. Type the keyword(s) that
best describes the topic
12. Click the Help button. you are looking for.
The mouse pointer changes, indicating you can point to anything in the dialog box to 3. Double-click the Help
find out what it does, as shown in Figure 7-30. topic ou re looking for.
13. Click the Alignment list arrow. To See what a Control in a
A screen tip appears with a brief description of the options in the Alignment list. Dialog Box Does:
14. Click Cancel. 1. Click the dialog box
Tha i e d ne lea ning he various ways to get help in Windows. If you know how to Wha Thi b
ea g am Hel fea e, ma ne e need a end an he c m e cla (located right next to the
everything you need to know is there, buried somewhere in Help. Make yourself a promise Close button).
that the next time you have a question about how to do something in a program, you will try 2. Click the control you want
ing he g am b il -in Help feature before you reach for the manual or ask one of your more information on with
computer-savvy friends. the Help cursor.
Lesson 7-16: Saving and Opening

Files in Different Locations
Look in list Return to the
Figure 7-31 Select the drive or folder where you last folder
want to open or save the file. visited. Create a new folder.
The Open/Save toolbar.
Figure 7-32
Figure 7-31
The Open dialog box for Move up one Display in
the WordPad program. folder level. different views.
Figure 7-32
B a ing file in ela ed f lde igh a a , make hem ea ie find and d n

Open button have to do as much file management later. This lesson will show you how to save your files in
diffe en l ca i n . Y ll al lea n h a e file in diffe en file f ma .
Other Ways to Open a
File:
1. If necessary, open the WordPad program.
Select File Open
from the menu. 2. Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.
The Open dialog box for the WordPad program appears, as shown in Figure 7-32.
Bef e e en a file, fi le ake a cl e l k a he O en dialog box.
Notice the toolbar that appears near the top of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-31.
Several of the buttons on the toolbar should look somewhat familiar he e he ame
lba b n ha ll find in M C m e and Wind E l e . When e
opening or saving a file you can navigate through the drives, folders, and files on your
computer just like you do in My Computer and Windows Explorer.
Your computer stores information in files and folders, just like you store information in
a filing cabine . T en a file, m fi find and en he f lde he e i a ed.
The Open dialog box has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your
c m e drives and folders. Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful:
Look in list: Click to list the drives on your computer
and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose contents you
want to display.

Up button: Click to move up one folder level.

The Open dialog box reads the contents of the practice folder or disk and displays any You can perform basic
W d f Wind (*.d c) file . He e h can ie all the file types in the root file management, such
directory on the drive not just Word for Windows files. as renaming, deleting,
4. Click the File of type list and select All Documents (*.*). moving, and copying
files and folders from
The Open dialog box is updated to display all the files in the root directory of the hard
inside any Open or
d i e. Le en a file.
Save dialog box, just
5. Double-click the Canada Meeting Memo file. as if you were in My
WordPad opens the Canada Meeting Memo file. Normally, when you save an existing Computer.
file, i saved with its original file name in its original location or folder. There are
times, however, when you will need to save a copy of a file in a new location, with a
different file name, or in a different file format.
6. Select File Save As from the menu.
The Save As dialog box appears.
Whenever you save or store files on a computer, try to save them in a related folder.
F e am le, migh c ea e a Pe nal Le e f lde e all e nal
c e ndence file and a B ine f lde f ur business-related files.
NOTE: If d n ecif a d i e f lde hen e a ing a file, he g am
will save the file in the current folder the drive and folder that happens to be
open at that time. This can often make the file more difficult to find in the
future.
7. Double-click the Trade Show folder.
The Trade Show folder opens this is where you want to save the file.
Earlier in this chapter, you learned that computer programs save and open files in their
own different types or formats, just like people from different countries speak different
languages. But just as some people can speak more than one language, many computer
programs can open and save files using other file types or formats. WordPad normally
saves files in Word for Windows (*.d c) f ma , b i ea a e file in diffe en
formats.
8. Click the Save as type list arrow. Quick Reference
A list of different types of file formats appears. To Save a File in a New
9. Select Text Documents (*.txt) from the Save as type list. Location:
One more thing before we save the file we want to save it with a different name. If 1. Select File Save As
you clicked the Save button at this point, WordPad would save the file in the Trade from the menu.
Sh f lde i h he iginal file name, Canada Mee ing Mem . 2. Open the drive and/or
To save the file with a different name, simply type the new file name in the File Name folder where you want to
box. save the file and click
Save.
10. Click in the File Name box and type Canada Letter.
To Save a File in a
11. Click Save and click Yes to confirm the file format. Different File Format:
WordPad saves the Canada Letter as a text file in the Trade Show folder. 1. Select File Save As
12. Close the WordPad program. from the menu,
2. Select the file format from
the Save as type list,
and click Save.
Chapter Seven Review
Lesson Summary
Using Menus
Open a menu by clicking the menu name with the mouse or by pressing <Alt> and then the
underlined letter in the menu.
Using Toolbars
Click the toolbar button you want to use.
To See What a Toolbar Button Does: Position the pointer over the toolbar button and wait a
second. A ScreenTip will appear above the button.
Filling Out a Dialog Box

Be able to identify text boxes, list boxes, check boxes, list arrows, and buttons.
Use a scroll bar to move up or do n hen a list or screen can t displa all its information at once.
To Select a Dialog Box Control: Click the control with the mouse, or press <Tab> to move to the
next control in the dialog box or <Shift> + <Tab> to move to the previous control until you arrive at
the desired control.
To Use a Text Box: Type the information directly into the text box.
To Use a List Box: Click the option you want from the list box. Use the scroll bar to move up and
down through its options.
To Use a List Arrow: Click the arrow to display the list options. Click an option from the list to
select it.
To Save Changes and Close a Dialog Box: Click the OK button or press <Enter>.
To Close a Dialog Box Without Saving Changes: Click the Cancel button or press <Esc>.
Entering Text in the WordPad Program

To Enter Text in WordPad: Click in the WordPad screen to begin typing your text.
Editing Text
To Move the Insertion Point: Use the arrow keys on the keyboard or click where you want to
place the insertion point with the pointer.
To Insert Text: Move the insertion point where you want to insert the text and then type the text
you want to insert.
To Delete Text: The <Delete> key deletes text after, or to the right, of the insertion point. The
<Backspace> key deletes text before, or to the left, of the insertion point.

Saving and Opening a File

To Save a File: Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar or select File Save from the
menu.
To Open a File: Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar or select File Open from the
menu.
Selecting, Replacing and Deleting Text

To Select Text with the Mouse: Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text you
want to select. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the insertion point across the text,
releasing the mouse button once the text is selected. Or double-click a word to select it.
To Select Text with the Keyboard: Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text you
want to select and press and hold the <Shift> key while you use the arrow keys to select the text.
To Replace Text: Replace text by first selecting it, then typing the new text.
To Deselect Text: Click anywhere on the computer screen.
To Delete Text: Select the text. Press the <Delete> key.
Using Undo
To Undo Your Last Action: Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, or select Edit
Undo from the menu, or press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
Printing a File
Print a file by clicking the Print button on the Standard toolbar, or by selecting File Print from
the menu, or by pressing <Ctrl> + .
Select File Print from the menu to display the Print dialog box, which allows you to specify
printing options such as printing specific pages or multiple copies.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Text

To Cut an Object or Text: Select the text or object you want to cut. Click the Cut button on the
Standard toolbar, or select Edit Cut from the menu, or press <Ctrl> + <X>.
To Copy an Object or Text: Select the text or object you want to copy. Click the Copy button on
the Standard toolbar, or select Edit Copy from the menu, or press <Ctrl> + <C>.
To Paste a Cut or Copied Object: Place the insertion point where you want to paste the text or
object. Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar, or select Edit Paste from the menu, or
press <Ctrl> + <V>.
Changing the Font Type and Size

To Change Font Size: Click the Font Size list arrow on the Formatting toolbar and select the point
size from the list, or select Format Font from the menu and select the font size in the dialog
box.
To Change Font Type: Click the Font list arrow on the Formatting toolbar and select a font type
from the list, or select Format Font from the menu and select the font type in the Font dialog
box.
Using Bold, Italics and Underline

Format text with bold, italics, or underlining by clicking the corresponding button (Bold, Italics, or
Underline) on the Formatting toolbar or by selecting Format Font from the menu and selecting
the formatting from the Font Style list. You can also press the <Ctrl> key and:
 for Bold
 for Italics
 for Underlining.
Changing Paragraph Alignment

Change a paragraph s alignment b placing the insertion point in the paragraph and then clicking
the Align Left, Center, or Align Right button on the Formatting toolbar, or by selecting Format
Paragraph from the menu and selecting the paragraph alignment from the Alignment list.
Getting Help by Contents

Pressing the <F1> ke displa s information on hat ou re currently doing.
To Get Help by Contents: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu bar, and click the Contents
tab if necessar . Scroll through the list and click the help topic ou re looking for. Double-click any
subtopics if necessary.
Click the Back button to move to the previous help screen or topic.
To Print a Help Topic: Click the Options button and select Print Topic.
Getting Help with the Help Index and Search

To Use the Help Index: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu bar and click the Index tab and
type the keyword(s) that describe the Help topic you are looking for. Double-click the Help topic
that ou re looking for.
To Find a Help Topic: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu bar and click the Search or Find
tab and type the keyword(s) that describe the help topic you are looking for. Double-click the Help
topic that ou re looking for.
To See what a Control in a Dialog Box Does: Point to a control and click the Wha Thi
button. Click the control you want more information on with the Help cursor.
Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations

To Save a File in a New Location: Select File Save As from the menu, open the drive and/or
folder where you want to save the file and click Save.
To Save a File in a Different File Format: Select File Save As from the menu, select the file
format from the Save as type list, and click Save.
Quiz
1. You can open a menu in a program by: (Select all that apply.)
A. Clicking the name of the menu with the mouse.
B. Pressing <Esc> and then the underlined letter in the menu name.
C. Pressing <Alt> and then the underlined letter in the menu name.
D. Sa ing C m e , en he ( a e he name f he men he e) men .

2. How can you move the insertion point in WordPad? (Select all that apply.)
A. B e ing he a ke n c m e ke b a d.
B. By using the mouse and clicking where you want to place the insertion point with the
pointer.
C. By selecting the Window Move Insertion Point command.
D. The insertion point is an immovable bjec and can be m ed.
3. Which key deletes text before, or to the left, of the insertion point?
A. <Page Up>
B. <Page Down>
C. <Delete>
D. <Backspace>
4. Typing overwrites, or replaces, any text that is selected (True or False?)
5. Which of the following statements is NOT true?

A. You can undo the last action or mistake you made by clicking the Undo button on the
toolbar or by selecting Edit Undo from the menu.
B. Y can in he file e king n b clicking he P in b n n he lba
or by selecting File Print from the menu.
C. You should save your work or file whenever you think about it.
D. Files names can contain up to 8 characters.
6. The following will cut selected text or information and place it on the
clipboard (Select all that apply.)
A. Pressing <Ctrl> + <X>.
B. Pressing <Ctrl> + <Delete>.
C. Clicking the Cut button on the toolbar.
D. Selecting Edit Cut from the menu.
7. U , a -screen (True
or False?)
8. Pressing <F5> di a H a (T Fa ?)
Homework
1. Either insert your Practice Files CD, or navigate to where your practice files are
l ca ed. If d n kn he e he a e, a k in c .
2. Start WordPad. Open the Homework 3 file from your practice files.
3. Select File Sa e A f m he men . Sa e he H me k 3 file a Mem n
the Practice CD in the D: drive, or in your practice files.
4. Move the insertion point to the end of the TO: line, press the <Spacebar> and type
All S aff.
5. Select the top three address lines.
6. With the top address lines still selected, click the Center button on the Formatting
toolbar to center align them.
7. Selec he N h Sh e T a el line and change he f n e Time Ne
Roman, the font size to 14 pt., and apply bold formatting.
8. Wi h he N h Sh e T a el line ill elec ed, e he <Dele e> ke eae
the line. Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar to undo the deletion.
9. Selec he e Sand a Wille , C mm nica i n Di ec and c i b clicking he
Copy button on the Standard toolbar
10. Move to the very end of the document, press the <Enter> key to add a blank line,
e Since el , and e <En e > f ime add e e al blank line .
11. Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar to paste the text you copied in Step 9.
12. Save your work and exit WordPad.
Quiz Answers
1. A and C. Clicking the menu name or pressing the <Alt> key and the underlined letter in
the menu will both open a menu.
2. A and B. Either method will move the insertion point.
3. D. The <Backspace> key deletes text before, or to the left, of the insertion point. The
<Delete> key deletes text after, or to the right, of the insertion point
4. True. Typing replaces any selected text.
5. D. MS-DOS files had an 8-character limit, but Windows XP file names can contain up to
255 characters.
6. A, C, and D. All of these three methods will cut selected text or information and place it
on the clipboard.

7. True. Nothing visible happens hen c me hing, b d n le hi f l !
Anything you copy is placed behind the scenes on the invisible Windows clipboard.
8. False. <F1> is the Windows help key.
Chapter Eight:
Working with Files
and Folders
How to use the mouse
Understanding storage devices, folders, and files
Using My Computer to navigate through folders and files click and drag, and
right-click.
Opening, creating, and renaming files and folders
How to use menus,
Copying, moving, and deleting files and folders toolbars, and dialog
boxes.
Restoring a deleted file, and emptying the Recycle Bin
Changing how information is displayed

Selecting multiple files and folders
Finding a file using the Search Companion
Using Windows Explorer
When you work at a desk, unless you make an effort to stay organized, all your papers and
files begin to pile up and become disorganized. It takes a little more time, but the same
phenomenon occurs when working with Windows the files you create using your computer
start to become cluttered, and are harder and harder to find.
In hi cha e , ll ake fi e be nd he Wind ba ic and en e he ld f
file management. Y ll lea n h Wind e inf ma i n in file and f lde , j like a
file cabine d e . Y ll find ill need clean and gani e file and f lde f m
time to time, just like you would the contents of a file cabinet. This chapter explains how to
organize your computer by creating folders to store related information, how to move and
copy files between folders, how to delete and rename files and folders, and how to retrieve a
deleted file if you change your mind. You can perform file management using several
different programs My Computer, Windows Explorer, Files and Settings Transfer Wizard,
and the Open and Save dialog boxes found in most programs.

Storage Devices, Folders and Files
Figure 8-1 Taxes Love Letters
Letter to Bill
How information is stored Investments
Letter to Mary
in a file cabinet.
Figure 8-2 Letters
How information is stored

on a disk.
A file cabinet s information is A folder may contain several
organized and grouped into files and even several
folders. subfolders.
Figure 8-1
A computer stores
information on disks.
Information on a disk is A folder may contain several

Figure 8-2 organized and grouped into files and subfolders.
folders or directories.
In order to understand file management, you need to understand how your computer stores
information. Filing cabinets store information in files, which are organized and grouped in
folders and kept in big drawers. Computers also store information in files, which are also
organized and grouped in folders, and stored not in big drawers but on disks. A disk drive is
the part of the computer that reads and writes information onto disks, just like a tape recorder
records and plays music on a cassette. There are four main types of disks and disk drives that
computers use to store their information, as shown in the following table.
Table 8-1: Common Computer Disks/Drives

Type Drive Letter Size Description
A or B 1.44 MB Floppy disks are the square plastic things that look
like coffee coasters. Flopp drives can t hold a lot
of information, but the re ideal for moving small
files, such as word processing documents,
between computers.
Floppy Disk
C Over 10 GB Local disks, or hard disks, hide permanently inside

our computer. Your computer s hard disk is its
main filing cabinet where it stores almost all of its
programs and files.
Local Disk

Chapter Eight: Working with Files and Folders 193
Type Drive Letter Size Description

D or above 600 MB (CD) Compact discs, or CD-ROMs, look like the audio
4.7 GB (DVD) discs you play in your stereo. CD-ROMs are cheap
and they can store a lot of information, which is
h the re used to install soft are for games and
CD-ROM or programs with a lot of multimedia.
DVD
DVDs are similar to CDs, but they hold even more
information. DVDs are becoming the most common
storage device for movies.
D or above Over 100 MB Removable storage drives have features of both

hard disks and floppy drives. Removable drives are
Removable like a floppy drive because they read and write
Drive information on small, removable cassettes. They
are like hard drives because each cassette can
usually hold more than 100 MB and is almost as
fast as a hard drive.
Most computers come with a floppy drive, a hard drive, and a CD-ROM drive. However,
many new computers omit the floppy drive and have a CD-ROM drive and a DVD drive
instead. Your computer labels these drives with letters, as shown in Table 8-1: Common
Computer Disks/Drives.
Just as liquids are measured in quarts and gallons, computers save their information in units
called bytes. Unlike gallons, computers use the metric system, so 1,000 bytes make up a
kilobyte and 1,000,000 (one million) bytes make up a megabyte, as shown in Table 8-2: How
Memory is Measured.
Table 8-2: How Memory is Measured

Term Description Size
Byte A byte can store a single character, A single character
such as the letter J or number 8 .
Kilobyte A kilobyte (K) is about 1,000 bytes 1,024 bytes
(K or KB) (1,024 to be exact). A kilobyte is
equivalent to a page of double-spaced
typing.
Megabyte A megabyte (MB) is about one million 1,048,576 bytes
(MB or MEG) bytes about as much text as an
average-length novel.
Gigabyte (GB or A gigabyte (GB) is about one trillion 1,000,000,000 bytes
GIG) bytes about as much text as several
encyclopedia sets.
Lesson 8-2: Using My Computer to

See Wha in Yo Com e
Figure 8-3
My Computer displays the
drives, folders
(directories), and files that
are in your computer.
Figure 8-4
The Local Disk (C:)
Properties dialog box.
Figure 8-5
The My Computer toolbar.
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-3
Moves back or Moves back or Changes how
up to the up to the the contents
previous folder previous folder of the folder
or level. or level. are displayed.
Figure 8-5 Moves forward Search for files Displays a

to the last and folders on history of files
subfolder or your computer you have
level. or on the opened
network. recently.
When an ee ha in a file cabine , im l ll en ne f i d a e . Y

can ie he inf ma i n ed n c m e d i e in m ch he ame ay by
opening the drive you want to access. This lesson will show you how to look at the drives,
folders, and files in your computer.
Start button 1. Click the Start button and select My Computer.
The My Computer window appears, as shown in Figure 8-3. The main window lists all
the drives on the computer. Since your computer may be set up differently, the contents
of your computer may differ from those shown in Figure 8-3. Wan ee ha in ide
something? All you have to do is double-click the drive, folder, or file you want to
open.
My Computer N ice ha al h gh i n echnicall a g am, M C m e a ea in i n
window, with its own buttons, scroll bars, and menus. The My Computer window
work j like an he ind e been king i h. Y can m e i , e i e i ,
and minimize it.

2. Double-click the Local Disk (C:) icon.

The contents of the (C:) drive appear in the window. What do all those symbols in the
window mean? Each item you see has an icon, or symbol, to help you identify what
e f i em i i . We ll ake a l k a ha each f he e mb l mean in an c ming
Local Disk (C:)
lesson.
To move back to the previous folder or level, click the Up button on the toolbar.
3. Click the Up button on the toolbar.
Y e m ed f m he (C:) d i e back M C m e .
Now that you know the procedure for displaying the contents of a drive, move on to Up button
the next step to display the properties of the Local Disk (C:) drive.
4. Right-click the Local Disk (C:) icon and select Properties from the
shortcut menu.
The disk drive hums as Windows examines it. After a moment, the Local Disk (C:)
Properties window appears, as shown in Figure 8-4. The Properties window displays
the amount of used and free space on the disk in megabytes (MB) and gigabytes (GB).
Refe he e i le n if e nfamilia i h he e e m .
5. Click the Properties dialog box Close button.
The Properties dialog box closes. Go ahead and close the My Computer window to
complete the lesson.
6. Close the My Computer window.
Ge ing he hang f ening and e l ing c m e ? G d, beca e e ll be d ing a l
more snooping inside the contents of your computer throughout the rest of this chapter.
Quick Reference
To View the Contents of
Your Computer:
and select My Computer.
To View the Contents of a
Disk Drive:
Follow the above step to
open My Computer and
then double-click the drive
you want to open.
T Vie a I e
Properties:
Right-click the drive,
folder, or file and select
Properties from the
shortcut menu.
Lesson 8-3: Opening a Folder

Figure 8-6
Double-click a folder to
open it and view its
contents.
Figure 8-7
The files and folders
appear in the window.
Figure 8-6
The Address bar displays the

name of the current drive and
folder
Figure 8-7
Your computer stores related files together in folders, just like you do with your file cabinet.
In the previous lesson, you learned how to use My Computer to view the contents of your
c m e and en a di k d i e and di la i c n en . In hi le n, e ll g a li le bi
further and show you how to open a folder.
Windows XP give e n ecial f lde named M D c men as a
c n enien l ca i n e all file . He e h en he M D c men f lde (and
any other folder).
1. Click the Start button and select My Documents.

My Documents The contents of My Documents appear in the window. The My Documents folder
contains several folders, or subfolders. If you think about it, you probably do the same
thing keep several subfolders inside a larger folder in your own file cabinet.
2. Double-click the My Pictures folder.
The contents of the My Pictures folder appear in the Window. Notice the Address bar
displays the current folder you are in: My Pictures.
My Pictures

Instead of clicking the Up button several times to jump back through several levels of
folders, you can click the Address bar to quickly jump to the root directory of any of
drive on your computer.
NOTE: Thi i he e he c m a i n e e been ing be een a file cabinet and a
computer begins to break down a bit. When you file things in your file
cabinet, you probably never have more than two, possibly three, nested
f lde (i.e. a f lde in ide an he f lde ). Y c m e f lde , n he
other hand, can contain as many subfolders as you want, nested as deep as
you want, so you can have a folder inside a folder inside a folder ad
infinitum.
3. Click the Address list arrow.
A li f c m e d i es and the folder you are currently in appears. You can
click any folder or drive to go to that folder or drive.
4. Select Local Disk (C:) from the list.
You return to the root directory of the (C:) drive. The Address bar is a fast way to select
a drive, especially if you are in a folder that is nested several levels deep.
Y can hink f he Add e Ba a c m a beca e e en hen e e l ing Address list
unfamiliar folders nested deep in the far recesses of your computer, it always tells you where
you are. If you get really lost, you can always click the Address list arrow and jump back to
the familiar (C:) drive.
All this moving around your computer and opening disk drives and folders is a little boring,
b i me hing ha e ge ed if ant to have any degree of proficiency with
Windows. Going back to our trusty file cabinet metaphor, imagine what would happen if you
didn kn h en he d a e and f lde in file cabine . H ld find
your tax returns if you were audited, or your insurance policy if you were in an accident?
Opening disk drives and folders, and being able to navigate through the contents of your
computer are among the most important Windows skills you can learn.
Quick Reference
To Open a Folder:
Double-click the folder.
To Move Back or Up to the
Previous Level or Folder:
Click the Up button on
the toolbar.
Or
Click the Back button on
the toolbar.
Or
Click the Address list
arrow on the toolbar and
select the appropriate
drive or folder.
Lesson 8-4: Creating and

Renaming a Folder
Figure 8-8
The File and Folder Tasks
menu.
Figure 8-9
Every Windows XP folder provides
A new folder. easy access to common file and folder
management tasks. You can select a
file or folder and then click one of the
tasks described in Table 8-3: File and
Folder Tasks.
Figure 8-8
Figure 8-9
Windows XP comes with the My Documents folder which you can use to save your files in,
b ne la e ll an e and h i n and c ea e n f lde in ide he
File and Folder My Documents folder or on the network to help you better organize your files. This lesson
Tasks menu will show you how to create a ne f lde h ld and gani e file . Y ll al lea n
Other Ways to Create a how to rename an existing folder.
Folder:
Right-click an empty 1. Click the Start button and select My Computer from the menu.
area of the window and The My Computer window appears.
select New Folder 2. Double-click the Local Disk (C:) icon.
from the shortcut menu. The contents of the (C:) drive appear.
Windows XP makes working with files and folders more efficient by listing the most
common file and folder management tasks next to the folder contents.
NOTE: You may have to resize the window to view these tasks.
3. Make sure the File and Folder Tasks menu is expanded.
Le e hi men c ea e a ne f lde .

4. Click the Make a new folder task in the File and Folder Tasks menu.
A ne f lde a ea i h a em a name Ne F lde a h n in Figure 8-9.
Now all you have to do is move on to the next step and give the new folder a name.
5. Type Practice Folder as the new folder name and press <Enter>.
Your new Practice Folder is located in the root directory, or top folder, of the
(C:) drive. You can create a folder inside any existing folder the same way by
opening the folder and then repeating Steps 3-5. You can create as many folders as you
like in order to develop your own filing system to help organize your files and folders.
Open the Practice Folder to display its contents.
NOTE: A file name can contain up to 255 characters, including spaces. File names
cannot contain the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > | Other Ways to Rename a
Folder:
6. Double-click the Practice Folder to open it.
Right-click the folder
The c n en f he P ac ice F lde a ea in he ind . Tha igh , he e n hing
and select Rename
there. The Practice Folder is an empty folder, since you just created it.
from the shortcut menu.
Le m e back he di ec .
7. Click the Up button.
Y can ea il change he name f a f lde . He e h :
8. Click the Practice Folder icon.
N le ename he f lde . He e h :
9. Click the Rename this folder task in the Files and Folders Tasks menu, Quick Reference
type Temp Folder and press <Enter>.
The P ac ice F lde i enamed Tem F lde . To Create a New Folder:
1. Open the disk or folder
NOTE: Because you change the file path of all the files stored within a folder, be where you want to create
careful when you rename a folder. For example, a hyperlink that uses this file the new folder.
path: C:\My Documents\Picnic link a file n k an m e if he file
path is changed to C:\My Documents\Picnic Project. 2. Select the Make a new
folder task from the File
and Folder Tasks menu.
Table 8-3: File and Folder Tasks Or
Task Description Right-click any empty
Make a new folder Creates a new folder. area in the window and
select New Folder
Rename this folder Gives the selected file or folder a new name. from the shortcut menu.
Moves the selected items to the destination you choose. 3. Type a name for the
Move this folder
folder and press <Enter>.
Copy this folder Copies the selected items to the destination you choose. To Rename a Folder:
Publish this folder to the Web Transfers a copy of the selected items to a public Web page so Click the folder to select
that you can share them with other people. it, select the Rename this
folder task from the File
Share this folder Makes the selected folder available to computers on a network and Folder Tasks menu,
so that other people can access it. type a name for the folder
Sends an e-mail message with copies of the selected items and press <Enter>.
E- ail hi f lde file
attached. Or
Delete this folder Deletes the selected items and sends them to the Recycle Bin. Right-click the folder,
select Rename from the
shortcut menu, type a
name for the folder and
press <Enter>.
Lesson 8-5: Copying, Moving and

Deleting a Folder
Figure 8-10
To move a folder, drag it to
a new location on your
computer, in this case to
the Temp Folder.
Figure 8-11
The Move Items dialog
box lets you specify where
you want to move or copy
a file or folder.
Y babl d n eorganize the folders in your file cabinet very often and you probably
n need m e c he f lde n c m e e f en, ei he . When find
you do need to move or copy a folder however, you can do so by using one of two simple
methods:
Clicking and dragging.
To copy a folder, hold Using the File and Folder Tasks menu.
down the <Ctrl> key as
you drag the folder to Y ll lea n h e b h me h d in hi le n and h dele e a f lde hen n
the new location. longer need it.
1. Create a new folder called My Stuff in your Local Disk (C:) drive.
You learned how to create a new folder in the previous lesson.
Other Ways to Move a 2. Click and drag the My Stuff folder to the Temp Folder, as shown in
File or Folder: Figure 8-10.
Cut the file or folder by Already forgot how to click and drag? If so, here it is one more time: position the
selecting Edit Cut mouse over the My Stuff folder, click and hold down the mouse button as you move
from the menu or the pointer to the Temp Folder, then release the mouse button.
pressing <Ctrl> + <X>, The M S ff f lde i m ed in ide he Tem F lde . Le make e i ked.
moving to the desired
location and then
3. Double-click the Temp Folder to open it.
pasting the file or folder Ye , he e he M S ff f lde .
by selecting Edit He e an he ef l me h d f m ing f lde
Paste from the menu, 4. Click the My Stuff folder to select it.
or pressing <Ctrl> + Once you have selected the folder you want to move, go to the File and Folder Tasks
<V>. menu.
5. Click the Move this folder task from the File and Folder Tasks menu.
The Move Items dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-11. This is where you tell
Windows where you want to move the selected folder.

The Move Items dialog box displays the drives and folders on your computer in a
hierarchical view. A plus symbol ( ) or a minus symbol ( ) beside a folder means a
folder contains subfolders. Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can display the
hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign ( ) beside the folder.
6. Click the My Computer plus symbol.
My Computer expands and displays its subfolders.
The Local Disk (C:) is where you want to move the My Stuff folder.
7. Click the Local Disk (C:) icon and click Move.
The dial g b cl e . Le ee if he f lde eall m ed he igh .
8. Click the Up button on the toolbar to move up to the root directory.
Quick Reference
The My Stuff folder is moved from the Temp Folder back to the root directory of the
(C:) drive. To Move a Folder:
If you can move a folder you can copy a folder: to copy a folder, hold down the <Ctrl> Drag the folder to the
key while you drag the folder. desired location (you
9. Press and hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the My Stuff folder
might have to open
another My Computer
to the Temp Folder.
window).
Al h gh can ee i , he M S uff folder has been copied to the Temp Folder.
Or
Le make e.
1. Select the folder and click
10. Double-click the Temp Folder to open it. the Move this folder task
The contents of the Temp Folder appear in the window. Sure enough, the My Stuff from the File and Folder
folder has been copied there. Tasks menu.
11. Click the Up button to move back to the root directory. 2. Select the folder or drive
Ne , e ll dele e a f lde . where you want to move
12. Click the Temp Folder to select it and then press the <Delete> key. the folder and click Move.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the deletion. To Copy a Folder:
13. Click Yes to delete the folder. Hold down the <Ctrl> key
The Temp Folder and all its contents are deleted and disappear from the window. while you drag the folder
Windows places any deleted files or folders in the Recycle Bin in case you change your to the desired location
mind la e n and decide an e e he file f lde . We ll di c he (you might have to open
Recycle Bin in an upcoming lesson. another window).
Or
NOTE: Deleting a folder can be dangerous. Before you delete a folder, make sure it
d e n c n ain an im an file . If d n kn ha he c n en f a 1. Select the folder and click
f lde a e, h ldn dele e i . the Copy this folder task
in the File and Folder
14. Delete the My Stuff folder by repeating steps 12 and 13 and then close Tasks menu.
the My Computer window.
2. Select the drive or folder
We e ked n c ing and m ing f lde l ca i n n he ame d i e, b can where you want to copy
also copy a folder to a different drive by dragging it to the drive icon where you want it the folder and click Copy.
c ied. If can ee he d i e f lde where you want to move or copy something, you
To Delete a Folder:
can open a second My Computer window and drag the folder from one window to the other.
1. Select the folder and
press <Delete>.
Or
Select the folder and click
the Delete this folder
task from the File and
Folder Tasks menu.
2. Click Yes to confirm the
folder deletion.
Lesson 8-6: Opening, Renaming

and Deleting a File
Figure 8-12
The Open Me file in the
Notepad program.
Figure 8-13
Select a file to display the
File and Folder Tasks
menu, or right-click a file
to display a list of Figure 8-12
commands.
You can rename a file by selecting the
file and clicking the Rename this file
task from the File and Folder Tasks
menu
or b right-clicking the file and
selecting Rename from the shortcut
menu. Figure 8-13
In he a fe le n , e lea ned all ab f lde how to open, rename, move, copy,

and dele e hem. In he ne c le f le n e ll be king i h he files that are stored in
those folders. Working with files is very, very similar to working with folders. So similar, in
fact, that the procedures for opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting a file are
exactly the same as opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting a folder!
Start button 1. Click the Start button and select My Computer from the menu.
The My Computer window appears.
2. Navigate to and open your Practice folder.
F ll in c di ec i n elec he a ia e d i e and f lde he e
your practice files are located.
My Computer 3. Find and double-click the Open Me file.
The Open Me file opens in the NotePad program the program it was created in, as
Open Me shown in Figure 8-12. You could review, make changes to, and then save the Open Me
file if you wanted to at this point.
4. Click the Notepad program Close button to close the program and the
Open Me file.
The Notepad program closes.
Y e al ead lea ned h ename and dele e a f lde , he ne fe e h ld
be really easy: files are renamed and deleted in exactly the same way.
5. Click the Open Me file to select it.
Now we can rename the Open Me file using the File and Folder Tasks menu.
6. Click the Rename this file task from the File and Folder Tasks menu.
Type Text File as the new name for the folder, then press <Enter>.
The O en Me file i enamed Te File .

When you no longer need a file, delete it.

7. Click the Text File to select it, and then press the <Delete> key.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the file deletion.
8. Click Yes.
The Text File is deleted and disappears from the window.
Dele ing a file i n i e a dange a dele ing a f lde , b h ld al a
consider whether or not you might need the file again. D n dele e a file nle e
ab l el e ill ne e need i again. And NEVER dele e a file if d n
know what it is.
9. Close the My Computer window. Other Ways to Rename a
File:
Right-click the file and
shortcut menu.
Other Ways to Delete a

File:
select Delete from the
shortcut menu.
Quick Reference
To Open a File:
Double-click the file.
To Rename a File:
1. Click the file to select it,
then select the Rename
this file task in the File
and Folder Tasks menu.
Or
shortcut menu
2. Type a name for the file
and press <Enter>.
To Delete a File:
1. Click the file to select it
and select the Delete this
file task from the File and
Folder Tasks menu.
Or
Select the file and press
the <Delete> key.
folder deletion.
Lesson 8-7: Copying and Moving a

File
Figure 8-14
To move a file, click and
drag the file to the desired
location.
Figure 8-15
The Copy Items dialog
box.
Figure 8-15
Figure 8-14
The procedure for moving and copying files is no different from moving or copying folders.
This lesson about moving and copying files should be a refresher for you.
Other Ways to Move or If nece a , f ll in c di ec i n elec he appropriate drive and
Copy a file: folder where your practice files are located.
Click the file to select it, When copying or moving files or folders, you may find it easier if you have two
select Edit Move to windows open at the same time: one window with the source file(s) and another
or Copy to from the window for the destination where you want to move or copy the file(s).
menu. 3. Click and drag the Current Budget file to the Accounting folder.
The Current Budget file is moved inside the Accounting folder.
Open the Accounting folder to make sure the file was moved.
4. Double-click the Accounting folder.
Sure enough, the Current Budget file has been moved to the Accounting folder.
To copy a file using the click and drag method, press the <Ctrl> key as you drag the
file to a new folder.
5. Click the Current Budget file.
Now that the file is selected, you can move it to a different location.
6. Click the Copy this file task in the File and Folder Tasks menu.
The Copy Items dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-15. Now you can tell
Windows where you want to move the selected file.

The Copy Items dialog box displays the drives and folders on your computer in a
hierarchical view. A plus symbol ( ) or a minus symbol ( ) beside a folder means a
folder contains several subfolders. Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can
display the hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign ( ) beside the
folder.
Now copy the file to the Desktop of your computer.
7. Select Desktop in the Copy Items dialog box and click Copy.
The Current Budget file is c ied c m e De k .
NOTE: Some people actually do save their most important files to the Desktop so that
he n l e hem. J make e ha d n a e man file
there nobody likes a messy desktop!
We d n an cl e c m e de k i h ac ice file , le dele e he
Current Budget files from the Desktop.
8. Click the Accounting folder window Close button.
The window closes, allowing you to view the Desktop and the copied Current Budget
file.
9. Select the Current Budget file and press <Delete>.
A dialog box appears, asking if you really want to delete the file.
10. Click Yes.
Quick Reference
The dialog box closes and the Windows deletes the file.
To Move a File:
Drag the file to the
desired location (you may
have to open another
window).
Or
and click the Move this
Folder Tasks menu.
2. Select the folder where
you want to move the file
and click Move.
To Copy a File:
Hold down the <Ctrl> key
while you drag the file to
the desired location (you
might have to open
another My Computer
window).
Or
and click the Copy this
Folder Tasks menu.
2. Select the folder where
you want to copy the file
and click Copy.
Lesson 8-8: Restoring a Deleted

File and Emptying the Recycle Bin
Figure 8-16
Restoring files and
emptying the Recycle Bin.
Figure 8-17
The Recycle Bin shortcut Empty the You can also restore
menu. Recycle Bin. a file by right-clicking
it and selecting
Restore all files Restore from the
in the Recycle shortcut menu.
Bin.
Figure 8-16
Figure 8-17
Just like a wastebasket, the Recycle Bin stores all of the files and folders you have deleted. If
change mind and decide need a dele ed file, i ea find and e ie e i . Thi
Recycle Bin le n ill h h en he Rec cle Bin and ee ha in ide, e ea e i l
contains deleted deleted file, and empty the Recycle Bin to free up some space on your hard disk.
items
1. Double-click the Recycle Bin.
The Recycle Bin opens and displays all the files you have recently deleted. If you
accidentally delete a file or folder, you can retrieve it from the Recycle Bin.
Recycle Bin does 2. Select the Current Budget file.
not contain Le e e hi file i can be ed again.
deleted items
3. Click the Restore this item task from the Recycle Bin Tasks menu.
Restoring a file pulls it out of the Recycle Bin and puts it back in its original location.
4. Click the Recycle Bin window Close button.
Now make sure the Current Budget file is in its original location.
5. Verify that the Current Budget file has been restored to the Desktop.
Okay, you can delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop again, and this time we
n e ei.

6. Delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop.

There is theoretically a limit to how many deleted files and folders the Recycle Bin can
hold. The maximum size of the Recycle Bin is normally set 10 percent of the hard
drive. For example, if you have a 10GB hard drive, the maximum amount of files the
Recycle Bin could hold would be 1GB. When the Recycle Bin reaches its limit,
Windows automatically starts deleting files from the Recycle Bin, starting with the
oldest file.
You can adjust the properties for the Recycle Bin so you could adjust its maximum Other Ways to Empty
size from 10 percent of the hard drive to 5 percent by right-clicking the Recycle Bin the Recycle Bin:
and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. Right-click the Recycle
U all i be le Wind a ma icall handle he Rec cle Bin, b can Bin and select Empty
also manually empty the Recycle Bin if you need more free space on your computer. Recycle Bin from the
7. Double-click the Recycle Bin.
shortcut menu.
The contents of the Recycle Bin appear.

8. Click the Empty the Recycle Bin task from the Recycle Bin Tasks menu.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm your deletion.
9. Click Yes.
All the files and folders are permanently deleted from your computer. Notice the
Recycle Bin icon no longer holds any trash, indicating that it is empty.
NOTE: Be careful when emptying the Recycle Bin. Since Windows automatically
e a e he lde file f m he Rec cle Bin, h ldn ha e man all
empty the Recycle Bin much at all. A lot of users empty the Recycle Bin just
about every time they delete something and then later kick themselves
because they realize they needed the file they just permanently erased.
Quick Reference
To Restore a Deleted File:
1. Double-click the Recycle
Bin to open it.
2. Select the file you want to
restore and click
the Restore this item
task in the Recycle Bin
Tasks menu.
Or
Right-click the file you
want to restore and select
Restore from the shortcut
menu.
To Empty the Recycle Bin:
Click the Empty Recycle
Bin task from the Recycle
Bin Tasks menu.
Or
Right-click the Recycle
Bin and select Empty
Recycle Bin from the
shortcut menu.
Lesson 8-9: A Closer Look at Files

and Folders
Figure 8-18
Letter to Sue.TXT
Files display different
types of icons to help you
File Name File Extension
identify what type of file Can be up to 255 Usually hidden from
they are. characters (although view, these three
older MS-DOS programs characters tell Windows
Figure 8-19 will only see the first 8 what type of file it is and
characters, such as what type of icon to
Every file has a three- Letter~1.txt). assign to it.
letter extension, which is
normally hidden from view, Figure 8-19
so Windows knows what Figure 8-18
type of file it is.
Figure 8-20 The WordPad.EXE file is located in:
Files with their three-letter In the C: drive

file extensions displayed.
In the Program Files folder
Figure 8-21 In the Accessories folder
A file s path name is The WordPad.EXE file
determined first by the
drive, then by the So its path name would be:
folder(s), then by the file C:\Program Files\Accessories\WordPad.EXE
name. Figure 8-21
Figure 8-20
In hi le n, e ll ake a b eak f m all ha in ing, clicking and d agging and ake a

closer look at file . When e ie ing he c n en f c m e, e babl
already noticed that everything has its own picture or icon to represent what it is. Folder icons
Program Files
almost always look like little manila folders. Files, on the other hand, come in a variety of
Root Folder
(Hard Disk)
Stuff types and icons.
Windows
There are two parts to every file: the file name, hich e al ead een and a e familia
with; and the file extension, which is three letters that tell Windows what type of file it is (see
Figure 8-19). Since Windows assigns pictures or icons to the types of files it recognizes, it
A root folder, or normally hides these file extensions from view. Whenever you open a file by double-clicking
directory, is the it, Windows automatically opens the file in the program it knows created the file. For
folder from which all example, Microsoft Word always adds the file extension DOC to its files, so when you
the other folders double-click a DOC file, Windows knows it has to open the file in Microsoft Word.
branch. When you
double-click the Local The path of a file or folder is another common term. A file path is the drive and folder(s)
Disk (C:) icon, the
where a file or folder is located think of it as a street address. A path contains the drive
letter, followed by a colon, followed by any folders (which must be separated by
window shows the
backslashes \), and last comes the name of the file. For example C:\Program
contents of the root
Files\Accessories\WordPad.EXE (see Figure 8-21 for an illustration).
folder of the C drive.

Table 8-4: Common File Types

File Icon Description
MS-DOS programs are written for an earlier, more primitive operating system
than Windows. MS-DOS programs don t have the fanc graphics, icons, and
MS-DOS Program features of more advanced Windows programs. All Windows or DOS programs
have .EXE, or sometimes, .COM, extensions. EXE stands for executable,
meaning the file is a program that will run or execute when you open it.
Windo s doesn t kno hat t pe of file this is, so ou can t readil open it by
double-clicking it. That doesn t mean the file isn t important it s probabl a ver
Unknown File Type important file for Windows or a program. Leave these files alone unless you
absolutely know what they are for.
This is a document created in the word processing program, Microsoft Word.

Word documents normally have a .DOC extension.
Word Document
This is a spreadsheet created with the program Microsoft Excel. Excel

spreadsheets normally have a .XLS extension.
Excel Workbook
This is a graphic file or picture, which was created in Paint or another graphics
program. These files are also sometimes referred to as bitmaps. The extension
Paint File (BMP) for this particular type of graphic file is .BMP or bitmap. There are also other
types of graphic files that use different extensions and icons.
Another very popular graphic file, most of the photographs you see on the
Internet are JPEGs.
JPEG File
Text, or ASCII, files are simple files that only contain text no formatting,
graphics, or any fancy stuff. Text files usually have a .TXT extension.
Text File
Shortcut files point to files and folders elsewhere on your computer so that you
can quickly open that file, folder, or program without having to go to its actual
Shortcut File location. All of the programs in the Start Menu and some of the items on your
desktop are actually shortcuts that point to the program files, located elsewhere
on your computer. Shortcuts only point to files or folders, so moving, renaming,
or deleting a shortcut does not affect the original program or file in any way. You
can tell the difference between a shortcut and an original file because the
shortcut has an arrow ( ) in the lower left corner.
Setup files are special executable (EXE) program files, except instead of
running a program when opened, they install software programs onto your
Setup Program File computer.
Since Windows assigns icons to help you distinguish between the different types of files,
normally the three letter file extensions are hidden from view. You can tell Windows to
di la he e en i n, b e ll c e ha hen e lea n h c mi e Wind .
Lesson 8-10: Changing How

Information is Displayed
Figure 8-22
A bullet ( ) appears next
to the current view. Here
the window is displayed in
Icons view.
Figure 8-23
The window displayed in
Details view.
Figure 8-22 Figure 8-23 While in Details view, click the

column heading you want to use to
sort the items. Click the column
heading again to sort the items in
reverse order
When you work with files and folders on your computer, you may find that you need to
change how you view information on the screen. This lesson will show you how to change the
appearance of items using one of five view modes: Thumbnails, Icons, Tiles, List, or Details.
E e imen find he ie ha k be f . Y ll al lea n h change he de
in which files and folders are sorted. You can sort the contents of files and folders by name,
date (when they were created), size, and type (what type of file they are).
Windows normally displays items as icons by default.
3. Select View Icons from the menu.
My Computer You can display the most items in a window at a time by using List view. Try switching
to List view now.
4. Select View List from the menu.
The items are displayed as small icons in a list.
Details view displays information about each item, including the name, size, type of
item, and when it was created or last modified.
5. Select View Details from the menu.
You can sort items in a variety of ways: alphabetically by name, by size, or even by the
da e he e e la m dified a ed. If e in De ail ie , all ha e d
Other Ways to Change sort the items is click the heading for the column you want to use.
Views:
6. Click the Name column heading to sort the items by name.
Click the View button
The list is sorted alphabetically by name. Clicking the heading again sorts the items in
list arrow and select a
reverse order (Z-A).
view from the list.

7. Select View Icons from the menu.

You can have Windows arrange and organize items so that they appear in neat columns
and rows, instead of a cluttered mess.
8. Select View Arrange Icons by Auto Arrange from the menu.
A check mark ( ) appears next to Auto Arrange when this feature is on. (You can skip
step 8 if Auto Arrange already has a check mark). Now, whenever you change the size
of a window, or add, move, or delete a file, Windows will automatically rearrange the
items.
9. Select View Arrange Icons by Name from the menu.
The list is sorted alphabetically by name.
Table 8-5: File and Folder Views

View Description
Files and folders are displayed as icons. This is a good view
if ou re learning to use Windo s or have trouble clicking a
file with the mouse.
Icons
Files and folders are displayed as icons, but with more
information. The type and size of a file is displayed to the
right of the icon.
Quick Reference
To Change How Items are
Tiles Displayed:
Select View from the
Files and folders are displayed as small icons in a list. This menu bar and select one
is a great default view, because it allows you to see the of the five views
most files at a time. (Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons,
List, or Details).
Or
List Click the View button list
arrow and select a view
Displays information about every file and folder, such as its from the list.
name, size, type, and when it was last modified. You can To Arrange or Sort Icons:
change how the list is sorted by clicking the column
headings. If in Details view, click the
column heading you
want to use to sort the
Details window. Click the column
heading again to sort in
This view is useful if you are working with pictures and reverse order.
graphics because it previews every graphic file instead of Or
only displaying a file name. Select View Arrange
Icons by and choose an
arrangement from the
menu.
Thumbnails
Lesson 8-11: Selecting Multiple

Files and Folders
Figure 8-24
To select several files that
are next to each other,
hold down the mouse
button and drag a
rectangle around the files
you want to select.
Figure 8-25
When you want to select a
group of adjacent files,
Figure 8-24 1. Move the pointer to 2. Hold down the mouse button
select the first file you an empty area in the and drag a rectangle around
want to select, hold down window. the files you want to select.
the <Shift> key, and click
the last file.
Figure 8-26
Use the <Ctrl> key when Click the first Press and hold
you want to select non- file you want to down the
select, press <Ctrl> key
adjacent files. and hold down while you click
the <Shift> key each file you
and click the want to select.
last file you
want to select.
By now, you know that you must select a file or folder before you can do anything to it, such
as move or delete it. In this lesson, you will learn how to select more than one file and/or
folder at a time, so you can move, copy, or delete a group of files simultaneously.

If nece a , f ll in c di ec i n elec he a ia e d i e and
folder where your practice files are located.
Fi , le e ie h elec a ingle file.
2. Click the Paris file to select it.
The Paris file is highlighted, indicating that it is selected. Now you could delete, move,
or copy the Paris file. To deselect a file, just click in any empty area of the window.
3. Click any empty area of the window to deselect the Paris file.
Other Ways to Move or The Paris file is no longer selected.
Copy a file:
You can select more than one file or folder at a time, so you can delete, move, or copy
Click the file to select it a whole bunch of files at once. Like so many Windows functions, there are several
and select Edit methods to select multiple files. If the files you want to select are next to each other,
Move to or Copy to you can move the mouse pointer to an empty area of the window, hold down the mouse
from the menu. button, and drag a rectangle around the files you want to select, as shown in Figure
8-24.

4. Move the pointer to any empty area in the folder window, click and hold
down the mouse button, and drag a rectangle around several files, as
The only problem with this method is that it only works when you want to select files
that are next to each other.
5. Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the files.
Another method of selecting adjacent files and folders is to click the first file you want
to select, hold down the <Shift> key, and then click the last file of the group of files
you want to select.
6. Click the Carbrake file to select it, then press and hold the <Shift> key
as you click the Paris file.
Y e elec ed he Ca b ake file, he Pa i file, and all he file ha a e in be een he
two.
7. Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the files.
To select non-adjacent files and folders, hold down the <Ctrl> key and click each item
you want to select.
8. Click the Carbrake file to select it, press and hold down the <Ctrl> key,
click the Paris file and the Trade Show folder, then release the <Ctrl>
key.
Remember, you can move, copy, or delete any selected files all at once. Holding down
the <Ctrl> key also lets you click and deselect any selected files.
9. With the files still selected and the <Ctrl> key still pressed, click and Quick Reference
drag one of the selected files (the Carbrake or Paris files, or the Trade
To Select Multiple Items:
Show folder) from the folder window to your Desktop.
All the selected files are copied to the desktop. If the items are next to
10. With the newly copied files still selected on your Desktop, press the each other, you can click
and drag a rectangle
<Delete> key. around the items you
The selected files are all deleted from the desktop. want to select.
To select all the files and folders in the window, select Edit Select All from the Or
menu.
If the items are next to
11. Select Edit Select All from the menu. each other, you can click
All the files in the window are selected. the first item you want to
12. Close the window to end this lesson. select, press and hold
down the <Shift> key,
and click the last item you
want to select.
If the items aren t ne t to
each other, you can select
non-adjacent items by
holding the <Ctrl> key
and clicking the items you
want to select.
To Select All Files at Once:
Select Edit Select All
from the menu.
Lesson 8-12: Finding a File Using

the Search Companion
Figure 8-27
The Search Companion
guides your search by
asking questions about
your search.
Figure 8-28
Beginning a music file
search.
Figure 8-29
The search results
window. Figure 8-27 Figure 8-28
1. Choose the category 2. Enter information Figure 8-29 3. Finish the search, or refine
that describes what about the file ou re the search for better results
ou re searching for searching for
I j a ea mi lace and lose a file in your computer as it is to misplace your car

keys maybe easier! Luckily, Microsoft has simplified the search process by introducing the
Search Companion to Windows XP. A cousin of the Office Assistant, the Search Companion
helps you organize your search by asking certain questions, such as what you want to search
for (i.e. picture or file), which drive to search in, and the file name.
The Sea ch C m ani n can ea ch f file e en hen can emembe he e ac file
name or location. You can search for a file by:
The file name or any part of the file name.
The date the file was created or modified.
The type of file, such as a Microsoft Word document or graphic file.
The text within the file.
The size of the file.
You can set one or several of these criteria to search for a file.
1. Click the Start button and select Search from the menu.
The Search Results window appears with the Search Companion, as shown in Figure
8-27.
The Search Companion will ask you different questions to help you with your search.
F n , le ea ch f a m ic file.
2. Click the Pictures, music, or video option.
The next screen of the Search Companion appears, asking you for more details about
your search.

3. Check the Music box. Click in the All or part of the file name text box
and type David Byrne. Click Search.
The Search Companion begins the search and displays the names and locations of all
the files that have the words David Byrne in their names. You can open any of these
files by double-clicking them.
4. Double-click the music file.
The music file begins playing in the Windows Media Player.
5. Close the Windows Media program.
If d n i e emembe he file name, can al a ea ch b hen la
m dified he file, b he i e f he file. We n d a ea ch ing hi c i e ia
right now, but we can at least go ahead and figure out where these options are located.
6. To start a new search, click the Search button in the Search Companion.
The first screen of the Search Companion appears.
7. Click the All Files and Folders option.
A dialog box appears, giving options to search by file name, text within the file,
location of the file, when it was last modified, size of the file, and other advanced
search options to choose from. All Files and
8. Type Practice folder in the search options dialog box, and click Folders Search
Search. Options
The Search Companion searches for folder, and displays all finds in the results
window.
9. Click the Search Results window Close button.
Table 8-6: Search Options

Search For Description
Pictures, music, or Search for pictures and digital photos (.jpg, .gif, and .bmp); music (.mp3);
video and digital video (.avi and mpeg) files.
Documents (word Search for files created with a program, such as Microsoft Access (.mdb),
processing, Microsoft Excel (.xls), Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt), Microsoft Word (.doc), or Quick Reference
spreadsheet, etc.) Notepad (.txt)
To Use the Search
All files and folders Search through all types of files and folders. Companion to Find a File:
1. Click the Start button
Computers or people Search for computers on your network or the name of a person in your
and select Search.
address book.
2. Select the type of file you
Information in Help Search for information in Microsoft Windo s XP s built-in Help system. want to search for.
and Support Center
3. Enter part of the file name
Search the Internet Search the Internet for information on a key word or phrase. or text within the file. You
can also search for files
Change Preferences Change your search preferences, such as whether or not you want to using the drop-down lists
display an animated character or advanced search options. at the bottom of the
Search Companion.
4. Click Search to begin
searching for the file(s).
Lesson 8-13: Managing the Search

Companion
Figure 8-30
Choosing a different
Search Companion.
Figure 8-31
Click Back and Next to
browse the different
character options.
Figure 8-32
Changing Search
Companion preferences.
Figure 8-29 Figure 8-31 Figure 8-32
Based on the Microsoft Office Assistant, the animated character in the Search Companion
does tricks as you perform your search. Whether your prior experience with animated
characters has been charming or annoying, this lesson will teach you how to manage these
new Microsoft darlings and how to change preferences in the Search Companion itself.
1. Click the Start button and select Search from the menu.
The e R e , eage hel ih ne ea ch! He ge ing kind f ld
h gh, le find me ne i h ne ick .
2. Click Rover (the dog) and click Choose a different animated
character.
Scroll through the different characters.
3. Click the Back and Next buttons to scroll through the different
characters. Click OK to select a new character.
Rover disappears and the new character pops onto the screen.
Though the new character may be an improvement from Rover, you may want to hide
the character altogether.
4. Click the character and click Turn off the animated character.
The character disappears but the Search Companion remains.
You can customize the Search Companion even more by changing its preferences.
5. Click Change preferences in the Search Companion.
You can change how the Search Companion works here. Refer to Table 8-7: Search
Companion Preferences for more information on these options.

Table 8-7: Search Companion Preferences

Preference Description
With/Without an Hide or show the animated character in the Search Companion.
animated character
With Indexing Service The Indexing Service extracts information from your files while the
(for faster local computer is idle, making searches faster.
searches)
Change files and folders Choose between Default and Advanced:
search behavior
Default: Steps you through search options to help you define your
search.
Advanced: Manually enter your own search criteria. Recommended for
advanced users only.
Change Internet search Search the Internet using the Search Companion, or using the classic
behavior Internet search without the Search Companion.
Sh /D t Show Toggle balloon tips in the Search Companion on or off.
balloon tips
Turn AutoComplete Toggle AutoComplete on or off.
on/off
Quick Reference
To Change the Search
Companion Character:
1. Click the character and
select Choose a
different animated
character from the menu.
2. Click the Next or Back
buttons until you find a
character you like and
click OK.
To Hide the Character:
Click the character and
click Turn off animated
character.
To Change Search
Companion Preferences:
Click Change
preferences in the
Search Companion.
Lesson 8-14: Using Windows

Explorer
Figure 8-33
The Windows Explorer
window. Click the Folders button
to show or hide the
Folders pane.
To view the contents of a

folder or drive, click the
folder or drive in the
Folders pane.
A plus symbol ( ) next
to a folder indicates
that all the subfolders
it contains are hidden.
Click the plus symbol
to display the hidden
subfolders.
The Folders pane The right pane displays the contents of

displays the folders the folder or drive you selected. This pane
Figure 8-33 and drives on your works just like My Computer.
computer.
If you have been following the lessons in this chapter, by now you should know just about
everything there is to know about file management. You learned that you can use My
Computer to view and work with files and folders.
This lesson introduces how to use Windows Explorer to view and work with the contents of
A minus symbol ( ) your computer. Windows Explorer displays the hierarchy of all the folders on your computer
next to a folder in the Folders pane, as shown in Figure 8-33. This is especially useful for when you want to
indicates that all the copy and move files you can drag the files from the Folders pane to the appropriate folder in
subfolders it contains the right pane. As a shortcut, you can also click the Folders button to view the Folders pane in
are displayed. Click any window. You would have to open two My Computer windows to accomplish the same
thing.
the minus symbol to
collapse or hide the If e a Wind 95, 98, NT e , hi i he ame a he Wind E l e e ed
subfolders. to; but now you can click the Folders button any time you want to view or work with
Windows Explorer.
1. Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories

Windows Explorer from the menu.
Folders button The familiar My Documents window appears but the Folders pane is also open, as
Other Ways to Use shown in Figure 8-33. This is where Windows Explorer displays the hierarchy of files
Windows Explorer:
and folders on your computer.
Click the Folders
Y can ee ha in a d i e f lde b clicking i in he F lde ane.
button on the toolbar.

2. Click My Computer in the Folders pane.

Windows Explorer displays the contents of My Computer in the right pane of the
window. Move on to the next step to look at the contents of the hard drive. If there isn t a s mbol
3. Click Local Disk (C:) in the Folders pane. next to a folder, the
Explorer displays the contents of your hard drive in the right pane of the window. The folder does not
Folders pane displays the same drives and folders in a hierarchical view. contain any subfolders,
A plus symbol or a minus symbol beside a folder means a folder contains several although it probably
subfolders. Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can display the hidden folders contains files.
within a folder by clicking the plus sign beside the folder.
4. Click the Documents and Settings folder plus symbol in the Folders
pane.
The Documents and Settings folder expands and displays all the folders within it.
Notice that the plus symbol changes to a minus symbol, indicating the folder is
expanded and is displaying all the folders within it. Some of the Windows subfolders
also have pluses by them, indicating that they, too, contain several subfolders.
5. Click the All Users folder in the Folders pane.
The contents of the All Users folder appear in the right pane of the Explorer window. Quick Reference
Notice that the subfolders in the All Users folder are displayed in both the left and right To View Windows
panes. Explorer:
You can collapse or hide folders to reduce the amount of information on the screen.
6. Click the Documents and Settings folder minus symbol in the Folders and select All Programs
pane. Accessories
The Documents and Settings folder collapses and all its subfolders are hidden from Windows Explorer from
view. The minus symbol changes to a plus symbol, indicating that all the subfolders in the menu.
the Documents and Settings folder are hidden from view.
Or
You can also adjust the size of the Folders pane.
7. Position the mouse over the right border of the Folders pane until the Click the Folders button
pointer changes to a , then drag to the right about a half-inch. in a window toolbar.
The Folders pane is now a bit wider. To View the Contents of a
Just like My Computer, you can change how information is displayed using the View Drive or Folder:
menu. Click the drive or folder in
8. Select View Icons from the menu. the Folders pane the
The contents in the right pane of Explorer are displayed in Icon view. contents of that drive or
folder will appear in the
9. Select View List from the menu. right pane.
The contents in the right pane of Explorer are displayed in List view.
To Display or Hide a Drive
I im an emembe ha he igh ane i ill ba icall M C m e , so the F lde S bf lde :
procedures for creating, opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting files and folders
are exactly the same. Click plus symbol ( ) to
display any hidden
subfolders, click the
minus symbol ( ) to hide
any subfolders.
To Resize the Folders
Pane:
Click and drag the right
border of the Folders
pane.
Lesson 8-15: File Management

Using Windows Explorer
Figure 8-34
You can move and copy
files using click and drag
in Windows Explorer.
Figure 8-34
In hi le n, ll lea n h e f m ba ic file managemen in he Wind E l e

ing he F lde ane. S ecificall , ll m e a file and c ea e a ne f lde . Again,
although the Folders pane looks a little different than the rest of the My Computer screen, all
he file managemen ced e e lea ned ill a l . If e followed the other
lessons, this should be a nice review of the chapter.
1. Make sure you have Windows Explorer open.

If you need to start Windows Explorer click, the Start button and select All Programs
Accessories Windows Explorer from the menu.
2. Click the Local Disk (C:) icon in the Folders pane.
The contents of the (C:) drive appear in the right pane, and it expands in the left pane
to show its subfolders.
3. Click the Practice folder to display its contents.
The folder expands and displays all the files inside it, and the plus symbol ( ) changes
a min mb l. Since can ee all he file in he igh ane, i m ch ea ie
move and copy files and folders.
4. Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you click and drag the CARBRAKE file
to the Accounting folder, as shown in Figure 8-34.
The Carbrake file is copied to the Accounting folder.
I ldn ha e ma e ed if d agged and d ed he Ca b ake file he
Accounting folder in the left pane or the right pane i he ame f lde . M e n
he ne e and le ee if can c ea e a ne f lde hile he F lde ane i
displayed.
5. Create a new folder named 2002 in the root directory of the (C:) drive.
Need a refresher on how to create a folder? First, click the (C:) drive in the Folder pane
to display its contents in the right pane. Next, click Make a new folder in the File and
Folder Tasks menu, type 2002, and press <Enter>.

6. Click and drag the new 2002 folder from the right pane to the
Accounting folder in the Folders pane.
Verify that the 2002 folder was moved inside the Accounting folder.
7. Click the plus symbol beside the Accounting folder.
The Accounting folder expands and displays all the folders inside it.
Try deleting a folder using Windows Explorer you already know the technique.
8. Click the 2001 folder, press the <Delete> key, and then click Yes.
I d e n ma e if e he lef igh ane elec a f lde he e he ame
folder, and you can rename, copy, move, and delete folders in either pane of the
window.
9. Close the Windows Explorer window to end this lesson.
C ng a la i n ! Y ej ab c m le ed ha i babl he m diffic l cha e in
the book.
Quick Reference
To Move a File or Folder:
Drag the file or folder to
the desired location in the
Folders pane.
To Copy a File or Folder:
Hold down the <Ctrl> key
while you drag the file or
folder to the desired
location in the Folders
pane.
To Create a New Folder:
1. Click the disk or folder
where you want to put the
new folder.
2. Click the Make a new
folder task in the File and
Folder Tasks menu.
3. Type a name for the
To Delete a File or Folder:
Select the file or folder
and press the <Delete>
key. Click Yes to confirm
the deletion.
Lesson 8-16: Using MS-DOS

Figure 8-35
MS-DOS running inside a
window.
C:\WINDOWS\STUFF>
Figure 8-36
The current The path of the folder
The DOS prompt. drive ou re ou re in.
in.
Figure 8-36
Figure 8-35
In the beginning, before there was Windows, there was MS-DOS. MS-DOS (Microsoft Disk
O e a ing S em) didn ha e an ind , in e , ic n you ran programs, changed
folders, and copied files by typing difficult commands. Windows has been around for a long
ime, hankf ll he e a en man DOS g am ill a nd. Rega dle , ne da
might be on the phone with technical support and be told to go to an MS-DOS prompt. To
e ae f ha da , he e a le n all ab MS-DOS.
1. Click the Start button and select Run.

The Run dialog box appears.
2. Type COMMAND in the box and click OK.
The MS-DOS Prompt window appears, as shown in Figure 8-35.
Yes, that stark, barren screen was all people had to work with to run programs, copy
files, and navigate between folders in the old-fashioned days of the computer. Notice
the DOS prompt, which tells you the current drive (C:).
Move on to the next step to see how you changed folders in MS-DOS.
3. Type CD WINDOWS and press <Enter>.
The * (asterisk) is a The clumsy, hard-to-remember command you just typed brought you to the
wildcard character WINDOWS subfolder. Notice the DOS prompt changes to C:\ WINDOWS.
use it as a substitution MS-DOS d e n a ma icall di la all the files and subfolders in the current folder
for any part of a file like My Computer or Windows Explorer you have to tell MS-DOS to display the
name in MS-DOS. For c n en f he c en di ec . He e h :
example, typing
DEL *.TMP would
4. Type DIR /W and press <Enter>.
delete all the files The DIR (which stands for directory) command displays the contents of the current
with a .TMP extension folder. The /W switch tells DOS to display the contents in wide mode otherwise the
in the current folder. c n en f he c en d i e ldn fi n ne c een and ldn be able
view them all.
To run a program in DOS, go to the program f lde and e he g am name.
5. Type EDIT and press <Enter>.
The DOS-based EDIT program appears.
DOS g am a en a anda di ed a hei m e ad anced Wind cce ,
even the most basic commands, such as how to exit a program, vary greatly between
programs.

6. Press the <Alt> key then <F> (to open the File menu) then <X> (to exit
the EDIT program).
You exit from the EDIT program and return to the desolate MS-DOS screen.
7. Type CD .. and press <Enter>.
This cryptic command changes to he e i a en f lde . Le e n back he
warm and user-friendly world of Windows.
8. Type EXIT and press <Enter>.
The MS-DOS Prompt window closes. Most DOS commands
have additional options
called switches, which
Table 8-8: Common MS-DOS Commands you specify after the
Command Syntax Description DOS command,
A: (Drive Letter) [drive letter] Change the current drive. preceded by a /. Type
Example: D: would change to the D: drive. /? after a DOS
command to view all
DIR DIR Displays the names of all the files and folders in a folder. the switches or
Example: DIR /W displays the contents of the current options for the
folder in wide screen view. command.
COPY COPY [source file] Copies one or more files to another location.
[destination] Example: COPY LETTER.TXT A: would copy the
LETTER.TXT file to the A: drive.
XCOPY XCOPY [source file] XCOPY is a super-charged version of COPY.
[destination] Example: XCOPY A:*.* C:\NEW would copy all the
files in the A: drive to the NEW folder on the C: drive. If
the NEW folder didn t e ist on the C: drive, XCOPY
would create the folder.
DEL DEL [path] Deletes one or more files. Quick Reference
[filename] Example: DEL *.TMP would erase any files in the
To Use the MS-DOS
current folder with .TMP file extensions.
Prompt:
RENAME RENAME [old Renames a file or folder. 1. Click the Start button
name] [new name] Example: RENAME LETTER.TXT APPROVE.TXT and select Run.
would rename the LETTER.TXT file to APPROVE.TXT. 2. Type COMMAND in the
CD CD [path] Change the current folder. Type .. to change to the box and click OK.
previous parent folder. 3. Enter your commands in
Example: CD TEMP would change to the TEMP folder, the DOS prompt.
CD .. would change to the root folder of the C: drive. To Exit Back to Windows:
MD MD [folder name] Creates or makes a new folder. Type EXIT and press
Example: MD DOCS would create a new folder named <Enter>.
DOCS.
RD RD [folder name] Deletes a folder.
Example: RD DOS would delete the DOCS folder.
Lesson 8-17: Creating and Using a

Compressed Folder
Figure 8-37
A zipped folder in the
Practice folder.
Figure 8-38
The Extraction Wizard.
A compressed folder
has a zipper on the
folder icon.
Figure 8-37
Enter the location where you want to

extract the compressed folder contents.
Click the Password button to enter the

password if the compressed folder is
password-protected.
Figure 8-38
You can reduce the amount of storage a folder and its contents consumes on a drive by using a
compressed, or zipped, folder. Compressed folders occupy less space on a drive, which also
Compressed makes them easier to transfer and share with other computers. You can work with a
(zipped) Folder compressed folder and its contents just as you would work with a regular folder.
Other Ways to Create a
Compressed Folder:
1. Click the Start button and select My Computer.
Right-click the desktop
and select New
Compressed (zipped) 2. Navigate to and open your Practice folder.
Folder from the The contents of the (C:) drive appear.
shortcut menu. 3. Select File New Compressed (zipped) Folder from the menu.
A ne c m e ed f lde i h a em a name Ne C m e ed ( i ed) F lde
appears in the drive.

4. Type Zip and press <Enter>.

The compressed folder is renamed, as shown in Figure 8-37.
You can save and move files and folders into a compressed folder just like you would
with a regular folder. Files and folders saved in a compressed folder are also
c m e ed, b hi d e n change h k i h hem.
5. Click and drag the Seniors file into the Zip folder.
Notice that a copy of the Seniors file still appears in the Practice folder. A compressed
file is simply another version of the file, so instead of moving the original file into the
compressed folder, a compressed copy of the file is created. Views button
6. Double-click the Zip folder.
The Seniors file really is in the folder. You can view the compression ratio (compressed
vs. uncompressed) by switching to Details view.
7. Click the Views button and select Details from the list.
Notice the Packed size column and the Size column, as shown in Figure 8-38. The
packed size is the amount of space the compressed file occupies. The size is the amount
of space the uncompressed file occupies. As you can see from the Ratio column, the
file has a compression ratio of 50 percent. Not bad!
N le make e he file eall ha n changed, e en h gh i ha been
compressed.
8. Double-click the Seniors file.
Quick Reference
The Seniors file opens in Notepad. As you can see, the file opens just as it would from
a non-compressed file. To Create a Compressed
9. Click the Notepad Close button. Folder:
The Notepad window closes. 1. Navigate to where you
want to save the
Extracting is a term often used with compressed files. This is really just a technical compressed folder.
term for decompressing files by moving them out of a compressed folder. You can
extract a single file simply by moving it out of the folder. Or you can extract all the 2. Select File New
files from the compressed folder at the same time. Compressed (zipped)
Folder from the menu.
10. Click the Up button on the toolbar. Right-click the Zip folder and select
Extract All from the shortcut menu. 3. Type a name for your
The first screen of the Extraction Wizard appears.
11. Click Next. To Extract Files from a
Compressed Folder:
Select where you want the extracted file to be saved.
12. Click the Browse button. Click Desktop and click OK. 1. Right-click the
compressed folder
If the compressed folder is password-protected, click the Password button to enter the containing the files you
password. wish to remove and select
13. Click Next. Extract All from the
The compressed files are extracted to the location you specified, as shown in the file shortcut menu.
path in the Extraction Wizard. 2. Click Next.
14. Click Finish. 3. Click the Browse button
A new window appears, letting you know the files have been extracted. and navigate to where
Some files may exhibit better compression ratios than others. For example, JPEG you would like to move
graphics files (which are already compressed) may actually become larger when the extracted files.
compressed.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Next, then click
Finish.
Chapter Eight Review
Lesson Summary
Understanding Storage Devices, Folders, and Files
Computers store information on disk drives using files and folders, just like you store information in
a file cabinet.
Know the following memory terminology:
Term: Size:
Byte A single character such as the letter j or number 8.
Kilobyte (K or KB) 1,024 bytes a typed page.
Megabyte (MB or MEG) 1,048,578 bytes a novel.
Gigabyte (GB or GIG) Several encyclopedia sets.
Using M Comp ter to See What s in Yo r Comp ter

Click the Start button and select My Computer to view the contents of your computer.
Double-click a disk drive in the My Computer indo to displa the disk drive s contents.
To View the Properties of Something: Right-click the drive, folder, or file and select Properties
from the shortcut menu. For example, right-clicking a hard drive and selecting Properties from the
shortcut menu would display how much space is left on the hard disk.
Opening a Folder
Double-click a folder to open it and display its contents.
To Move Back or Up to the Previous Level or Folder: Click the Up button on the toolbar, click
the Back button on the toolbar, or click the Address list arrow on the toolbar and select the
appropriate drive or folder.
Creating and Renaming a Folder

To Create a New Folder: Open the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder. Select
the Make a new folder task from the File and Folder Tasks menu, or, right-click any empty area in
the window and select New Folder from the shortcut menu. Type a name for the folder and
press <Enter>.
To Rename a Folder: Click the folder to select it, select the Rename this folder task from the File
and Folder Tasks menu, type a name for the folder and press <Enter>.You can also rename a
folder by clicking the folder to select it, selecting File Rename from the menu, typing a name for
the folder and pressing <Enter>.
Copying, Moving, and Deleting a Folder

Move a Folder (Click and Drag Method): Move a folder by dragging it to the desired location,
such as another folder or onto the desktop (you might have to open another My Computer window
if you want to copy it to another folder).

Move a Folder: Select the folder and click the Move this folder task in the File and Folder Tasks
menu, select the drive or folder where you want to move the folder and click Move.
Copy a Folder (Click and Drag Method): Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the folder to
the desired location (you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to
another folder).
Copy a Folder: Click the folder to select it, click the Copy this folder task in the File and Folder
Tasks menu, select the drive or folder where you want to copy the folder and click Copy.
To Delete a Folder: Select the folder and press the <Delete> key. Click Yes to confirm the folder
deletion.
Opening, Renaming, and Deleting a File

Double-click a file to open the file in the program that created it.
To Rename a File: Click the file to select it, select the Rename this file task in the File and Folder
Tasks menu, enter the file s ne name and press <Enter>. Or, right-click the file, select Rename
from the shortcut menu, type a name for the folder and press <Enter>.
To Delete a File: Select the file and press the <Delete> key. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Copying and Moving a File

You can copy and move files the same as you copy and move folders.
Move a File: Click the file to select it and click the Move this file task in the File and Folder Tasks
menu. Select the drive or folder where you want to move the file and click Move.
Copy a File (Click and Drag Method): Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the file to the
desired location (you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to
another folder).
Copy a File: Click the file to select it, click the Copy this file task in the File and Folder Tasks
menu, select the drive or folder where you want to copy the file and click Copy.
Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin

To Restore a Deleted File: Double-click the Recycle Bin to open it. Select the file you want to
restore and click the Restore this item task in the Recycle Bin Tasks menu. Or, right-click the file
you want to restore and select Restore from the shortcut menu.
To Empty the Recycle Bin: Right-click the Recycle Bin and select Empty Recycle Bin from the
shortcut menu.
A Closer Look at Files and Folders

There are two parts to a file: the file name, which can be up to 255 characters, and the file
extension, which is three characters long and tells Windows what type of file it is.
The path of a file or folder is the drive and folder where a file or folder is located (its address).
Changing How Information is Displayed

To Change How Items are Displayed: Select View from the menu bar and select one of the five
views, or, select a view from the View button list arrow on the toolbar.
The five view modes are Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List, and Details.
To Arrange or Sort Icons: Select View Arrange Icons by and choose an arrangement from the
menu, or, if you are in Details view, simply click the column heading you want to use to sort the
window.
Selecting Multiple Files and Folders

By selecting multiple files and folders you can move, copy, or delete a group of files and folders all
at once.
If the files are next to each other, you can click and drag a rectangle around the files you want to
select. If ou don t like that method, click the first file ou ant to select, press and hold do n the
<Shift> key, and click the last file you want to select.
If the files aren t ne t to each other, ou can select random files b holding the <Ctrl> key and
clicking the files you want to select.
Select Edit Select All from the menu to select all files at once.
Finding a File Using the Search Companion

To Find a File: Click the Start button and select Search from the menu. Select the type of file you
want to search for and enter any part of the file name or text within the file. Use the Search
Companion to enter information (file name, size, type, text within the file, date it was last modified,
etc.) about the file ou re searching for. Click Search to begin searching for the file(s).
Managing the Search Companion

To change the animated character, click the character and select Change the animated character
from the menu. Click the Next or Back buttons until you find a character you like, then click OK.
To hide the character, click the character and select Turn off animated character from the menu.
To change search companion preferences, click the Change preferences option in the Search
Companion.
Using the Windows Explorer

To View Windows Explorer: Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories
Windows Explorer from the menu. Or, click the Folders button in a window toolbar.
To View the Contents of a Drive or Folder: Click the drive or folder in the Folders pane the
contents of that drive or folder will appear in the right pane.
T Di la Hide a D i e F lde S bf lde : Click plus symbol ( ) to display any hidden
subfolders, click the minus symbol ( ) to hide any subfolders.
To Resize the Folders Pane: Click and drag the right border of the Folders pane.
File Management Using Windows Explorer

To Move a File or Folder: Drag the file or folder to the desired location in the Folders pane.
To Copy a File or Folder: Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the file or folder to the desired
location in the Folders pane.
To Create a New Folder: Click the drive or folder where you want to put the new folder and click
the Make a new folder task in the File and Folder Tasks menu. Type a name for the folder and
press <Enter>.

To Delete a File or Folder: Select the file or folder and press the <Delete> key. Click Yes to
confirm the deletion.
Using MS-DOS
To Use the MS-DOS Prompt: Click the Start button and select Run. Type COMMAND in the box
and click OK, then enter your commands in the DOS prompt.
To Exit from the MS-DOS Prompt: Type EXIT and press <Enter>.
Creating and Using a Compressed Folder

To Create a Compressed Folder: Click the Start button and select My Computer from the
menu. Navigate to and open the folder you want to compress, then select File New
Compressed (zipped) Folder from the menu. Type a name for your folder and press <Enter>.
To Extract a File from a Compressed Folder: Right-click the compressed folder containing the
files you want to remove and select Extract All from the shortcut menu. Click Next on the first
page of the Extraction Wizard, then click the Browse button and select the folder you wish to
move the extracted files to. Click OK hen ou re finished, click Next, then click Finish.
Quiz
1. Computers store information on which types of disks? (Select all that
apply.)
A. Floppy disks.
B. Hard disks.
C. Compact discs (CD-ROMs).
D. Removable disks.
3. T : (S a a a ).
A. Lose your important files.
B. Store related files and programs in the same place.
C. Make i diffic l dele e hing nle eall kn ha e d ing.
D. Organize related files and information on your computer.
4. .TXT, .DOC, and .BMP these are all examples of:

A. Three meaningless letters with a period in front of them.
B. File extensions.
C. Types of advanced degrees in computers.
D. How confusing computers are.
5. Which program(s) can you use to view and manage the contents of your
computer? (Select all that apply.)
A. Netscape Navigator.
B. My Computer.
C. System Sleuth.
D. Windows Explorer.
6. You open a file or folder by double-clicking it. (True or False?)
7. Do this to display the contents of a certain drive or folder:

A. Right-click the drive or folder.
B. Click the drive or folder while holding down the <Alt> key.
C. Double-click the drive or folder.
D. Triple-click the drive or folder.
8. T a b , -click the object and select Properties

from the shortcut menu. (True or False?)
9. W b , ba
or up to the previous level or folder: (Select all that apply.)
A. Click the Up button on the toolbar.
B. Click the Back button on the toolbar.
C. Press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
D. Click the Address Bar on the toolbar and select the appropriate drive or folder.

A. You can move a file or folder to a new location by dragging and dropping it.
B. You can rename a file or folder by right-clicking it, selecting Rename from the
shortcut menu, typing the new name, and pressing <Enter>.
C. A plus symbol ( ) next to a folder in Windows Explorer indicates the folder is
locked and cannot be modified or deleted.
D. Holding down the <Ctrl> key hile e d agging and d ing me hing c ie
it instead of moving it.
11. Delete a file or folder by clicking it, pressing the <Delete> key, and
confirming the deletion. (True or False?)
12. Do this to select multiple files and folders: (Select all that apply.)
A. Click and drag a rectangle around any adjacent files you want to select.
B. Select File Select Multiple Files from the menu, and then click the files you want
to select.
C. Click the first file you want to select, press and hold down the <Shift> key, then click
the last file you want to select.
D. Hold down the <Ctrl> key and click the files you want to select.
13. Which of the following statements is NOT true? (Select all that apply.)
A. You can find a file on your computer by clicking the Start button, selecting Search,
entering what you want to search for and clicking Search.
B. Open Windows Explorer by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs
Accessories Windows Explorer.
C. To save a file in a location other than the pr g am defa l f lde , ha e a e
the file and then use My Computer or Windows Explorer to move the file to the
desired location.
D. You can display the contents of a drive or folder using Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List,
or Details View.

14. The three-letter extension of a file is normally displayed in Windows XP.

(True or False?)
Homework
1. Open My Computer.
2. View the contents of your Local Disk (C:).
3. Create a new folder in the root directory of your Local Disk (C:).
4. Name he ne f lde P jec File .
5. Delete the Project Files folder from the (C:) drive.
6. Open the Recycle Bin and find the deleted Project Files folder. Do you know how to
retrieve it?
7. Open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the (A:) drive.
8. Use the Windows Explorer View menu to display the contents of the (A:) drive in
List view.
9. While you're still in List view, sort the files in alphabetical order.
10. Use the Start menu's Search feature to find all the files named "readme.txt" on your
(C:) drive. Open one of these files by double-clicking it.
Quiz Answers
1. A, B, C, and D. Computers can store their information on any of these disk types.
3. B and D.
4. B. File extensions, which are used to identify the file type.
5. B and D. My Computer and Windows Explorer both display the contents of your
c m e and all manage c m e file and f lde .
6. True. Double-clicking a file or folder opens it.
7. C. Double-click a folder to open it and display its contents.
8. True. Right-clicking an object and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu displays
the properties of the object.
9. A, B, and D. Any of these will bring you back to the previous level or folder.
10. C. A plus symbol ( ) next to a folder in Windows Explorer means the folder contains
subfolders.
11. True.
12. A, C, and D. You can use any of these methods to select multiple files and folders.
13. C. You can easily save a file in a different location by opening the drive and/or folder
where you want to save the file and clicking Save.
14. False. File extensions are normally hidden in Windows XP.
Chapter Nine:
Exploring the
Internet
How to use the mouse
Understand and connect to the Internet
Find a specific Web page drag and drop, and
right-click
Browse and search the Web
How to start programs
Add Web pages to Favorites in the Start Menu
How to use menus,
Change your Home page
toolbars, and dialog
Display and clear a history of visited Web pages boxes
Download pictures and software

Understand the Information Bar
Use the Pop-up Blocker
Understand how to secure your computer
Use e-mail
Unle e been li ing n a de e ed i land f he a en ea , you already know that

the Internet is the biggest thing to happen to computers since ell, c m e ! Y can
ignore it he In e ne i n g ing a a and i al ead changing he ld e li e in.
Fortunately, for the most part, the Internet is incredibly easy to use. Even the most
computer-phobic users seem to feel right at home on the Internet.
Thi cha e e lain he in and f he In e ne . If e e e en a lee le nigh
wondering exactly what the Internet is and how it got started, ll finall lea n i all. We ll
discuss how to get your computer connected to the Internet, and how to surf the Web using the
Wind XP In e ne E l e , e eciall i h he change in Se ice Pack 2. Y ll al
learn some useful tips like how to secure your computer, how to search for information, how
to bookmark your favorite Web pages so that you can easily come back to them later, and how
change he Web age ha fi a ea hen c nnec he In e ne . Finall , ll
learn how to download and how to send and receive e-mail.
Lesson 9-1: Introduction to the

Internet
Figure 9-1
WWW
network in the world,
consisting of millions of
computers, all over the
world, all connected
together. Headlines
Figure 9-2
Web pages are stored on
Amazon
Web servers computers
WWW
that are permanently
connected to the Internet.
Figure 9-1
Figure 9-2
The Internet is the largest computer network in the world. It consists of millions of computers
all over the planet, all connected to each another.
The Internet was born in the 1960s when the United States military worried that a nuclear
b mb c ld de i c m e em ( he e e en man f hem back hen). S i
placed several computers far apart from each other and connected them with some super-fast
telephone lines so that the computers could talk to each other. If a nuclear bomb blew up one
c m e , an he c m e c ld in an l ake e ; h , he c m e ne k ldn
go down. Years passed and other organizations, such as colleges and universities, started
connecting their computers to this growing network to share information.
Al h gh he In e ne ha been a nd a l ng ime, i a n n il he 1990 ha he World
Wide Web was born. The World Wide Web is what you probably think of when you think of
he In e ne , al h gh i eall j a a f he In e ne . The Web c n i f milli n f
documents that are stored on hundreds of thousands of computers that are always connected
to the Internet. These documents are called Web pages, and you can find Web pages on every
subject imaginable from your local newspaper to online catalogs to airline schedules, and
much more.
Web pages are stored on Web servers. A Web server is a computer, not unlike your own
computer, only bigger and faster. There are hundreds of thousands of Web servers located all
over the world. Web servers are always connected to the Internet so that people can view their
Web pages 24 hours a day.
So what can you do once yo e c nnec ed he In e ne ? Plen . Table 9-1: What Can I do
on the Internet? shows just a few of the many things there are to do through the Internet.

Chapter Nine: Exploring the Internet 237
Table 9-1: What Can I do on the Internet?

Task Description
Send and Receive Exchanging electronic mail (or e-mail) is the most popular feature on the
E-mail Internet. Just like regular paper mail, you can send and receive e-mail with
people around the world, as long as they have access to a computer and
the Internet. Unlike regular paper mail, e-mail is delivered to its destination
almost instantly.
Browse the World Wide The World Wide Web is what most people think of when they think of the
Web Internet although it s reall onl a part of the Internet. The World Wide
Web is an enormous collection of interconnected documents stored on
Web servers all over the world. The World Wide Web has information on
every subject imaginable.
Join online discussions Newsgroups are discussion groups on the Internet that you can join to read
with newsgroups and post messages to and from people with similar interests. There are
thousands of newsgroups on topics such as computers, education,
romance, hobbies, politics, religion, and more.
Chat with other online Chatting lets you communicate with people on the Internet instantly no
users matter how far away they are! Most chats are text-based, meaning you
have to type when you converse with people on the Internet. A growing
number of chats have voice and even video capabilities all without having
to pay long distance changes.
Download software You can download pictures, demo programs, patches and drivers for your
computer, and many other types of files and save them to your computer.
Listen to music and You can listen to sound on the Web, such as radio stations, or music by
watch videos your favorite artists.
Lesson 9-2: Connecting to the

Internet
Figure 9-3
The Connections tab of
the Internet Options tab.
Figure 9-4
Specify how you want to
connect to the Internet.
Figure 9-4
Figure 9-3
Other Ways to Open The e a e h ee hing ll need c nnec he In e ne :

Internet Explorer:
An Internet Service Provider (ISP): An Internet Service Provider is a lot like a
Click the Internet phone company, except instead of letting you make telephone calls to other people, an
Explorer icon in the Internet Service Provider lets your computer connect to the Internet. Just like your
Quick Launch bar. telephone company, Internet Service Providers charge for their services.
A Web Browser: A Web browser is a program that lets your computer view and
navigate the World Wide Web. Windows comes with a built-in Web browser Internet
Explorer.
A Phone Line and Modem or Other Connection: A m dem i c m e
very own telephone that lets it talk to other computers on the Internet. There are slower
dial-up modems that connect to the Internet using your phone and much faster cable
modems and Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL) as well. DSL is technology that provides
high-speed Internet access through standard phone lines. A cable modem connects to the
Internet through the cable hookup in your house. Both of these connections are much
faster than a dial-up modem and are connected to the Internet 24 hours a day, so you
d n ie an h ne line .
1. Make sure you have an account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
If you want, you can follow the step-by-step instructions and let the New Connection
Wizard help you find an Internet Service Provider or you can find your own. Ask a
computer-savvy friend or an employee at a local computer store for the name and
number of a local Internet Service Provider. Once you are set up with an Internet
Service Provider, come back and finish the rest of this lesson.
2. Click the Start button and select Internet Explorer from the menu.
Since babl d n ha e an e i ing In e ne c nnec i n you probably will get an
error page when you start Internet Explorer d n ab i.

3. Select Tools Internet Options from the menu, then click the
Connections tab.
The Connections tab of the Internet Options dialog box appears, as shown in Figure
9-3. This is where you tell Windows how you want to connect to the Internet.
4. Click Setup.
The Welcome to the New Connection Wizard screen appears.
5. Click Next.
You are presented with a few options; we want to use the default Connect to the
Internet option.
6. Click Next.
Next you have to specify how you want to connect to the Internet:
Choose from a list of Internet Service Providers (ISPs): If d n
have an account with an Internet Service Provider you can select this option to
ge e i h Mic f e limi ed f ISP .
Set up my connection manually: Al h gh i n he defa l i n, m
f he ime ll an e c nnec i n man all , e eciall if
already have an account with an ISP. Be ready with your user name, password,
and, if e ill ing a dial-up connection, phone number.
Use the CD I got from an ISP: If your received a CD from your ISP you can
in e i , elec hi i n, and click Ne al h gh can bably install
the software just as easily without the help of the New Connection Wizard.
7. Select the Set up my connection manually option and click Next.
More Internet connection choices, as shown in Figure 9-4. He e hat they are: Quick Reference
Connect using a dial-up modem: U e hi i n if e ill ing a
dial-up modem. To Connect to the Internet:
1. Click the Start button
Connect using a broadband connection that requires a user name
and select Internet
and password: Select this option if you have a DSL or cable modem that
Explorer from the menu.
requires a user name and password to connect to the Internet.
Or
Connect using a broadband connection that is always on: Most DSL
and cable modems always stay on and connected to the Internet; select this Click the Internet
option if you have this type of connection to the Internet. Explorer icon on the
Quick Launch bar.
You will probably have to refer to your ISP documentation to determine which of these
three options is right for you. 2. Select Tools Internet
Options from the menu
8. Select the option that best describes how you want to connect to Internet
then click the
and click Next. Connections tab.
The last step will differ, depending on which of the three i n elec ed; d n 3. Click Setup and click
worry the rest of the Wizard should be self-explanatory. Next, Next.
9. Follow the remaining on-screen instructions, entering a name for the 4. Select an option for how
Internet connection, your user name, and password when prompted. you want to connect to
the Internet (usually
manually) and click Next.
5. Follow the remaining on-
screen instructions,
entering a name for the
Internet connection, your
user name, and password
if prompted.
Lesson 9-3: Displaying a Specific

Web Page
Figure 9-5
The Microsoft Web site.
Address bar
Figure 9-6 Type the address of the Web
page you want to view and
When a Web page is press <Enter>.
unavailable, this screen is
displayed in Internet
Explorer.
Figure 9-5
Figure 9-6
Other Ways to Enter an Web addresses are everywhere on television advertisements, in magazine and newspaper
Internet Address:
a icle , and e en n b ine ca d . The e . me hing.c m e een and hea d
Press <Ctrl> + <L>. much about are URLs (Uniform Resource Locator). Just like there is a house, office, or
building behind a postal address, there is a Web page behind every Web address. Unlike postal
addresses, however, through the magic of technology you can instantly arrive at a Web page
b ing i Web add e , URL, in Web b e . Well, h ef ll in an l if
e al ead been on the Internet for any amount of time, you probably know that
sometimes the Internet gets busy and net congestion can cause a Web page to come up
slowly if at all! This lesson will show you how to visit the Web sites behind all the Web
add e e e seen.

1. Connect to the Internet.
I d e n ma e he e a e n he In e ne you can always enter a Web address in
the Address bar.
2. Click an empty area in the Address bar.
The text in the Address bar becomes highlighted.
3. Type the address of the Web page you want to view: type
www.microsoft.com and press <Enter>.
After a moment, the home page of the Microsoft Web site appears.
Web addresses are preceded by http://. For example, the address we want is Address Bar
http:// .mic f .c m. Technicall , d n need add he h :// bef e ing
the Web address save yourself some time and leave it out.
NOTE: If you forget the www in front of a Web address or a .com, an Internet
Explorer called IntelliSense® attempts to correct the Web address by adding You can leave off the
he .c m f . Unf na el , i not foolproof: sometimes it http:// when you type
k , me ime i d e n . a Web page address.
Le g an he Web i e. For example, type
4. Type www.yahoo.com in the Address bar and press <Enter>. www.nbc.com
Possibly the most famous Web site on the Internet, the Yahoo home page, appears. instead of
http://www.nbc.c
S me ime hen eb ing he Web, ll ee a c een like he ne in Figure 9-6. This om.
means the Web site is unavailable. Several things can cause a Web page not to load:
The computer where the Web page is stored is down.
Too many users are trying to view the same Web page at the same time.
Y el c nnec i n he In e ne .
The Web page no longer exists, or maybe it never existed in the first place (did you type
in the correct Web address?).
For all these cases, try going to the Web site again later. Whatever was causing the problem
might be fixed a few minutes or hours later.
Quick Reference
To Display a Specific Web
Page:
Type the Web address in
the Address bar and
press <Enter>.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <L>, type
the Web address, and
click OK.
Lesson 9-4: Browsing the Web

Brings you Edit the Opens
Figure 9-7 back to the Stops Brings you Shows Opens current Windows
previous loading a to the Home bookmarked your e-mail Web Opens Messenger.
The Internet Explorer Web page. Web page. page. Web pages. program. page. Research
task pane.
toolbar. Your toolbar may
be different depending on
how your computer is set
up. Brings you Reloads or Search the View Web Prints Opens Opens
forward to the
Figure 9-8 next Web page
refreshes Web with pages the the Encarta
the current the Search you've current Discuss Researcher.
in the History. visited Web pane.
The Yahoo home page. Web page. Companion.
Figure 9-7 recently. page.
Windows XP
Service Pack 2
Click the Address list arrow to
Internet Explorer blocks pop- display a list of Web sites that you
up indo s that ou don t have typed in.
request. For example, all
pop-up windows are initially
blocked, but any pop-up
windows that you request to
open will appear.
If you are certain you want to
view a blocked pop-up
window, click the Information
Bar and select Temporarily
Allow Pop-ups from the
shortcut menu. Figure 9-8
The W ld Wide Web i ema kabl ea na iga e. I ea that most users have an
uncanny ability to browse through Web pages without any training, even if they have
difficulty with other computer programs. This lesson explains how to find your way through
the millions of Web pages that are on the Internet. Even if you already think you have
browsing down, you should read this lesson you might learn a trick or two.
1. Make sure you W b b a a

Internet.
H ef ll kn h d hi b n ! Le g he Yah h me age.
2. Click the Address bar, type www.yahoo.com, and press <Enter>.
Instead of repeatedly The Yahoo home page fills the screen. Many of the underlined words and pictures you
clicking the Back and
see on the Yahoo page are actually hyperlinks. When you position the pointer over a
Forward buttons, you hyperlink, it changes to a . Clicking a hyperlink will automatically:
can click the list arrow Take you to a page within the same Web site.
to display a list of Take you to a page in a different Web site.
previous Web pages.
Take you to a part of the same Web site.
Allow you to download a file.

Send an e-mail to a specified e-mail address.
Play a video or sound.
3. Position the pointer over the Travel icon near the top of the Yahoo page.
The pointer changes anytime it is over a link. Links can be either text or pictures.
Link pointer
4. Click the Travel icon or text.
The Yahoo Travel Web page appears.
You can easily move back to the previous Web page.
5. Click the Back button on the toolbar.
Y e back a he Yah h me age. The F a db nm e f ad h gh he
Web pages you have viewed.
6. Click the Forward button on the toolbar.
You return to the Travel Web page.
Refresh button
Just like a metro highway system at rush hour, the Internet often becomes congested
when too many users try to view the same Web site at the same time. When this
happens, it may take a long time for the Web page to appear on-screen, or it may not be
accessible at all. Here are a few strategies to try if you are having problems displaying
Web pages.
7. Click the Address bar, type www.microsoft.com, and press <Enter>.
Before the Microsoft home page completely loads, click the Stop button
on the toolbar.
You can also try refreshing a sluggish or difficult Web page. There are basically two
reasons to refresh a Web page:
To attempt to view a Web page that is not loading.
To update a Web page that contains information that is constantly changing, Quick Reference
such as headline news stories or financial information.
To Use a Hyperlink:
8. Click the Refresh button on the toolbar.
Click the hyperlink with
Another way you can return to previously visited Web sites is to use the Address bar, the pointer.
hich emembe e e Web add e ha e man all ed in i .
To Go Back to the
9. Click the Address list arrow.
Previous Page:
A li f he Web add e e e e i l en e ed a ea bel he add e ba .
Click the Back button on
10. Select the http://www.yahoo.com site from the list. the toolbar.
You return to the Yahoo Web site.
To Stop the Transfer of
Information:
Click the Stop button on
the toolbar.
To Refresh a Web Page:
Click the Refresh button
on the toolbar.
To Return to a Web
Address you Typed in the
Address Bar:
Click the Address bar list
arrow and select the Web
address.
Lesson 9-5: Searching the Web

Figure 9-9
The Search Companion
task pane.
Figure 9-10
The Google search Enter your
question
engine.
here and
click
Search.
Figure 9-9
Enter a word or phrase

you want to search for
and click search.
Figure 9-10
The In e ne g ea e eng h i al i g ea e eakne : i h m ch inf ma i n

literally millions of Web pages it can be ex emel diffic l find ha e l king f .
Fortunately, there are many search engines that catalog the millions of Web pages on the
Internet so that you can find Web pages on topics that interest you, such as Google, Yahoo!
and Excite. In this less n, ll lea n h can ea ch he Web find inf ma i n n he
topics you specify.
1. Make sure your Web browser is open and you are connected to the
Search button Internet.
2. Click the Search button on the toolbar.

The Search Companion pane appears on the left side of Internet Explorer, as shown in
Figure 9-9. This is where you specify what you want to search for.

3. Click the Search box and type your question.
For better search results, use complete sentences or several keywords that describe
ha e l king f . F e am le, ing Whe e can I find a g d e
e a an in Chicag ? ld ield be e e l han im l e .
4. Click Search.
The Search Companion searches the Web for results using the MSN search engine. The
results of the search are shown in the window to the right of the task pane, ranked by
relevance.
5. Click the Web page you want to view.
Are you finding irrelevant information in your search results? Then you may have to
Search Box
efine ea ch. F e am le, a ea ch n he d Wind ma e l in link
Ande n® Wind , S ained Gla Wind , and Mic f Wind , hile
a ea ch n he h a e Mic f Wind ill e l in link Mic f
Wind . S me ea ch engine ill le ea ch i hin e l . F e am le,
c ld d a ea ch f Mic f Wind and hen f he efine ea ch b
ea ching he e l f he d Ne king.
6. Click the Search Companion task pane Close button.
Y d n ha e e he Sea ch C m ani n f he Web you can go directly to a
ea ch engine Web i e and ecif ha an l k f he e. Table 9-2:
Popular Search Engines on the Web is by no means a definitive inventory of the search
engines that are currently available on the Web, but it lists the best and most popular
Web search engines and their Web addresses.
Quick Reference
Table 9-2: Popular Search Engines on the Web
To Search the Web for
Site Web Address Description Information Using Internet
AOL search.aol.com The default search engine for America Online subscribers, the Explorer:
AOL search engine isn t bad, but ou re probabl better off using 1. Click the Search button
Google or Yahoo. on the toolbar.
Excite www.excite.com Excite once had a powerful, highly-rated search engine, but in 2. Type the word or phrase
recent years it has fallen behind the other search engines in terms you want to search for in
of features and popularity. the Search box and click
Search.
MSN www.msn.com The MSN, or Microsoft Network, is not only the default search
3. Click the link for the Web
engine for Internet E plorer; it s also the default home page
page you want to view.
(surprise, surprise). Even with that enormous advantage, both
Google and Yahoo still manage to be the preferred search 4. Click the Search button
engines for most Internet users. on the toolbar to close the
search panel.
Google www.google.com Google is the most popular search engine in the orld and it s
consistently ranked as having the most relevant search results. To Search the Web for
Ho ever, it doesn t contain man features other than its fantastic Information Using a
Web search. Search Engine:
Yahoo www.yahoo.com Yahoo is actually more of a directory service than a search Type the Web address for
engine, but it makes it ver eas to find topics, especiall if ou re the search engine in the
new to the Internet. Address bar and press
<Enter>. Type the word
or phrase you want to
search for in the Web
page s Search box and
press <Enter>.
Lesson 9-6: Adding a Web Page to

Favorites and Changing Your Home
Page
Figure 9-11
The Add Favorite dialog
box.
The name of the Web
Click the Favorites button page appears here.
to view a list of your Click the Web page you want
favorite Web pages. to visit. If the Web page is in
a folder, click the folder ( ).
Figure 9-13
The General tab of the
Internet Options dialog Figure 9-12
box. You can change your
home page here.
Figure 9-14
The Organize Favorites
dialog box.
Figure 9-14
Figure 9-13
Other Ways to Add a You have finally found a Web page about hippopotamus food, and you want to return back to
Web Page to Favorites: i la e . Wha h ld d ? Well, d n ha e i e d n he Web add e n a P -It
Right-click anywhere on note and stick on your monitor you can add the Web age In e ne E l e Fa i e
the Web page and fea e can al a ickl e n back i la e . In hi le n, ll lea n h add
select Add to fa i e Web i e he Fa i e li . Y ll al lea n h change h me age
Favorites from the (also called a start page) the Web page that appears each time you start Internet Explorer.
shortcut menu.
1. Ma W bb a I .
2. Go to a Web page that you visit frequently and want to add to your
Favorites list.
I d e n ma e h ou get to the Web site e he age Web add e in he
Address bar (if you know it) or navigate to it by clicking a hyperlink from another Web
site. When the desired Web page appears on your screen, you can add it to your
Favorites so you can always easily return to it later.

3. Select Favorites Add to Favorites from the menu.
The Add Favorite dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 9-11. The name of the Web
page appears in the Name box if an , can e lace he Web age defa l Favorites button
name with one that is more meaningful to you. Clicking the Create In button lets you Other Ways to View Your
add shortcuts to a folder. Favorite Web Pages:
4. Click OK to add the Web page. Select Favorites from
A shortcut to the Web page is added to your list of favorites. the menu bar and select
He e h di la fa i e Web i e : the Web page.
5. Click the Favorites button on the toolbar.
A list of your favorite Web pages appears in a panel on the left side of Internet
Quick Reference
Explorer, as shown in Figure 9-12.
6. Click the favorite Web page you want to view. To Add a Web Page to
Your List of Favorites:
If your favorite Web page is in a folder, just click the folder ( ) and then the favorite
Web site. The Web page you clicked appears in the right panel of Internet Explorer. Go to the Web page,
Is there a Web page that you really like and e alm e e ime e n he select Favorites Add
Internet? You might consider making that Web page your Home page the Web page to Favorites from the
that appears each time you start Internet Explorer. Some of the search engines we menu and click OK.
di c ed in he e i le n make e cellen h me age . He e h make a Or
Web page your home page: Go to the Web page,
7. Go to a Web page that you want to set as your home page and select right-click anywhere on
Tools Internet Options from the menu. Click the General tab, if the Web page and select
necessary. Add to Favorites from
the shortcut menu.
The Internet Options dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 9-13. The address of your
current home page appears in the box in the Home page section. To Go To a Favorite Web
8. Click the Use Current button to set the Web page that is displayed on Page:
your screen as your new home page. Click the Favorites
button on the toolbar and
9. Click OK. select the Web page from
The Internet Options dialog box closes. The next time you start Internet Explorer, the the left side of Internet
Web page you selected will appear as your start page. Explorer. Click the
Favorites button when
If e added a l f Web age li f fa i e , i can be diffic l find a
ou re finished.
specific Web page out of all those entries. You can organize your favorites list by
creating subfolders to keep related Web pages together for example, you might create Or
a f lde called T a el kee all a el ela ed Web age ge he , and an he Select Favorites from the
f lde called Financial h ld financial and in e men ela ed Web age . menu bar and select the
He e h gani e li f fa i e : Web page.
10. Select Favorites Organize Favorites from the menu. To Change Your Home
The Organize Favorites dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 9-14. We d n need Page:
go into detail here you can organize your favorites using the same Windows file Go to the Web page,
managemen echni e al ead kn (if d n , e ie he file managemen
select Tools Internet
chapter). The Organize Favorites dialog box even provides you with several handy
Options from the menu
buttons to move, rename, and delete files and shortcuts.
and click the Use Current
11. Close the Organize Favorites dialog box. button.
To Organize Favorites:
Select Favorites
Organize Favorites from
the menu.
Lesson 9-7: Displaying a History

of Visited Web Pages
Figure 9-15
Internet Explorer displays
a history of previously
visited Web sites.
Select the day or
week when you last
viewed the Web
page.
Visited pages are

grouped by Web
site.
Figure 9-15
Can find a back ha eall nea 101 L efi k Reci e Web i e ee

l king a e e da ? D n In e ne E l e kee ack f he Web age e
History button visited over the past 20 days. This lesson shows you how to access that list.
1. Ma W bb a I .
2. Click the History button on the toolbar.

A hi f all he Web age e i i ed ecen l a ea in he lef ide f
Quick Reference Internet Explorer. The history is grouped chronologically and by Web site all you
have to do is click the day or week you viewed the Web page, the name of the Web site,
To Display a History of
and the Web page.
Visited Web Pages:
1. Click the History button
3. Click the day or week you viewed the Web page that you want to view.
on the toolbar. If can emembe he da eek ff hand, d n . Finding he Web age
you want to view in the history may take a bit of trial and error, because who really
2. Click the day or week you
remembers the exact day when they visited a specific Web page?
viewed the Web page.
When you click a day or week, the Web sites you viewed during that day or week
3. Click the Web site you
appear, organized by Web site folder.
want to revisit.
4. Click the specific Web 4. Click the Web site you want to revisit.
page you want to view. The Web i e indi id al Web pages appear.
5. Click the History button 5. Click the Web page you want to view.
on the toolbar when The Web page appears.
ou ve finished. 6. Click the History button ba
with your history of recently viewed Web pages.
The History pane disappears.

Lesson 9-8: Clearing the History

of Visited Web Pages
Figure 9-16
The Internet Options
dialog box.
Increase or decrease the

number of days a page is
stored in history.
Click to erase the history

of pages you have visited.
Figure 9-16
You and your spouse have spent weeks planning and researching your surprise family
vacation this summer. Unfortunately, since many of your searches and reservations have been
made over the Internet, your Web-savvy kids know everything about the trip, thanks to the
History feature. You can take control of this feature by erasing the record of your Web
activity.
Quick Reference
1. Select Tools Internet Options from the menu. To Clear the History:
The Internet Options dialog box appears. 1. Select Tools Internet
Clearing the history is permanent, so make sure this is something you want to do. Options from the menu.
2. Click the Clear History button in the History section of the tab. 2. Click the Clear History
button.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm the action.
3. Click Yes. deletion.
And just like that, the list of saved page links disappears. 4. Click OK.
You might also notice that you can change the number of days a page is saved in
history. By default, pages are saved for 20 days, but you can increase or decrease that
number if you want. Setting the number to zero only stores links to pages visited on the
current day.
4. Click OK.
One thing to remember is that the history is different from the Back and Forward
buttons on the toolbar. The history keeps a record of every Web page that is visited
over a period of time. The Back and Forward buttons only remember which pages were
visited when the Web browser was open.
Lesson 9-9: Downloading Pictures

and Files
Figure 9-17
Specify where you want
the file to be saved on
your hard drive.
Figure 9-18
Windows displays the
progress of a download.
Figure 9-17
Figure 9-18
Windows XP Another common use of the Internet is to download files from a Web server and save them
Service Pack 2 onto your local hard drive. Some of the most common types of files people download from
the Internet include:
Internet Explorer blocks
downloads that you do not Images: You can save any picture that you see on a Web page, print it, use it as your
instigate. For example, if Windows wallpaper, or anything else you can think of.
Internet E plorer doesn t Programs: Many software companies have demo versions of their programs available
think you requested a on the Internet that you can download and evaluate. In addition, thousands of shareware
download, or if the download programs are available for you to download for free!
waits too long to begin, it is Patches, Fixes, and Drivers: One of the great things about the Internet is finding
blocked. fixes for your programs, and drivers for your hardware devices, such as a driver for a
If you are certain you want to discontinued foreign printer.
download the file, click the Music: MP3s are revolutionizing the music industry. MP3 files are sound files that you
Information Bar and select can listen to on your computer. They have digital CD quality sound, but use compression
Download File from the so that they are 11 times smaller than the CD equivalent and small enough to be easily
shortcut menu. downloadable from the Internet.
Viruses: Just kidding the last thing you want to download from the Internet is a
c m e i ! Since n al a kn he e a g am file an
download comes from, you should make sure your computer has a virus protection
program installed before you download anything from the Internet.

Aside from possibly contracting a virus, the only other downside of downloading files from
the Internet is that it can take a long time especially if you use a dial-up connection.
Downloading and saving programs over the Internet is quite simple: just follow the links on
the Web site. But you can also save other elements on a Web page, such as images and even
the pages themselves.
Be careful when
1. Right-click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from downloading files.
the shortcut menu. Many downloads are
Windows asks where to save the image in the Save As dialog box, as shown in Figure free, but there are
9-17. also many that require
purchase.
NOTE: Never download an image for free and then profit from its use: it is a
c igh i la i n. If e l king f image e in blica i n
Web sites, there are many Web sites with stock images that you can purchase.
2. Navigate to the drive and/or folder where you want to save the image,
give the image a different name, and click Save.
Windows saves the image in the specified drive and/or folder. If this does not work, the
image ha babl been ec ed ha he can d nl ad he ic e and e i
for free.
Y can al a e a Web age file ha n he he ide f a h e link, he a ge
of the link.
3. Right-click the link or file and select Save Target As from the shortcut
menu.
Windows asks where to save the image in the Save As dialog box. As with images, you
have to specify where you want to save the file.
4. Navigate to the drive and/or folder where you want to save the file, give
the file a different name if you want, and click Save.
Windows will download the file and save it to the drive and/or folder you specified. It Quick Reference
may take several minutes or several hours to download the file, depending on the file
size and how fast your connection to the Internet is. Windows displays a dialog box To Download an Image:
that shows the progress of the download, as shown in Figure 9-18. 1. Right-click the image you
want to save and select
NOTE: Make sure you remember where you save your files! Many people download
Save Picture As from the
f ae ih hinking ab he e he e a ing i , nl be nable
shortcut menu.
find he file nce i fini hed d nl ading. I make en e c ea e and e a
f lde called D nl ad me hing imila he e can a e 2. Navigate to the drive and
downloaded files. folder where you want to
save the image, give the
One more note about downloading files and programs off the Internet: many of the programs image a different name if
are stored in ZIP files. ZIP files package programs and files together, making them easier to you want, and click Save.
download.
To Download a Link
ZIP files do two things: Target:
Compress information: Instead of downloading a 2 MB file, compressing the file will 1. Right-click the link and
cut the download time in half. select Save Target As
Store multiple files together in a single ZIP file: Instead of downloading 20 or so from the shortcut menu.
files that a program requires to run, you only have to download a single ZIP file. 2. Navigate to the drive and
folder where you want to
save the file, give the file
a different name and click
Save.

Information Bar
Figure 9-19
The Information Bar,
notifying that a pop-up
window has been blocked. The Information Bar
appears when a
security action has
been taken. Click the
Information Bar to
access a menu of
actions you can take.
Windows XP
Service Pack 2
The Information Bar notifies
you when a security action
has taken place.
Click the Information Bar to
overrule Internet Explorer or
to change settings. The security icon appears in the status bar The pop-up icon appears
when a security action has occurred. in the status bar.
Figure 9-19
One of the most noticeable additions to Internet Explorer in Windows XP Service Pack 2 is
the Information Bar. The Information Bar notifies you when a security action has taken place
in order to protect you from harmful files. For example, it tells you when a suspicious
download has been stopped and when an unwanted pop-up window has been blocked. The
Information Bar could also appear if a Web site tries to install an ActiveX control or run
active content on your computer automatically.
Another benefit of the Information Bar is that it provides an opportunity for you to overrule
Quick Reference the block and proceed with the action. In the example above, the Information Bar has been
To Use the Information clicked and a menu appears with options to view the pop-ups that were blocked, or to even
Bar: change the settings of the pop-up blocker.
Th gh can n ff he Inf ma i n Ba al ge he , can change h i k ih
Click the Information Bar
and select an option from each individual notification by clicking the Information Bar when it appears.
the shortcut menu. Here are some messages that you might see in the Information Bar:
Table 9-3: Information Bar Messages

To help protect your security, Internet Explorer Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up or additional
blocked this site from downloading files on your options click here
computer. Click here for options
To protect your security, Internet Explorer To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has
stopped this site from installing an ActiveX restricted this file from showing active content that
control on your computer. Click here for could access your computer. Click here for
options options

Lesson 9-11: Using the Pop-up

Blocker
Figure 9-20
The Pop-up Blocker
Enter the Web Settings dialog box.
address of a site
you want to exclude
from the pop-up
blocker here.
Sites that allow

automatic pop-ups
appear in this list. Windows XP
Service Pack 2
Internet E plorer s Pop-up
Blocker prevents extra
windows from appearing on
Change how the your screen.
pop-up appears
in Internet You can change how the
Explorer and its Pop-up Blocker works by
filter level here.
Figure 9-20
clicking the Information Bar,
or under the Tools menu.
Another change included in Service Pack 2 is the pop-up blocker. The pop-up blocker
prevents annoying advertisement windows from disrupting your browsing on the Web. Most
people will appreciate the pop- bl cke , b if d n , he e h change i e ing .
Quick Reference
1. Select Tools Pop-up Blocker Pop-up Blocker Settings from the To Change Pop-up
menu. Blocker Settings:
The Pop-up Blocker Settings dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 9-20. 1. Select Tools Pop-up
If you know the Web site you want to allow pop-ups, you can enter the name of the Blocker Pop-up
Web site in the dialog box. Blocker Settings from
2. Type the Web site in the Address of Web site to allow text box and the menu.
click Add. 2. Change the Pop-up
The address is added to the Allowed sites list in the dialog box. Blocker settings in the
dialog box.
By default the pop-up blocker is always on, but you can turn it off.
Or
3. Select Tools Pop-up Blocker Turn Off Pop-up Blocker from the
menu. Click the Information Bar
and select an option from
When the pop-up blocker is off you will probably experience some unwanted the shortcut menu.
advertising windows as you surf the Web. The pop-up blocker has a pretty good filter,
be een c n lling i e ing and making e ce i n , babl n e e To Turn Off the Pop-up
have to turn it off completely. Blocker:
Select Tools Pop-up
Blocker Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker from the
menu.

Information Security
Figure 9-21
Windows XP has new
security features in
Service Pack 2 that help
protect your computer
from attackers.
Figure 9-21
Security is a sensitive issue. We hire security officers to protect our workplaces, analyze
na i nal ec i eff , and in all ec i em in h me . B man e le a en
Quick Reference sure of what they can do to secure their computer, even though identity theft is occurring
To do this: more often now than ever before. Microsoft has added many security improvements to
Windows XP in Service Pack 2, and listed below are some security precautions and resources
1. Step one here. that you can maintain to keep your computer safe.
2. Step two here.
Install anti-virus software: Every computer that accesses the Internet should have anti-
Information Security: virus software installed on it. This software identifies potentially harmful files, and keeps
Information security is the them from infiltrating your computer.
practice of protecting your Update anti-virus software: One of the biggest reasons a computer gets infected is that
computer from intruders. anti-virus software is not updated. Always download updates for your anti-virus software, and
Here are some security always renew your anti-virus software license.
precautions that help protect Update software: Always download updates and repairs for programs. This will prevent
your sensitive information a acke f m e l i ing h le in he f a e. Wind XP A ma ic U da e kee
Install anti-virus software. c m e echn l g afe and current.
Or Use firewalls: A firewall blocks malicious files or computers from connecting to your
Update anti-virus computer. A firewall is especially important for computers that connect to the Internet via
software. DSL or cable modems. Windows Firewall has been added in SP2, but you can also choose
your own software program.
Update software
Use firewalls Be smart with e-mail: Viruses and worms are sent through e-mail messages all the time.
Never open an e-mail me age f m me ne d n kn .
Be smart with e-mail
In the end, the best defense against a security problem is you. By using common sense and
avoiding sites, files and messages that look suspicious, your computer will be safe.


Windows Firewall
Figure 9-22
The tabs in the Windows Firewall dialog box
allow you to change its settings. The Windows Firewall
General
dialog box.
Turn Windows Firewall on or off.
Exceptions
Allow certain connections through the
firewall, such as instant messaging requests.
Advanced
Change advanced settings, such as network
connections and security logging.
Windows XP
Service Pack 2
Windows Firewall has been
Figure 9-22
added to help keep your
computer more secure. It is
turned on by default.
You like to spend sunny afternoons out on your backyard patio. Unfortunately, so does your
neighb l bbe d g. In fac , he ffending canine i all acc m anied b i ne ,
who has a knack for disturbing an otherwise pleasant afternoon. What do you do to keep these
uninvited guests out of your yard? Keep them out with a fence or a wall.
Just like your yard, when your computer is on the Internet, it is inundated with connections
from other computers. To keep these annoying intruders out, Microsoft has built a firewall for
your computer. A firewall is a utility that keeps your computer secure by restricting the
information that comes into your computer. Its main objective is to prevent intruders, such as Quick Reference
hackers, viruses and worms, from getting in to your computer. The firewall is like a monitor
f all he inf ma i n be een c m e and he In e ne , all ing g d inf ma i n Windows Firewall:
h gh, and ejec ing bad inf ma i n. This security utility keeps
So what is the difference between good and bad information? Basically, any connection you your computer secure by
try to make to another computer, such as viewing a Web page or connecting to another restricting the information
network, is allowed. But when someone tries to make a connection to your computer an that comes into your
n lici ed e e ha c nnec i n i bl cked. Le ake a l k a he Wind Fi e all. computer.
To Open Windows
1. Click the Start button and select Control Panel from the menu. Click Firewall:
the Security Center category. 1. Click the Start button
The Security Center displays the security features that are active on your computer. and select Control Panel
2. Click Windows Firewall near the bottom of the screen. from the menu.
The Windows Firewall dialog box appears. You should always keep Windows Firewall 2. Click the Security Center
on, unless you have your own firewall software that you want to use. category.
You can change how the firewall works by changing some of its settings, however. 3. Click Windows Firewall.
Refer to Figure 9-22 for more information on these settings.
Lesson 9-14: Introduction to

E-mail
Figure 9-23
Microsoft Outlook Express Toolbar
is the e-mail program that
is included with Windows
XP.
E-mail folders:
Figure 9-24 see Table 9-4:
E-mail Folders
for their Click the task
Outlook Express toolbar. you want to
descriptions.
perform here.
Figure 9-25
An Internet e-mail address
has two parts: a user
name and a domain
name, separated by the @
symbol. Figure 9-23
Compose a new
Sends messages ou ve
composed, and downloads
[email protected]
E-mail message. new messages.
User Name Domain Name
This is the name of This is the location
the person s e-mail of the person s
account. It is account on the
similar to the Internet. It is similar
person s name on to the address on
Opens the Finds people, an envelope. an envelope.
address book. messages, or
Figure 9-24 text. Figure 9-25
Windows XP
Service Pack 2 Do you really need an introduction to e-mail? You already know that you can use e-mail to
Outlook Express has send messages to the staff at the office or to people all over the world. You probably also
undergone improvements in know that e-mail is fast (almost instantaneous) and economical (many e-mail accounts are
its security settings, including completely free!).
some security features that J like need kn a e n ee add e if an end hem a le e ,
also appear in Outlook 2003. need kn a e n e-mail address to send that person an e-mail message. Figure 9-25 is
an example of what a typical e-mail address looks like.
Windows XP comes with an e-mail program called Outlook Express. Outlook Express is a
stripped-d n e i n f Mic f f ll-featured e-mail program Outlook, which comes
with Microsoft Office. Outlook Express allows you compose, send, and receive e-mail
messages over the Internet. The remainder of the lessons in this chapter will show you how to
accomplish these tasks.
M e n he ne and nl e in hi le n and e ll ake a ick l k a O l k
Express before we move on and learn how to compose, send, and receive e-mail.

1. Click the Start button. Select All Programs Outlook Express from
the menu.
The main screen of Outlook Express appears, as shown in Figure 9-25. Notice the
folders in the left pane of Outlook Express? These folders categorize your messages
and k j like he In and O b e e een a he ffice. Table 9-4: E-mail
Folders describes each of these folders.
Many people prefer to
NOTE: The first time you open Outlook Express, you will have to set up your
use Web-based e-mail,
account, such as user name, send and receive server types, e-mail address, and
so on. such as Hotmail, since
you can use it on any
Al h gh e ll be king in Mic f O l k E e h gh he emaining le n in computer that has a
this chapter, Outlook Express is by no means the only program you can use to send and connection to the
receive e-mail. There are many, many different e-mail programs available, such as Internet.
GroupWise, Lotus Notes, and even America Online that can also send and receive e-mail. In
fac , if e c nnec ed he In e ne and ha e a Web b e, d n e en need an e-
mail program at all to send and receive e-mail you can do it right from the Web!
Web based e-mail is usually free, and it allows you to compose, send, and receive e-mail
using a Web page instead of an e-mail program. Many people actually prefer using Web-based
e-mail instead of an e-mail program beca e i f ee and can be acce ed an he e he e i a
computer with an Internet connection. Hotmail, owned by Microsoft (who else?), is the
largest Web-based e-mail program in the world.
Table 9-4: E-mail Folders

Folder Description
Stores the messages ou ve received.

Inbox
Temporaril stores an messages that ou ve composed but have not been

Outbox sent.
Stores copies of messages you have sent.

Sent Items Quick Reference
To Start Outlook Express:
Stores messages that ou ve deleted.
Deleted Items 1. Click the Start button
and select All Programs
Stores draft messages that ou haven t completed et. Outlook Express
Drafts
from the menu.
Lesson 9-15: Composing and

Sending E-mail
Figure 9-26
To: Enter the recipient(s) of the message.
The New Message
Cc: Send a copy of the message to these recipients.
window.
Subject: Enter the subject of the message.
Figure 9-27
The New Message Formatting Toolbar: Use to apply font and paragraph
formatting to your message, and to insert lines, pictures,
toolbar. and hyperlinks to Web pages.
Body: Type your e-mail message here, as you

would using a word processor.
Figure 9-26
Send the
message to Check names Attach a Encrypt
the Outbox Cut Paste for errors file message
Figure 9-27
Copy Undo Spell Set as a Digitally sign Work
check priority message offline
He e a b ief explanation of how to compose and send an e-mail message:
1. Click the Start button and select All Programs Outlook Express
from the menu.
The Outlook Express program window appears.
2. Click the Create Mail button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
Create Mail The New Message window appears, ready for you to write your e-mail message. The
button
fi hing d i ecif he eci ien e-mail address in the To: field.
Other Ways to Compose
a Message: You can either type this address in the To: box, or you can click he Selec Reci ien
Select Compose f m a li b n ha a ea immedia el he lef f he T : b .
New Message from the 3. T -mail address in the To: field.
menu. If need end a me age m e han ne e n, im l en e all he eci ien
Press <Ctrl> + <N>. e-mail addresses, making sure you separate them with a comma (,) like this:
[email protected], [email protected].
Ski S e 7 hen e fini hed.
4. If the address is in your Address Book, click the To: button.
The Select Recipients dialog box appears.
To: button

5. Double-click the name of the recipient in the Name list.
Repeat this step to add more than one recipient from the Name list.
6. Click OK.
The Select Recipients dialog box closes and the recipient(s) appear in the To: field. Attach button
7. (Optional) To send a copy of a message to someone, click in the Cc: field
and enter their e-mail address(es).
You can type their name in the field or click the Cc: button to select a name from the
Address Book.
So what is (Cc) and (Bcc)? Table 9-5: Ways to Address an E-mail Message gives a Send and Receive
button
description of each of these ways to send a message.
Next, enter the subject of the message so your recipient(s) will know what the message
i ab . The bjec ill a ea in he heading f he me age in he eci ien inb .
8. Click the Subject field and enter a subject for the e-mail.
N e ead e he ac ual e-mail message.
9. Click the pointer in the body of the message then type the message as Quick Reference
you would in a word processor. To Compose a Message:
Kee in mind ha all he gene ic Wind g am c mmand e lea ned such 1. Open Outlook Express.
as cutting, copying, pasting, and formatting text will work in Outlook Express. 2. Click the Create Mail
10. (Optional) To check the spelling of your message, select Tools button on the Outlook
Spelling from the menu. Express toolbar.
Outlook Express checks the elling in me age, flag each d i can find in 3. T pe the recipient s
its dictionary, and suggests an alternate word. To replace an unknown word with a address in the To: field.
suggestion, select the suggestion in the Change To list and click the Change button. To Or
ignore a word the spell checke d e n ec gni e, ch a he name f a ci , click
Click the To: button, click
Ignore All.
the name of the recipient
11. (Optional) To send a file or picture along with your message, click the in the Name list, then
Attach button on the toolbar and select the file in the Insert Attachment double-click the name.
dialog box. Click OK hen ou re
finished.
12. W shed with the message, click the Send button on the 4. Click the Subject field
toolbar. and enter the message s
The message is sent to the Outbox folder, and will be sent the next time you click the subject.
Send and Receive button. 5. Click the pointer in the
13. Click the Send and Receive All button on the Outlook toolbar. lower pane and type the
message.
Outlook sends all the messages that are stored in the Outbox folder and retrieves any
new e-mail messages it finds on the e-mail server. 6. (Optional) Check the
spelling of your message
by selecting Tools
Table 9-5: Ways to Address an E-mail Message Spelling from the menu.
Address Description 7. (Optional) Attach a file to
To Sends the message to the recipient you specify (required). the message by clicking
the Attach button on the
Carbon Copy (Cc) Sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly involved, toolbar and then selecting
but would be interested in the message. the file in the Insert
Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) Sends a copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else Attachment dialog box.
knowing that they received the message. 8. Click the Send button on
the toolbar to send the
message.
Lesson 9-16: Adding a Name to

the Address Book
Figure 9-28
The Address Book Add to
window. To: list
Figure 9-29 Add to

Cc: list
The Select Recipients
dialog box.
Add to
Figure 9-30 Bcc: list
The Properties dialog box.
Figure 9-28 Figure 9-29 Select the recipient(s)
Figure 9-30
Unless you only write to two or three people, i alm im ible mem i e he e-mail
addresses of everyone you correspond with, especially when they have e-mail addresses that
look something like [email protected]. Fortunately, if you use the
Address Book
button Wind Add e B k, d n have to. Simply enter the names and e-mail addresses to
h m eg la l end me age , and ll ne e ha e emembe an he b c e e-
Other Ways to Open the
Address Book: mail address again.
Press <Ctrl> + <Shift>
+ . 1. If necessary, open Outlook Express.
2. Click the Address Book button on the Outlook Express toolbar.

The Address Book window appears, as shown in Figure 9-28. Two types of items
appear in the Windows Address Book:
Contacts: Contacts are the individual recipients in your Address Book.

Groups: A group allows you to send messages to a group of recipients.
3. Click the New button in the Address Book toolbar. Select New Contact
from the list.
The Properties dialog box appears with the Name tab in front, as shown in Figure 9-30. New Contact
button
4. T a a a a a .
5. E a D a b , -mail
address.
You can also use the other tabs in the Properties dialog box to add additional
information such as phone numbers and addresses about the recipient.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
You return to the Address Book window, where the new contact appears.
7. Click the Address Book window Close button to close it.
Quick Reference
To Add a Name to the
Address Book:
1. Click the Address Book
button on the Outlook
Express toolbar.
2. Click the New button on
the Address Book toolbar
and select New Contact
from the drop-down list.
3. T pe the recipient s first
and last name and enter
the recipient s e-mail
address.
4. To add additional
information about the
contact, click on other
tabs in the Properties
dialog box.
5. Click OK, then close the
Address Book.
Lesson 9-17: Receiving E-mail

Figure 9-31
This area displays the
Outlook E press s Inbo messages in the highlighted
folder. folder. Click or double-click
the message you want to
Figure 9-32 read.
Outlook E press s Inbo Messages that have not

been opened appear in bold
toolbar. and have a closed envelope
( ). A paper clip ( )
indicates an attached
message.
The contents of the selected

message appear in this area.
Windows XP
Service Pack 2
Figure 9-31
Outlook Express has added
some security settings that
effect how you view
messages: Compose a new Reply to all the recipients Send or receive a Find a contact
E-mails can now be read in E-mail message. of a message. Print a message. message. or message.
plain-text format instead of
HTML. This prevents some
security issues that can occur
with HTML messages.
Reply to the author Forward a message Delete the Open the
Images in HTML messages of a message. to someone else. message. address book.
are blocked. This prevents Figure 9-32
Spammers from knowing if
your address is valid. This is
This lesson explains how to receive and read your e-mail messages with Outlook Express.
also more convenient for dial-
Y ll find i a l ea ier to retrieve and read e-mail messages than it is to sort through and
up users.
read postal mail no envelopes to rip open, no scribbled handwriting to decipher, no junk
mail g h gh ell ha n i e e. Unf na el , he nline ld i lag ed
with junk mail, called Spam, just like the postal world. Oh well.
Inbox folder 1. If necessary, open Outlook Express.
2. Click the Inbox folder in the left pane of the Outlook Express window.
The contents of the Inbox folder appear in the upper-right pane of the Outlook Express
window, as shown in Figure 9-31. Le check and ee if ha e an ne e-mail.
3. Click the Send and Receive button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
Normally, Outlook Express automatically checks your mail server for new messages
Send and Receive every 30 minutes. If it finds any new messages on your mail server, it downloads them
button and saves them to your computer. You can force Outlook to check for new messages by
Other Ways to Send and clicking the Send and Receive button. If you connect to the Internet with a modem
Receive Messages: connection, Outlook Express will automatically dial out and connect to the Internet to
establish a connection with your mail server.
Press <Ctrl> + <M>.

Your new messages are saved in the Inbox folder. Any new, unread messages appear in
bold and have a closed envelope icon ( ) ne hem. He e h en and ead a
message.
4. Click the message you want to read.
The contents of the message appear in the lower-right pane of Outlook Express, and the
From and Subject information appear at the top of this pane. You can also open a
message its own window this is especially helpful when you want to read a long
Paper Clip
message. Simply double-click the message you want to read. The message appears in
i n ind . Y can cl e he me age ind hen e fini hed eading i
b clicking he ind cl e button.
If a message has one or more files attached to it, a paper clip will also appear in this
area. If a message contains an attachment, go to Step 5 to open it. If not, skip ahead to
Step 6.
Print button
5. (Optional) To open files attached to a message, click the paper clip icon
and select the file from the list. Other Ways to Print:
S me ime ll an in a c f a me age. He e h d i: Select File Print
from the menu.
6. (Optional) To print a message, click the Print button on the toolbar. Click
OK to print the message. Press <Ctrl> + .
Quick Reference
To Receive and Read
E-mail Messages:
1. Start Outlook Express
and click the Inbox folder.
2. Click the Send and
Receive All button on
the Outlook Express
toolbar.
3. Click or double-click the
message you want to
read.
To Open an Attached File:
Follow the above steps to
read the message, then
click the paper clip icon,
and then click the file you
want to open from the list
that appears from the
paper clip.
To Print a Message:
Click the Print button.
Or
Select File Print from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl>+ .
Lesson 9-18: Replying to a

Message
Figure 9-33
You can reply to a
message. Outlook Express fills in the
address and subject fields
for you.
Type your reply here.
A copy of the original

message is included to
help the reader know
which message you are
replying to.
Figure 9-33
You can reply to a message, just like you would answer a letter. This lesson explains how to
Reply to All do it.
button
1. Find and open the message you want to reply to.
You learned how to open and read messages in the previous lesson. Next, you need to
decide who you want to respond to. You have two choices:
Reply to Author Reply to Author: Sends the reply only to the author of the message.
button Reply to All: Sends the reply to everyone who received the message.
2. Click the reply option you want to use: Reply to Author or Reply to All.
A window appears where you can type your reply.
3. Type your reply and click the Send button ba
Quick Reference finished.
To Reply to a Message: You can use special characters to express emotion in your e-mail messages, in chat rooms, or
1. Find and open the elsewhere on the Internet. Table 9-6: Expressing Emotion in Your Messages has some of the
message you want to more common ones. Some of them resemble a face if you turn them sideways.
reply to.
2. Click the reply option you Table 9-6: Expressing Emotion in Your Messages
want to use: Reply to
Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description
Author or Reply to All.
3. Type your reply and click : ) or : - ) Smile FAQ Frequently asked questions
the Send button on the : ( or : - ( Frown IMHO In my humble opinion
toolbar hen ou re
finished. ; ) or ; - ) Wink LOL Laughing out loud
: )~ or : - )~ Sticking tongue out ROTFL Rolling on the floor laughing
: O or : - O Surprise FWD Forwarded message

Lesson 9-19: Forwarding and

Deleting a Message
Figure 9-34
You can forward a
message.
Type the e-mail address of the
recipient you want to receive the
forwarded message.
Type any comments you want to

add to the message here.
The original message appears

here.
Figure 9-34
Forward button
Af e e ead a me age, can add n c mmen and forward it, or pass it
along, to someone else. Besides the typical business correspondence, many people especially
like to forward e-mails that contain jokes or words of wisdom.
1. Find and open the message you want to forward.
2. Click the Forward button on the toolbar. Quick Reference
A window appears with the message you are forwarding. You need to specify to whom To Forward a Message:
you want to send, or forward, the message. 1. Find and select the
3. Type the recipi -mail address in the To: field or use the Address message you want to
B a . forward and click the
Forward Message
You can also add your own comments about the message you are forwarding.
button on the toolbar.
4. (Optional) To add your own comments to the message, click the message 2. Enter the recipient s e-
body area and type your comments. mail address in the To:
Y e ead end he f a ded me age. field.
5. Click the Send button on the toolbar to forward the message. 3. (Optional) Enter your own
Remembe ha clicking Send n mall nl end i he O b f lde . Y ll ha e comments in the
to click the Send and Receive button to actually send the message. message body area.
When you no longer need a message, you can delete it to prevent your Inbox folder 4. Click the Send button on
from becoming cluttered with dozens of messages. Deleting a message is very, very the toolbar.
ea . He e h d i: To Delete a Message:
6. Select the message you want to delete and press the <Delete> key. Select the message you
The message is removed from the current folder and is placed in the Deleted Items want to delete and press
folder. the <Delete> key.
Chapter Nine Review
Lesson Summary
Introduction to the Internet
The Internet is the largest computer network in the world, with millions of computers all over the
world connected to each other.
Web pages are stored on Web servers, which are always connected to the Internet so that people
can view their Web pages 24 hours a day.
Some of things you can do using Internet include sending and receiving e-mail, browsing the World
Wide Web, posting and reading newsgroup messages, chatting with other Internet users, and
downloading software.
Connecting to the Internet

To connect to the Internet you need an Internet Service Provider (ISP), a Web browser program,
and a phone line and modem or other connection to the Internet.
To Connect to the Internet: Click the Start button and select Internet Explorer from the menu or
click the Internet Explorer icon on the Quick Launch bar. Select Tools Internet Options from
the menu then click the Connections tab. Click Setup and click Next, Next. Select an option for
how you want to connect to the Internet (usually manually) and click Next. Follow the remaining
on-screen instructions, entering a name for the Internet connection, your user name, and password
if prompted.
Displaying a Specific Web Page

To Display a Specific Web Page: Type the Web address in the Address bar and press <Enter>.
Or, press <Ctrl> + <L>, type the Web address, and click OK.
Sometimes a Web page may not be available for viewing. This can be caused by a Web server
being down where the Web page is stored, by Internet congestion, or by the Web page no longer
existing. Try returning to the Web page later.
Browsing the Web

A hyperlink is a link to another Web page or file. The pointer changes to a whenever it is
positioned over a hyperlink.
To Use a Hyperlink: Click the hyperlink with the pointer.
To Go Back to the Previous Page: Click the Back button on the toolbar.
To Stop the Transfer of Information: Click the Stop button on the toolbar.
To Refresh a Web Page: Click the Refresh button on the toolbar.
To Return to a Web Address you Typed in the Address Bar: Click the Address bar list arrow
and select the Web address.

Searching the Web

To Search the Web for Information Using Internet Explorer: Click the Search button on the
toolbar, type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Search the Web for box and click
Search, then click the link for the Web page you want to look at. Click the Search button on the
toolbar to close the search panel.
To Search the Web for Information Using a Search Engine: Type the Web address for the
search engine in the Address bar and press <Enter>. Type the word or phrase you want to search
for in the Web page s Search box and press <Enter>.
Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing your Home Page

To Add a Web Page to Your List of Favorites: Go to the Web page, select Favorites Add to
Favorites from the menu and click OK, or right-click anywhere on the Web page and select Add to
Favorites from the shortcut menu.
To Go To a Favorite Web Page: Click the Favorites button on the toolbar and select the Web
page from the left side of Internet Explorer, then click the Favorites button hen ou re finished.
You can also go to a favorite Web page by selecting Favorites from the menu bar and selecting
the Web page.
To Change Your Home Page: Go to the Web page, select Tools Internet Options from the
menu and click the Use Current button.
To Organize Your Favorites: Select Favorites Organize Favorites from the menu.
Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages

Click the History button on the toolbar and click the day or week you viewed the Web page. Click
the Web site you want to revisit and then the specific Web page. Click the History button on the
toolbar hen ou ve finished.
Clearing the History of Visited Web Pages

Select Tools Internet Options from the menu. Click the Clear History button, click Yes to
confirm the deletion and click OK.
Saving Pictures and Files to Disk (Downloading)

To Download an Image: Right-click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from
the shortcut menu, navigate to the drive and folder when you want to save the image, give the
image a different name if you want, and click Save.
To Download a File: Right-click the file you want to download, select Save Target As from the
shortcut menu, navigate to the drive and folder when you want to save the file, give the file a
different name if you want, and click Save.
Many programs and files on the Internet are stored in compressed ZIP files and need to be
unpacked using a program called WinZip.
Understanding the Information Bar

The Information Bar notifies you when a security action has taken place.
To Use the Information Bar: Click the Information Bar and select an option from the shortcut
menu.
Using the Pop-up Blocker

To Change Pop-up Blocker Settings: Select Tools Pop-up Blocker Pop-up Blocker
Settings from the menu and change the Pop-up Blocker settings in the dialog box. Or, click the
Information Bar and select an option from the shortcut menu.
To Turn Off the Pop-up Blocker: Select Tools Pop-up Blocker Turn Off Pop-up Blocker
from the menu.
Understanding Information Security

Information security is the practice of protecting your computer from intruders. Here are some
security precautions that help protect your sensitive information. Install anti-virus software; Update
anti-virus software; Update software; Use firewalls; Be smart with e-mail
Understanding Windows Firewall

This security utility keeps your computer secure by restricting the information that comes into your
computer.
To Open Windows Firewall: Click the Start button and select Control Panel. Click the Security
Center icon and click the Windows Firewall icon.
Introduction to E-mail
To Start Outlook Express: Click the Start button. Select All Programs Outlook Express
from the menu.
Composing and Sending E-mail

To Compose a Message: Start Outlook Express, click the Create Mail button on the Outlook
E press toolbar, t pe the recipient s address in the To: field or click the To: button to the left of the
To: field and double-click the name. Click OK hen ou re finished. Click the Subject field and
enter the message s subject. Click the pointer in the lo er pane and t pe the message. Click the
Send button on the toolbar to send the message.
To Check a Message for Spelling Errors: Before you send the message, select Tools
Spelling from the menu.
To Attach a File to a Message: Before you send the message click the Attach button on the
toolbar and then select the file in the Insert Attachment dialog box.
You can address a message using To which sends the message to the recipient you specify
(required), Carbon Copy (Cc) which sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly
involved, but would be interested in the message, and Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) which sends a
copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else knowing that they received the message.
Adding a Name to the Address Book

To Add a Name to the Address Book: Click the Address Book button on the Outlook Express
toolbar, and click the New button on the Address Book toolbar and select New Contact from the
drop-do n list. T pe the recipient s first and last name in the appropriate fields and enter the
recipient s displa name and e-mail address. To add additional information about the contact, click
on other tabs in the Properties dialog box. Click OK, and then close the Address Book.

Receiving E-mail
Outlook Express checks your mail server for new messages automatically, but you can also check
for new messages by clicking the Send and Receive All button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
To Receive and Read E-mail Messages: Start Outlook Express and click the Inbox folder, click
the Send and Receive All button on the Outlook Express toolbar, and click or double-click the
message you want to read.
To Open an Attached File: Follow the above steps to read the message, then click the paper clip
icon and then click the file you want to open from the list that appears from the paper clip.
To Print a Message: Click the Print button, or select File Print from the menu, or press
<Ctrl>+ .
Replying to a Message
To Reply to a Message: Find and open the message you want to reply to, click the reply option
you want to use: Reply to Author or Reply to All. Type your reply and click the Send button on
the toolbar hen ou re finished.
Forwarding a Message
To Forward a Message: Find and select the message you want to forward and click the
Forward Message button on the toolbar, enter the recipient s e-mail address in the To: field, enter
your own comments in the message body area, and click the Send button on the toolbar.
To Delete a Message: Select the message you want to delete and press the <Delete> key.
Quiz
1. A Web server is:
A. The ld la ge e c m e ha c n ain and n he In e ne .
B. A computer that stores Web pages and that is always connected to the Internet.
C. A computer that acts as a gateway between your office network and the Internet.
D. A waiter at a restaurant for spiders.
2. A Home page is the first Web page you see when you connect to the
Internet. (True or False?)
3. W b I E ba b ba a
you last viewed?
A. Home
B. Stop
C. Refresh
D. Back
4. What can you do to keep your computer secure?

A. Install and update anti-virus software.
B. Use a firewall.
C. Avoid suspicious e-mail messages.
D. All of the above.

A. Internet Explorer keeps a history of visited Web pages for 20 days.
B. A search engine lets you search for Web pages by topic.
C. Eudora is an e-mail program that comes with Windows XP.
D. You can download and save images from a Web page onto your computer.
6. W a O E , S
button on the toolbar will instantly send the message to its destination.
(True or False?)

A. When you reply to a message, Outlook Express includes the content of the original
me age make i ea f he eci ien kn hich me age e e lying to.
B. E-mail messages can contain files, such as pictures and word processing documents
called attachments.
C. You can send anonymous e-mail using the Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) field.
D. You can save a list of Web pages you visit frequently in Interne E l e Fa i e
list.
8. What is a firewall?
A. A security device that keeps your computer secure by restricting the information that
comes into your computer.
B. What you put around your cubicle after doing something wrong.
C. There is no such thing.
D. A fire prevention tactic used by firefighters.
Homework
1. Get a connection to the Internet.
2. Open Internet Explorer.
3. Go to the Yahoo Web site (www.yahoo.com).
4. Search the Internet for information on Russia.
5. Spend at least 30 minutes browsing the Web on whatever topics you want.
Quiz Answers
1. B. A Web server is a computer that holds Web pages and is connected to the Internet 24
hours a day so that people can view those Web pages.
2. True.
3. C. The Back button returns you to the Web page you just left.
4. D. You should install and update anti-virus software, use a firewall, and avoid suspicious
e-mail messages to keep your computer secure.
5. C. Eudora is a popular e-mail g am, b i d e n c me i h Wind XP: O l k
Express does.

6. False. This was a tricky question when you click the Send button, you save the message
to the Inbox folder. To send any messages that are in the Inbox, click the Send and
Receive button on the toolbar.
7. C. Adding a recipient to the Blind Carbon Copy field allows them to receive a message
without seeing who else received the message.
8. A. A firewall is a device that keeps your computer secure by restricting the information
that comes into your computer. Windows has been updated with a Firewall in Service
Pack 2.
274 Index
Index
average access time, hard drive ............. 65
1
16-bit color.............................................55 B
back up
2 hard drive ........................................... 67
24-bit color.............................................55 tape drive ........................................... 74
286 processor .........................................39 backspace key ........................................ 47
Backspace key ............................. 131, 163
BASIC ................................................... 95
3
battery life, laptop .................................. 30
32-bit color.............................................55
bit ........................................................... 41
386 processor .........................................39
blind carbon copies (Bcc) .................... 259
3D graphics card ....................................54
bold ...................................................... 172
broadband modem ......................... 62, 110
4 browsing
486 processor .........................................39 contents of your computer ....... 194, 196
help .................................................. 176
8 Web pages ........................................ 242
8088 processor .......................................39 buffer, printer ......................................... 56
bus speed................................................ 22
A bus width................................................ 22
Access, Microsoft ..................................88 buttons, toolbar .................................... 156
accounting software ...............................91 buying a computer ................................. 28
AccuPoint pointing device .....................51 buying a notebook.................................. 30
adding byte ................................................ 41, 193
names to address book .....................260
Address Bar, Internet Explorer ............241 C
address book C drive ................................................. 192
adding names ...................................260 C, C++ ................................................... 95
selecting names from .......................258 cable modem .................................. 62, 110
AGP .......................................................23 cache, memory ....................................... 24
Alt + Tab key combination...................148 camera, digital........................................ 48
alt key.....................................................46 carbon copies (Cc) ............................... 259
Alt key .................................................131 cartridges, printer ................................... 56
application program ...............................83 case, computer ....................................... 16
arrow keys ......................................47, 131 CD command (DOS) ........................... 223
ASP ........................................................95 CD-R ...................................................... 69
assembly language .................................94 CD-ROM ....................................... 69, 193
Athlon processor ....................................38 CD-ROM drive ................................ 17, 68
attaching file, e-mail ............................259 CD-RW .................................................. 69

Index 275
Celeron processor .................................. 38 folders .............................................. 200

center alignment .................................. 175 text and information ........................ 170
Central Processing Unit ...............See CPU
check boxes ......................................... 158 D
clicking ................................................ 124 database ................................................. 88
client/server network ........................... 105 date
clipboard .............................................. 171 finding file by .................................. 214
closing a window ................................. 144 sort files by ...................................... 210
COBOL.................................................. 95 sorting files by ................................. 210
color DEL Command (DOS) ........................ 223
graphics card ...................................... 54 delete key............................................... 47
InkJet printer ...................................... 58 Delete key .................................... 131, 163
laser printer ........................................ 59 deleting
color depth ............................................. 54 e-mail ............................................... 265
color laser printer ................................... 59 files .................................................. 202
COM port............................................... 21 folders .............................................. 200
combo boxes ........................................ 158 Recyle Bin ....................................... 206
CompactFlash ........................................ 48 text ................................................... 162
composing e-mail ................................ 258 delsecting files ..................................... 212
compression ........................................... 67 Details view ......................................... 210
computer dialog boxes ......................................... 158
back of ............................................... 20 combo boxes .................................... 158
buying ................................................ 28 list boxes .......................................... 158
inside of ............................................. 18 text boxes ......................................... 158
laptop ................................................. 15 digital camera ........................................ 48
Macintosh .......................................... 15 digital modem ................................ 62, 110
mainframe .......................................... 15 DIR command (DOS) .......................... 223
networked .......................................... 15 DOS commands ................................... 223
overview ............................................ 14 DOS prompt ........................................ 222
pc 15 dot matrix printer ................................... 59
PDA ................................................... 15 dot pitch, monitor .................................. 52
performance ....................................... 26 double-clicking .................................... 124
ports ................................................... 20 downloading files ................................ 250
server ................................................. 15 dragging and dropping ......................... 126
speed .................................................. 26 resizing a window ............................ 146
upgrading ........................................... 32 window to new position ................... 145
computer case ........................................ 16 drivers
computer, viewing contents of ............. 194 downloading from Internet .............. 250
Copy command .................................... 170 drives
COPY command (DOS) ...................... 223 types of ............................................ 192
copying DSL modem................................... 62, 110
files .................................................. 204 Duron processor .................................... 38
folders .............................................. 200 DVD drive ....................................... 17, 70
text and information ......................... 170 DVD+R ................................................. 71
cpu ......................................................... 26 DVD+RW .............................................. 71
CPU ................................................. 18, 38 DVD-R .................................................. 70
upgrading ........................................... 33 DVD-RAM ............................................ 71
CRT ....................................................... 52 DVD-ROM ............................................ 70
ctrl key ................................................... 46 DVD-RW ............................................... 71
Ctrl key ................................................ 131
Cut command ....................................... 170
E
cutting
editing text ........................................... 162
files .................................................. 204
e-mail
276 Index
address book, adding names.............260 types of ............................................ 208

address, overview .............................256 finding
attaching files to ...............................259 files .................................................. 214
composing ........................................258 help .................................................. 178
deleting.............................................265 information on the Web.................... 244
forwarding ........................................265 firewall ................................................. 108
hotmail .............................................256 Firewire port .......................................... 21
introduction to ..................................256 flash cards .............................................. 74
printing .............................................263 flat panel monitor ................................... 52
receiving and reading .......................262 floppy disk
replying ............................................264 displaying properties of ................... 194
sending .............................................258 formatting .......................................... 75
using Outlook Express .....................256 viewing contents of .......................... 194
emotion, displaying in e-mail...............264 floppy disk ........................................... 192
emptying Recycle Bin ..........................206 floppy disks
End key ..........................................47, 131 description of ..................................... 72
Energy Star compliance .........................53 floppy drive ...................................... 16, 72
enter key.................................................47 folder path ............................................ 208
Enter key ..............................................131 folders
ergonomic keyboard...............................46 copying ............................................ 200
esc key ...................................................46 creating ............................................ 198
Esc key .................................................131 deleting ............................................ 200
Ethernet port ..........................................21 moving ............................................. 200
Excel, Microsoft .....................................87 opening ............................................ 196
Excite ...................................................245 renaming .......................................... 198
Exiting Windows XP............................132 root folder ........................................ 197
expansion card .......................................18 selecting multiple ............................. 212
expansion slot ..................................18, 22 fonts
Explorer changing type and size ..................... 172
dragging and dropping in .................220 using bold, italics, and underlining .. 174
Extranet ................................................108 formatting text
font size............................................ 172
F font type ........................................... 172
F1 key ....................................46, 131, 176 paragraph alignment ........................ 175
Favorites Web pages ............................246 using bold, italics, and underlining .. 174
file extensions ......................................208 formatting, floppy disk .......................... 75
file management ...................................192 FORTRAN ............................................. 95
files forwarding e-mail ................................ 265
copying.............................................204 fragmentation ......................................... 67
deleting.............................................202
displaying details .............................210 G
extensions.........................................208 game port ............................................... 21
finding ..............................................214 gb ........................................................... 41
moving .............................................204 GHz........................................................ 38
naming .............................................164 gigabyte ................................................. 41
opening.....................................164, 202 gigahertz ................................................ 38
printing .............................................169 graphical user interface .......................... 82
renaming ..........................................202 graphics card .......................................... 26
rules for naming ...............................164 grapics card ............................................ 54
saving ...............................................164 GUI ........................................................ 82
saving in different formats and
locations .......................................180 H
selecting multiple .............................212 hard disk .............................................. 192
sorting ..............................................210 upgrading ........................................... 33

Index 277
viewing contents of .......................... 194 connecting to ................................... 238

hard drive ............................................... 17 introduction to ......................... 106, 236
back up............................................... 67 Internet Service Provider ..................... 238
compression ....................................... 67 Intranet ................................................ 108
external .............................................. 64 Iomega ................................................... 73
fragmentation ............................... 27, 67 ISA ........................................................ 23
free space ........................................... 27 ISDN modem ................................. 62, 110
internal ............................................... 64 ISP ...............See Internet Service Provider
maintenance ....................................... 66 IT 12
repair .................................................. 67
speed .................................................. 27 J
hardware ................................................ 12 Java ........................................................ 95
help JavaScript .............................................. 95
Contents tab ..................................... 176 Jaz drive................................................. 73
Index tab .......................................... 178 joystick .................................................. 51
Search tab ........................................ 178 joystick port ........................................... 21
Help JSP ......................................................... 95
F1 key .............................................. 131
highlighting text ................................... 166
K
history of viewed Web pages ............... 248
kb ........................................................... 41
home key ............................................... 47
keyboard .................................. 17, 46, 130
Home key............................................. 131
keyboard combinations ........................ 130
home page, changing ........................... 247
keyboard port ......................................... 21
hotmail ................................................. 256
kilobyte .......................................... 41, 193
HTML .................................................... 95
kilobyte (K or KB) .............................. 193
hub, network ........................................ 105
hyperlink .............................................. 242
L
LAN ..................................................... 105
I
laptop ..................................................... 15
IDE ........................................................ 64
laptop, buying ........................................ 30
images, saving from Web pages........... 250
Large Icons view ................................. 210
information security ............................. 254
laser printer ............................................ 59
information technology (IT) .................. 12
LCD monitor ......................................... 52
ink, printer ............................................. 56
left align............................................... 174
InkJet printer .......................................... 58
left mouse button ................................. 124
input ....................................................... 14
light pen ................................................. 51
input device
line in jack ............................................. 21
AccuPoint pointing device ................. 51
Linux ..................................................... 84
joystick .............................................. 51
list boxes .............................................. 158
keyboard ............................................ 46
List view .............................................. 210
light pen ............................................. 51
Look in list........................................... 164
microphone ........................................ 51
LPT port ................................................ 21
mouse ................................................. 44
LS-120 SuperDrive ................................ 74
scanner ............................................... 51
touch pad ........................................... 51
trackball ............................................. 51 M
input devices Mac OS X .............................................. 84
keyboard ............................................ 17 machine language .................................. 94
mouse ................................................. 17 Macintosh .............................................. 15
scanner ............................................... 17 mainframe .............................................. 15
input/output device ................................ 63 maximizing a window ......................... 140
insertion point ...................................... 162 mb .......................................................... 41
Internet MD command (DOS) .......................... 223
278 Index
megabyte ................................................41 phone lines ....................................... 110

megabyte (MB) ....................................193 workgroup ........................................ 105
megahertz ...............................................38 notebook ................................................ 15
megapixel ...............................................48 notebook, buying ................................... 30
memory ............................................18, 26
cards ...................................................48 O
compared to ROM..............................42 opening
graphics card ......................................54 files .................................................. 202
measuring ...........................................40 files in programs .............................. 164
printer .................................................56 folders .............................................. 196
upgrading ...........................................33 My Computer ................................... 194
memory cache ........................................24 operating system .............................. 83, 84
Memory Stick ........................................48 optical mouse ......................................... 44
menu ....................................................154 Outlook Express
MHz .......................................................38 address book, adding names ............ 260
microphone ......................................51, 60 address book, selecting names ......... 258
microphone jack .....................................21 attaching files to messages ............... 259
mimimizing a window .........................140 composing messages ........................ 258
modem ........................................... 62, 110 deleting ............................................ 265
modem port ............................................21 folders .............................................. 257
monitor .............................................17, 52 forwarding........................................ 265
monitor port ...........................................21 printing............................................. 263
motherboard ...........................................18 receiving messages .......................... 262
mouse .......................................17, 44, 124 replying ............................................ 264
clicking.............................................124 sending messages ............................. 258
double-clicking ................................124 starting ............................................. 256
dragging and dropping .....................126 output ..................................................... 14
left mouse button..............................124 output device
pointing ............................................124 graphics card ...................................... 54
right mouse button ...........................128 monitor ............................................... 52
right-clicking ....................................128 printer........................................... 56, 58
mouse port .............................................21 sound card .......................................... 60
moving output devices
files ..................................................204 monitor ............................................... 17
folders ..............................................200 printer................................................. 17
window ............................................145 speakers ............................................. 17
MP3 file .................................................60
MS-DOS ................................................84
P
MS-DOS commands ............................223
page down key ....................................... 47
MS-DOS prompt ..................................222
Page Down key .................................... 131
multifunction printer ..............................59
page up key ............................................ 47
multitasking ...........................................27
Page Up key ......................................... 131
My Computer .......................................194
Palm OS ................................................. 84
My Computer .......................................120
PalmPilot ............................................... 15
My Documents .....................................120
palmtop .................................................. 15
My Network Places ..............................120
paragraph alignment ............................ 175
parallel port ............................................ 21
N Paste command .................................... 170
naming files..........................................164 pasting
network port ...........................................21 files .................................................. 204
networks ...............................................105 folders .............................................. 200
client/server network ........................105 text and information ......................... 170
components ......................................105 patches, downloading .......................... 250
peer-to-peer network ........................105 path ...................................................... 208

Index 279
pc 15 speed .................................................. 56
PCI ......................................................... 23 printer port ............................................. 21
PCMCIA cards....................................... 18 printing
PDA ....................................................... 15 e-mail ............................................... 263
peer-to-peer network ............................ 105 number of copies ............................. 169
Pentium processor.................................. 38 options ............................................. 169
performance, computer .......................... 26 page range........................................ 169
Perl......................................................... 95 properties ......................................... 169
personal computer.................................. 15 selecting printers .............................. 169
PHP ........................................................ 95 processor
pictures 286 ..................................................... 39
saving from Web pages .................... 250 386 ..................................................... 39
plotter..................................................... 59 486 ..................................................... 39
Pocket PC .............................................. 15 Athlon ................................................ 38
pointer .................................................. 124 Celeron .............................................. 38
pointing ................................................ 124 Duron ................................................. 38
ports ....................................................... 20 Pentium .............................................. 38
COM .................................................. 21 programming languages ........................ 94
Ethernet.............................................. 21 programs
Firewire.............................................. 21 closing ............................................. 144
game .................................................. 21 maximizing ...................................... 142
IEEE 1394 ......................................... 21 minimizing....................................... 142
joystick .............................................. 21 opening files in ................................ 164
keyboard ............................................ 21 printing from.................................... 169
line in ................................................. 21 restoring ........................................... 142
line out ............................................... 21 saving files in................................... 164
LPT .................................................... 21 starting ............................................. 138
microphone ........................................ 21 switching between ........................... 148
modem ............................................... 21
monitor .............................................. 21 Q
mouse ................................................. 21 QuickBooks ........................................... 91
network .............................................. 21 Quicken ................................................. 91
parallel ............................................... 21
phone ................................................. 21
R
printer ................................................ 21
RAM ................................................ 18, 26
SCSI ................................................... 21
compared to ROM ............................. 42
serial .................................................. 21
measuring .......................................... 40
USB ................................................... 21
upgrading ........................................... 33
PowerPoint, Microsoft ........................... 90
RD command (DOS) ........................... 223
presentation software ............................. 90
receiving e-mail ................................... 262
Print command ..................................... 169
Recycle Bin ......................................... 120
Print Dialog box .................................. 169
emptying .......................................... 206
printer .................................................... 17
retrieving deleted files from ............ 206
cartridges and toner ........................... 56
refresh a Web page .............................. 243
color ................................................... 56
refresh rate, monitor .............................. 52
color laser .......................................... 59
removable drive ................................... 193
dot matrix........................................... 59
RENAME command (DOS) ................ 223
grayscale ............................................ 56
renaming
InkJet ................................................. 58
files .................................................. 202
laser.................................................... 59
folders .............................................. 198
multifunction ..................................... 59
repair
plotter ................................................. 59
hard drive ........................................... 67
resolution ........................................... 56
replacing text ....................................... 166
280 Index
reply, e-mail .........................................264 sound card .............................................. 60

resizing a window ................................146 sound card ports ..................................... 21
resolution speakers ........................................... 17, 60
digital cameras ...................................48 speed, computer ..................................... 26
printer .................................................56 spooler, printer ....................................... 56
screen .................................................54 spreadsheet............................................. 87
Restart option .......................................133 SQL........................................................ 95
restoring a window...............................140 Stand by option .................................... 133
right mouse button ...............................128 Start button........................................... 120
right-clicking ........................................128 Start command ..................................... 138
ROM ......................................................42 starting
ROM-BIOS ............................................18 programs .......................................... 138
root folder ............................................197 Status bar ............................................. 140
stop transfer of Web pages ................... 243
S storage device
Save As command ................................180 CD-ROM drive .................................. 68
saving DVD drive ......................................... 70
files in a program .............................164 flash card ............................................ 74
images from Web pages ...................250 floppy drive ........................................ 72
scanner .............................................17, 51 hard drive ........................................... 64
screen saver ............................................53 Jaz drive ............................................. 73
scroll bars .....................................140, 158 LS-120 SuperDrive ............................ 74
SCSI .......................................................64 tape drive ........................................... 74
SCSI port ...............................................21 USB flash drive .................................. 74
search Zip drive ............................................ 73
Web ..................................................244 SuperDrive ............................................. 74
searching switching between program ................. 148
for files .............................................214 system unit ............................................. 16
help ..................................................178 systems development ............................. 96
selecting
multiple files and folders .................212 T
text ...................................................162 tab key.................................................... 47
selecting text ........................................166 Tab key ................................................ 131
sending e-mail ......................................258 tape backup ............................................ 17
serial port ...............................................21 Task window ........................................ 148
shortcut menus .....................................128 taskbar
Shut Down options ...............................133 switching between programs............ 148
Shutting down Windows XP ................132 taskbar .................................................. 120
Small Icons view ..................................210 telephone port ........................................ 21
SmartMedia ............................................48 terabyte .................................................. 41
software..................................................12 text
accounting ..........................................91 copying ............................................ 170
application program ...........................83 cutting .............................................. 170
database..............................................88 deleting ............................................ 162
operating system ................................83 editing .............................................. 162
presentation ........................................90 pasting .............................................. 170
programming languages .....................94 replacing .......................................... 166
spreadsheet .........................................87 selecting ........................................... 166
versions ..............................................83 text boxes ............................................. 158
Web Authoring ...................................93 thumbnail ............................................... 82
Web browser ......................................92 title bar ................................................. 140
word processing .................................86 toner, laser .............................................. 56
Solitaire toolbars ................................................ 156
dragging and dropping .....................126 touch pad................................................ 51

Index 281
track ball ................................................ 51 closing ..................................... 140, 144

turning off computer ............................ 132 maximizing ...................................... 142
maximizing button ........................... 140
U menus .............................................. 154
underline .............................................. 174 minimizing............................... 140, 142
Undo command ................................... 168 moving ............................................. 145
upgrades, software ................................. 83 resizing ............................................ 146
upgrading a computer ............................ 32 restoring ................................... 140, 142
USB flash drive ..................................... 74 switching between ........................... 148
USB port ................................................ 21 Windows XP
exiting .............................................. 132
Windows, operating system ................... 84
V
WinZIP program .................................. 251
versions, software .................................. 83
wireless mouse ...................................... 44
video card ........................................ 26, 54
word processing ..................................... 86
Video port .............................................. 21
Word, Microsoft .................................... 86
virus, computer ...................................... 67
WordPad
Visual Basic ........................................... 95
cutting, copying, and pasting text .... 170
deleting text ..................................... 162
W editing text ....................................... 162
wallpaper entering text in ................................. 160
saving images from Web pages ........ 250 paragraph alignment ........................ 175
WAN .................................................... 105 printing ............................................ 169
Web .............................................. 106, 236 selecting and replacing text ............. 166
browsing .......................................... 242 using Undo ...................................... 168
downloading files ............................ 250 workgroup, networks ........................... 105
Favorites .......................................... 246 World Wide Web.......................... 106, 236
history of viewed Web pages ........... 248
home page, changing ....................... 247
X
saving images .................................. 250
XCOPY command (DOS) ................... 223
search ............................................... 244
XML ...................................................... 95
WEB
links ................................................. 242
Web address ......................................... 240 Y
Web Authoring software ........................ 93 Yahoo ................................................... 245
Web browser ........................................ 238
web cam ................................................. 48 Z
Web server ................................... 106, 236 Zip drive .......................................... 17, 73
Web, moving to a specific Web page ... 240 zipped files .......................................... 251
window

Computer Basics PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Computer Basics PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Computer Basics PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Computer Basics

Chapter One: The Essentials ............................................................................................ 11

Lesson 3-1: Understanding Graphical User Interfaces ......................................................... 82

2003 CustomGuide, Inc.

How to Use the Lessons

Illustrations show what your

Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5

guide you through the exercise.

2003 CustomGuide, Inc.

When ee a ke b a d in c i n like e <Ctrl> + <B>, h ld e and

2. Click cell A4 and type Annual Sales.

Unde and ha de e mine a com e e fo mance

See what you should look for when buying a computer

Lesson 1-1: Hardware, Software,

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Two basic components make up a computer: hardware and software. Y im l can ha e

Table 1-1: Parts of a Computer

Lesson 1-2: Computer Overview

Input Process/Storage Output

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Table 1-2: Types of Computers

Lesson 1-3: The Front of a

CD-ROM or System unit

Table 1-3: Wha on he F on o O ide of a Com e Ca e?

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Lesson 1-4: The Inside of a

Hard disk drive

N ha kn ha n he ide, le c ank en ha m e i c m e ca e and

Everything plugs into a Table 1-4: Wha In ide a Com e Ca e?

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Lesson 1-5: The Back of a

Keyboard port Mouse port

Parallel port (printer)

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Table 1-5: Wha on he Back of a Com uter Case?

Designed to replace older Serial and Parallel ports, the

Lesson 1-6: System Bus and

Highway System Bus

Y ef i ! Y j b gh an e en i e digi al camc de nl find ha i can

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

A if hi e en c nf ing en gh he e a e e e al b e he e. The incl de:

Table 1-6: Common Types of Expansion Cards

Lesson 1-7: Memory Cache

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Lesson 1-8: Computer

W nde ing h neighb c m e i m ch fa e han c m e ? The e a e a

Table 1-7: Factors that Affect Computer Performance

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Free Hard Disk

Lesson 1-9: Buying a Desktop

N hing e han g ing he computer store and listening to a know-it-all salesperson

Table 1-8: Desktop Computer B e G ide

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End, Gaming

* This information was updated May 2003.

Lesson 1-10: Buying a Notebook

2003 CustomGuide Inc.

Included Devices and Features

Table 1-9: No ebook B e G ide